The user manual is for GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC System,

divided into Programming and Operation.

This manual describes the various matters concerning the operations of

this CNC system as much as possible. However, it is impossible to give detailed

descriptions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations due to space

limitation and product specific applications. Therefore, the matters not specially

described herein should be considered as “impossible” or “unallowable”.

This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. All

rights are reserved. It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or

reprint this manual. GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. reserves the right to ascertain

their legal liability.

 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Preface

Dear users,

It is our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this machining center

CNC system of GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system produced by GSK

CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.

This book is “Programming and Operation Manual”, which introduces the

programming and operation of GSK980TC3 Series Bus CNC Turning System

(software version V1.4) in detail.

To ensure the product works in a safe and efficient state, please read this

manual carefully before installation and operation.

Warnings

Improper operations may cause unexpected accidents. Only those

qualified staff are allowed to operate this system.

Special notes: The power supply fixed on/in the cabinet is exclusively used for the
CNC system made by GSK.
It cannot be applied for other purposes, or else it may cause serious
danger.

II
 Preface and Precautions

Declaration!
z We try to describe all the various matters as much as possible in this
警告、注意和注释的说明
manual. However, it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all
the unnecessary or unallowable operations because there are too
many possibilities. Therefore, the matters not specially described
herein should be considered as “impossible” or “unallowable”.

Warning！
z Before installing, connecting, programming and operating the product,

please read this manual and the manual provided by the machine tool

builder carefully, and operate the product according to these manuals.

Otherwise, the operation may cause damage to the product and

machine tool, or even cause personal injury.

Caution！
z The functions and specifications (e.g., precision and speed) described
in this manual are only for this product itself. For those CNC machine
tools installing this product, the actual function configuration and
specifications depend on the designs of the machine tool builders.
Moreover, the function configuration and specifications of the CNC
machine tool are subject to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder.

All specifications and designs in this manual are subject to change without
notice.

III
 Preface and Precautions

Safety responsibility

Manufacturer Responsibility
——Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated on the design
and configuration of the provided CNC systems.
——Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC and its accessories
——Be responsible for the provided information and advice.

User Responsibility
——Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system operation
procedures and familiar with the safety operation.
——Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding, changing or
modifying the original CNC systems and accessories.
——Be responsible for the danger caused by failing to observe the
operation, maintenance, installation and storage in the manual.

This user manual shall be kept by the end user.

Thank you for your kind support when you are using the products of GSK
CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.

V
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Safety notes

■ Transportation and storage

z Do not pile up the packing boxes over 6 layers.
z Never climb the packing box, neither stand on it, nor place heavy objects on it.
z Do not move or drag the product by the cables connected to it.
z Avoid impact or scratch to the panel and screen.
z Packing box should be protected from dampness, insolation and drench.
■ Open-package inspection
z Confirm the product is the one you purchased after opening the package.
z Check whether the product is damaged during transportation.
z Confirm all the elements are complete without damage by referring to the list.
z If there is incorrect product type, incomplete accessories or damage, please
contact us in time.
■ Connection
z Only qualified personnel can connect and inspect the system.
z The system must be earthed. The earth resistance should not be greater than
0.1Ω, and a neutral wire (zero wire) cannot be used as an earth wire.
z The connection must be correct and secured. Otherwise, the product may be
damaged or unexpected results may occur.
z Connect the surge absorbing diode to the product in the specified direction;
otherwise the product may be damaged.
z Turn off the power before inserting or unplugging a plug, or opening the electric
cabinet.
■ Troubleshooting
z Turn off the power supply before troubleshooting or replacing components.
z Overhaul the system when there is a short circuit or overload, and do not restart
it until the trouble is removed.
z Do not turn ON/OFF the product frequently, and the ON/OFF interval should be 1
minute at least.

IV
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Ⅰ Programming

This part gives an introduction to the specification, product

portfolio, parameter configuration, code codes as well as
program format of GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC
System.

Ⅱ Operation

This part gives an introduction to the operation items of

GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC System.

Appendix
This part gives an introduction to the delivery standard
parameters and alarm list of GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning
CNC System.

VI
 Contents

Contents

Ⅰ PROGRAMMING .................................................................................. 1
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................. 3
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Product Module Definition ....................................................................................................... 5
CHAPTER 2 PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS ......................................................................... 7
2.1 Controllable Axis ....................................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Axis Name ................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3 Axis Display ............................................................................................................................... 8
2.4 Machine Zero and Machine Coordinate System ................................................................. 8
2.5 Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................................................... 9
2.6 Absolute Value Programming and Incremental Value Programming ............................. 10
2. 7 Diameter and Raduis Method to Programming .................................................................11
2. 8 Mode, Non-Mode and Initial State .......................................................................................11
CHAPTER 3 STRUCTURE OF AN PART PROGRAM.................................................................... 13
3.1 Structure of a Program........................................................................................................... 13
3.1.1 Program Name ............................................................................................................... 13
3.1.2 Sequence Number and Blocks ....................................................................................... 14
3.1.3 Word ............................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 General Structure of a Program ........................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Subprogram Writing ....................................................................................................... 17
3.2.2 Subprogram Call ............................................................................................................ 17
3.2.3 Program End .................................................................................................................. 18
CHAPTER 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION : G CODE ................................................................... 19
4.1 Categories of Preparatory Function G Code ...................................................................... 19
4.2 G code ...................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.1 Rapid Positioning G00 ................................................................................................... 20
4.2.2 Linear Interpolation G01 ................................................................................................ 22
4.2.3 Circular (Helical) Interpolation G02/G03 ...................................................................... 23
4.2.4 Dwell (G04) ................................................................................................................... 27
4.2.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection G54～G59 .................................................... 28
4.2.7 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System G50 ................................................................ 30
4.2.8 Plane Selection G17/G18/G19 ....................................................................................... 31
4.2.9 Skip Function（G31） .................................................................................................. 32
4.2.10 Inch/Metric Conversion G20/G21................................................................................ 33
4.2.11 Optional Angle Chamfering/Corner Rounding ............................................................ 34
4.2.12 Constant Pitch Thread Cutting（G32） ...................................................................... 35
4.2.13 Variable Pitch Thread Cutting（G34） ....................................................................... 39
4.3 Reference Point G Code ....................................................................................................... 44
4.3.1 Automatic Return to Machine Zero（G28）................................................................. 45
4.4 Simple Canned Cycle G Code.............................................................................................. 46
4.4.1 Axial Cutting Cycle（G90） ......................................................................................... 46
4.4.2 Radial Cutting Cycle（G94） ....................................................................................... 49
4.4.3 Thread Cutting Cycle（G92） ...................................................................................... 51
4.4.4 Notes of Single Fixed Cycle Codes ............................................................................... 54
4.5 Compound Fixed Cycle Code ............................................................................................... 54
4.5.1 Axial Roughing Cycle（G71 type Ⅰ） ....................................................................... 54
4.5.2 Grooving Cycle Machining（G71 type Ⅱ） ............................................................... 58
VII
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.5.3 Radial Roughing Cycle（G72 type I） ......................................................................... 59

4.5.4 Grooving Cycle Machining（G72 type II）.................................................................. 62
4.5.5 Closed Cutting Cycle（G73）....................................................................................... 65
4.5.6 Finishing Cycle（G70）................................................................................................ 68
4.5.7 Axial Grooving Cycle（G74）...................................................................................... 68
4.5.8 Radial Grooving Cycle（G75） .................................................................................... 70
4.5.9 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle（G76） ........................................................................ 72
4.5.10 Notes for Compound Fixed Cycle Code ...................................................................... 75
4.6 Tool Compensation Function ................................................................................................ 75
4.6.1 Basic Concept of Tool Compensation Function C ......................................................... 76
4.6.2 Tool Compensation ........................................................................................................ 84
4.6.3 Notes for Tool Compensation C ..................................................................................... 97
4.6.4 Machining Examples of Tool Compensation C.............................................................. 98
4.7 Macro Function G Code....................................................................................................... 101
4.7.1 User Macro Program .................................................................................................... 101
4.7.2 Macro Variable ............................................................................................................. 102
4.7.3 Non-Modal Call G65 .................................................................................................... 108
4.7.4 User Macro Program Function A ................................................................................. 108
4.7.5 User Macro Program Function B ................................................................................. 112
CHAPTER 5 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M CODE ............................................................. 119
5.1 M codes Controlled by PLC ................................................................................................ 119
5.1.1 Spindle Rotation CCW/CW（M03, M04） ................................................................ 120
5.1.2 Spindle Stop（M05） .................................................................................................. 120
5.1.3 Cooling ON/OFF（M08, M09） ................................................................................. 120
5.1.4 Chuck Control（M12、M13） ................................................................................... 120
5.1.5 Spindle Speed/Position Mode Switch (M14, M15)...................................................... 120
5.1.6 Spindle Orientation, Spindle Orientation Cancel（M18，M19） .............................. 120
5.1.7 C-Axis Releasing, Clamping（M20, M21） ............................................................... 120
5.1.8 Spindle Gear Control（M41, M42, M43） ................................................................. 120
5.2 M Codes Used by Control Program ................................................................................... 121
5.2.1 Program End and Return（M30, M02） ..................................................................... 121
5.2.2 Program Dwell（M00） .............................................................................................. 121
5.2.3 Program Optional Stop（M01） ................................................................................. 121
Appendix

5.2.4 Subprogram Calling（M98） ...................................................................................... 121

5.2.5 Program End and Return（M99）............................................................................... 122
CHAPTER 6 SPINDLE FUNCTION S CODE ............................................................................. 123
6.1 Spindle Analog Control ........................................................................................................ 123
6.2 Spindle Switch Value Control .............................................................................................. 123
6.3 Constant Surface Speed Control G96/G97 ...................................................................... 123
CHAPTER 7 FEED FUNCTION F CODE .................................................................................. 127
7.1 Rapid Traverse ...................................................................................................................... 127
7.2 Cutting Feedrate ................................................................................................................... 127
7.2.1 Feed per Minute（G98）............................................................................................. 127
7.2.2 Feed per Revolution（G99） ...................................................................................... 128
7.3 Tangential Speed Control .................................................................................................... 128
7.4 Keys for Feedrate Override ................................................................................................. 129
7.5 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ................................................................................. 129
7.6 Acceleration/Deceleration at the Corner in a Block ......................................................... 130
CHAPTER 8 TOOL FUNCTION ............................................................................................... 131
8.1 T Command Format Meaning ............................................................................................. 131
8.2 Tool Offset .............................................................................................................................. 131
8.3 Programming Example ........................................................................................................ 132

VIII
 Contents

Ⅱ OPERATION ..................................................................................... 135

CHAPTER 1 OPERATION PANEL ............................................................................................ 137
1.1 Panel Layout ......................................................................................................................... 137
1.2 Panel Function Explanation ................................................................................................ 138
1.2.1 LCD（Liquid Crystal Display）Display Area ............................................................ 138
1.2.2 Editing Keyboard Area ................................................................................................. 138
1.2.3 Screen Operation Keys ................................................................................................. 139
1.2.4 Machine Control Area .................................................................................................. 140
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM POWER ON/OFF AND SAFETY OPERATION .......................................... 145
2.1 System Power-on ................................................................................................................. 145
2.2 Power off ................................................................................................................................ 145
2.3 Safety Operations ................................................................................................................. 146
2.3.1 Reset Operation ............................................................................................................ 146
2.3.2 Emergency Stop ........................................................................................................... 146
2.3.3 Feed Hold ..................................................................................................................... 147
2.4 Cycle Start and Feed Hold .................................................................................................. 147
2.5 Overtravel Protection ........................................................................................................... 147
2.5.1 Hardware Overtravel Protection .................................................................................. 147
2.5.2 Software Overtravel Protection .................................................................................... 147
2.5.3 Overtravel Alarm Release ............................................................................................ 148
CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING ................................. 149
3.1 Position Display .................................................................................................................... 149
3.1.1 Four Types of Position Display .................................................................................... 149
3.1.2 Display of Cut Time, Part Count, Programming Speed, Override and Actual Speed .. 151
3.1.3 Relative Coordinate Clearing and Halving .................................................................. 152
3.1.4 Bus Monitor Page Display ........................................................................................... 154
3.2 Program Display ................................................................................................................... 154
3.3 System Display ..................................................................................................................... 157
3.3.1 CNC Display, modification and setting........................................................................ 157
3.3.2 Display, Modification and Setting for Parameters ....................................................... 158
3.3.3 Display, Modification and Setting for Screw Pitch Offset ........................................... 161
3.3.4 Backup, Restoration and Transmission for Data .......................................................... 162
3.3.5 Bus Servo Parameter Display, Modification and Setting ............................................. 165
3.3.6 Time Limit Stop Display .............................................................................................. 174
3.4 Tool Offset Display................................................................................................................ 177
3.4.1 Offset Display, Modification, Setting .......................................................................... 178
3.4.2 Workpiece Coordinate Setting Page ............................................................................. 180
3.4.3 Macro Variables Display, Modification and Setting .................................................... 183
3.5 Graphic Display..................................................................................................................... 184
3.6 Diagnosis Display ................................................................................................................. 186
3.6.1 Diagnosis Data Display ................................................................................................ 186
3.6.2 Signal State Viewing .................................................................................................... 191
3.7 Alarm Display ........................................................................................................................ 191
3.8 PLC Display ........................................................................................................................... 193
3.9 Help Display .......................................................................................................................... 195
CHAPTER 4 MANUAL OPERATION ........................................................................................ 203
4.1 Coordinate Axis Movement ................................................................................................. 203
4.1.1 Manual Feed ................................................................................................................. 203
4.1.2 Manual Rapid Traverse ................................................................................................ 203
4.1.3 Manual Feedrate and Manual Rapid Traverse Speed Selection ................................... 203
4.1.4 Manual Intervention ..................................................................................................... 204
4.2 Spindle Control...................................................................................................................... 206
4.2.1 Spindle Rotation CCW................................................................................................. 206
4.2.2 Spindle Rotation CW ................................................................................................... 206

IX
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.2.3 Spindle Stop ................................................................................................................. 206

4.2.4 Spindle Automatic Gear Shift ...................................................................................... 206
4.3 Other Manual Operations .................................................................................................... 207
4.3.1 Cooling Control ............................................................................................................ 207
4.3.2 Lubricating Control ...................................................................................................... 207
4.3.3 Chuck Control .............................................................................................................. 207
4.3.4 Tailstock Control .......................................................................................................... 207
4.3.5 Manual Tool Change Control ....................................................................................... 207
4.4 Toolsetting Operation ........................................................................................................... 207
4.4.1 Trial Cut Toolsetting..................................................................................................... 208
4.4.2 Machine Zero Return Toolsetting ................................................................................. 209
4.5 Tuning a Tool Compensation Value ................................................................................... 212
CHAPTER 5 STEP OPERATION .............................................................................................. 213
5.1 Step Feed ............................................................................................................................... 213
5.1.1 Selection of Moving Amount ....................................................................................... 213
5.1.2 Selection of Moving Axis and Direction ...................................................................... 213
5.1.3 Step Feed Explanation .................................................................................................. 213
5.2 Auxiliary Control in Step Mode ........................................................................................... 214
CHAPTER 6 MPG OPERATION ............................................................................................. 215
6.1 MPG Feed.............................................................................................................................. 215
6.1.1 Selection of Moving Axis and Direction ...................................................................... 215
6.1.2 MPG Feed Explanation ................................................................................................ 216
6.2 Control in MPG Interruption ................................................................................................ 216
6.2.1 MPG Interruption Operation ........................................................................................ 216
6.2.2 Relationship between MPG Interruption and Other Functions .................................... 217
6.2.3 MPG Interruption Amount Cancel ............................................................................... 218
6.3 Auxiliary Control in MPG Mode .......................................................................................... 219
6.4 MPG Trial Cut Function ....................................................................................................... 219
CHAPTER 7 AUTO OPERATION ............................................................................................. 221
7.1 Selection of the Auto Run Programs ................................................................................. 221
7.2 Auto Run Start ....................................................................................................................... 221
7.3 Auto Run Stop ....................................................................................................................... 222
7.4 Auto Running from any Block ............................................................................................. 223
7.5 Dry Run .................................................................................................................................. 223
7.6 Single Block Execution ........................................................................................................ 223
Appendix

7.7 Machine Lock Run ................................................................................................................ 225

7.11 MST Lock Run ....................................................................................................................... 225
7.11 Feedrate and Rapid Speed Override in Auto Run ........................................................... 225
7.11 Spindle Speed Override in Auto Run ................................................................................. 226
7.11 Background Edit in Auto Run .............................................................................................. 226
CHAPTER 8 MDI OPERATION .............................................................................................. 229
8.1 MDI Block Input ..................................................................................................................... 229
8.2 MDI Block Execution and Stop ........................................................................................... 229
8.3 MDI Word Value Modification and Deletion ...................................................................... 230
8.4 Operation Modes Conversion ............................................................................................. 230
CHAPTER 9 ZERO RETURN OPERATION .............................................................................. 231
9.1 Concept of Machine Zero (Mechanical Zero) ................................................................... 231
9.2 Program Zero Return ........................................................................................................... 231
9.2.1 Steps for Machine Zero Return .................................................................................... 231
9.3 Bus Servo Zero Return Function Setting .......................................................................... 231
9.3.1 Common Zero Return................................................................................................... 231
9.3.2 Absolute Zero Setting and Zero Return ....................................................................... 232
CHAPTER 10 EDIT OPERATION ............................................................................................ 233
10.1 Program Edit ....................................................................................................................... 233
10.1.1 Program Creation ....................................................................................................... 234

X
 Contents

10.1.2 Deletion of a Single Program ..................................................................................... 239

10.1.3 Deletion of all Programs ............................................................................................ 240
10.1.4 Copy of a Program ..................................................................................................... 240
10.1.5 Copy and Paste of Blocks .......................................................................................... 240
10.1.6 Cut and Paste of Blocks ............................................................................................. 241
10.1.7 Block Replacement .................................................................................................... 241
10.1.8 Rename of a Program ................................................................................................. 241
10.2 Program management ....................................................................................................... 242
10.2.1 Program Directory Search .......................................................................................... 242
10.2.2 Number of Stored Programs....................................................................................... 242
10.2.3 Storage Capacity ........................................................................................................ 242
10.2.4 Viewing of Program List ............................................................................................ 243
10.2.5 Program Lock ............................................................................................................. 243
CHAPTER 11 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION .............................................................................. 245
11.1 GSKComm Introduction ..................................................................................................... 245
11.1.1 Functions .................................................................................................................... 245
11.1.2 Edit Operation ............................................................................................................ 246
11.1.3 Sending a File（PC—CNC） .................................................................................... 246
11.1.4 Receiving Files（CNC—PC） .................................................................................. 248
11.1.5 Software and Serial Port Setting ................................................................................ 249
11.2 Serial communication ......................................................................................................... 250
11.2.1 Preparations for Serial Port Communication.............................................................. 250
11.2.2 Serial Port Data Transmission .................................................................................... 251
11.3 USB Communication .......................................................................................................... 254
11.3.1 Overview and Precautions .......................................................................................... 254
11.3.2 Operations Steps for USB Part Programs................................................................... 254
11.3.3 Exiting U Disk Page ................................................................................................... 256

APPENDIX ................................................................................................ 257

APPENDIX 1 GSK980TC3 SERIAL PARAMETER LIST.......................................................... 260
Parameter Explanation: ............................................................................................................ 260
1. Bit Parameter..................................................................................................................... 260
2 . Data Parameters ............................................................................................................... 277
APPENDIX II ALARM LIST .................................................................................................... 309

XI
Ⅰ Programming

Ⅰ Programming

1
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Appendix

2
 Chapter 1 Overview

Chapter 1 Overview

1 Introduction
With GSK-Link Ethernet bus, MPG trial-cut, Cs axis control, GSK980TC3 Series
Bus Turning CNC System is a new CNC system developed by GSK CNC Equipment Co.,
Ltd., which greatly improves machining speed, precision, surface roughness. Its
band-new designed human-machine interface characterizes friendly beauty and easily
use; its connection is convenient, which can meet the applied requirements of
popularized CNC turning.

z Standard equipped GE servo unit, optional to bus I/O 一

Programming

z Using 8.4 inch TrueColor LCD，supporting Chinese and English

z The least control precision 0.1um，maximum traverse speed 60m/min
z The adaptive servo spindle realizing the spindle orientation, CS axis control
z Single-head/multi-head metric/inch straight thread, taper thread and end thread
z MPG trial-cut, MPG interrupt function
z Supporting RS232 communication
z Providing 12-stage time limit stop setting
z Supporting the servo tool turret, 4-cutter spacing electric tool post, hydraulic tool post

3
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

1.2 Technical Specifications

Controlled axes: X, Z, Y, C; C axis is taken as Cs axis; optional to 5 axes and 3 link;
Interpolation: positioning (G00), linear（G01）, circular（G02, G03）
Maximum programmable dimensions:metric∶-99999.999mm～99999.999mm，least code increment：
0.001mm
Inch:-9999.9999inch～9999.9999inch，least code increment：0.0001inch
Maximum feedrate: linear 15000mm/min
Motion control

Feedrate override: 0～200％ divided into 12 to realize real-time adjustment

Maximum rapid traverse speed: 60000 mm/min，

Rapid override：F0, 25％, 50％, 100％ to real-time adjustment
Feed per rev：0.01 mm/r～500mm/r（need to install a spindle encoder 1024P/r or 1200P/r）
Acceleration/deceleration mode: front acceleration/deceleration （ linear, S type ） ， post
acceleration/deceleration（linear, exponential type）
一

Electronic gear: frequency multiplying 1～65536，frequency division 1～65536

MPG feed：0.001, 0.01, 0.1mm；single step feed：0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm
Programming

Display * Using a color 8.4 inch LCD with resolution ratio 800×600
interface * Displaying all machining path

* Using G code system A including 39 G codes with a fixed cycle code and compound cycle code
Ｇ
* Supporting a statement macro program（macro B）
Function
* Supporting 5-level subprogram call, and using a user macro program to call

* Common thread（following the spindle）

* Single-head/multi/head metric/inch straight thread, taper thread, end thread, constant pitch thread and
Thread
variable pitch thread
function
* Thread run-out length, angle and speed characteristics can be set by parameters
* Thread pitch：0.001mm~500mm(metric ) 0.06 tooth/inch~25400 tooth/inch (inch)
* Pitch error compensation：compensation interval, compensation origin can be set. Select a one-way
Compensa thread compensation or bidirection thread compensation
tion * Backlash compensation: can set a fixed frequency or speed-up/down method, support G0 and G1 to
function use different backlash compensation
* Tool compensation: 99 groups tool length compensation and tool nose radius compensation
Appendix

* Adaptive tool post: set up to 16-cutter spacing electric tool post, LIO SHING company’s tool post
(12-cutter spacing), DIAMOND company’s tool post (encoder or count type)
T
* Toolsetting mode: MDI/automatic absolute tool change or manually relative too change, cutter spacing
Tool
function CW, locking CCW
* Toolsetting mode: fixed point toolsetting, trial-cut toolseting, machine zero return toolsetting
* Cutter spacing signal input mode: direct input
* S2 digit（I/O gears control）/ S5 digit（analog output）
S * Spindle encoder: encoder lines can be set（100 p/r～5000p/r）
Spindle * Drive ratio between encoder and spindle：（1～255）：（1～255）
function * Spindle override：50%~120% divided into 8 levels to real-time tuning
* 2-channel 0V~10V analog voltage output, supporting double-spindle control
* Specify with M and 2-digit. M function can be customized
M * System’s interior M codes( they cannot be defined again): end of program M02, M30；program stop
Miscellane
M00；optional stop M01；subprogram call M98；end of subprogram M99
ous
function *Cooling ON/OFF * lubricating ON/OFF * chuck clamping/releasing in MDI/Auto mode, tailstock
forward/backward
* Program capacity：57MB, 400 subprograms
Program * Format：relative/absolute compound programming
edit * Subprogram：can be edited, supporting 5-layer subprogram nesting
* Program preview *background edit

4
 Chapter 1 Overview

*Mode selection: Edit, Auto, MDI, Zero return, JOG, Single step, MPG
Operation *Motion control: Single block, skip, dry run, miscellaneous lock, program restart, MPG interrupt, single
function step interrupt, MPG interference, machine lock, interlock, feed hold, cycle start, emergency stop, external
reset signal, external power supply ON/OFF
* PLC processing speed：1us/step；up to 8000 steps；10 basic code，35 functional codes；
PLC
function * I/O input/output:32/32，extensible IO
*Select 1~4 PMC axis
z Emergency stop
Safety
z Hardware stroke limit
function
z Data backup and recover
Communic z RS232：two-way transmission of part programs and parameters, supporting PLC programs
ation z USB：U-disk file operation, U-disk file’s direct machining, supporting PLC programs, system software
function U-disk upgrade
* Switching power supply：RS-PB2（provided with a whole set, and installed）
Adaptive
* Drive unit：GSK GE series（including incremental and absolute）

一
component
* Tool post’ controller：GSK TB tool post controller

Programming
1.3 Product Module Definition

GSK980 T ( C ) ( a ) ( H ) ( 1 ) ( 1 )
1 2 3 4 5 6

No Code explanation

① Main part property of product model：GSK980TC3 series

Function（machining object）allocation：represented with the capital English letters

②
T-turning machine
③ Its series’ extension: represented with the capital English letters. None: intial version
Its subfamily extension( or improved model): represented with the lower case letters a,b,c……or digital. None:
④
initial version

Structural style：separately represented with the capital English letters U, H, V and

Structural style
B.
⑤ or
U-combined， H-horizontal， V-vertical， B-box model
special machine style
special machine style：represented with the capital English P

LCD dimension LCD dimension：represented with one Arabic digit 1～9.

（structure）
⑥ 1 means 8.4 inch，2 means 10.4 inch，3～9 means…，
or
special machine code：represented with 2-digit Arabic digit 01～99
special machine code

Example:

◆ GSK980TC3-U1：show 980TC3 series，a combined structure, 8.4-inch LCD

◆ GSK980TC3-P01：show 980TC3 series， No. 01 special machine

5
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Appendix

6
 Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals

Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals

2.1 Controllable Axis

Table 2-1-1

Item GSK990MC
Basic controllable axes 3（X, Y, Z）
Total extended controllable axes Up to 5 (including Cs axis)

一
2.2 Axis Name

Programming
Name of 3 basic axes is defaulted to X, Z, C.
P005 sets the controllable axis quantity and P175-P179 sets each additional axis’ name, such as
A, B, C’s axis name.

Fig. 2-2-1 Turning machine’s CNC axis diagram

The system uses a rectangular coordinate system composed of X, Z axis to execute the
positioning and interpolation motion. X axis is the level plane’s front and back direction and Z axis is
its left and right direction; negative directions of them approach to the workpiece and positive ones
are away from it, which is shown in Fig 2-2-1.
The system supports the front tool post and rear tool post function. From the front of machine,
the too post in front of the workpiece is called front tool post, and the too post behind of the workpiece
is called rear tool post. Fig. 2-2-2 is a coordinate system of the front tool post and Fig. 2-2-3 is a rear
toolpost one. they show exactly the opposite of X axes, but the same of Z axes from figures. In the
manual, it introduces programming application with the front tool post coordinate system in the
following figures and examples.

7
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

X
X

Fig.2-2-2 Front tool post coordinate system Fig.2-2-3 Rear tool post coordinate system

2.3 Axis Display

一

GSK980TC3 can set each axis’ linear axis or rotary axis by No.8#0~No.8#4; set each axis’
Programming

display or hide No.58#0~No.58#4.

When the additional axis is set to the rotary, the rotary axis’ unit is displayed to deg. When it is set
to the linear, its display is the same that of the three basic axis (X, Z, Y), and its unit is mm. The
following is the axis display when X, Z is a linear axis, and C is a rotary axis.

Appendix

Fig. 2-3-1

2.4 Machine Zero and Machine Coordinate System

A special point used to the machining reference on the machine is called a machine zero. The
machine tool manufacturers have set a machine zero on each machine. Generally, it is located at the
max. stroke of X, Z’s positive direction. After it is set, it is not moved or changed. A coordinate system
using the machine zero as an origin setting is called machine coordinate system.

The machine zero’s position cannot be confirmed when the CNC is turned on. Generally,
automatic or manual machine zero return is executed to create a machine coordinate system. After
the machine returns to the machine zero, the CNC automatically creates a machine coordinate

8
 Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals

system with the machine zero as an origin.

Note: when there is no zero block installed on the machine, the CNC’s machine zero function (such as G28)
must not be performed.

2.5 Workpiece Coordinate System

When the system machines a workpiece, the used coordinate system is called a workpiece
coordinate system(called a part coordinate system). A workpiece coordinate system is set in advance
by the CNC (set a workpiece coordinate system).
Generally, a part’s all machining programs set one public workpiece coordinate system(select a
workpiece coordinate system).
Changing the workpiece coordinate system is executed by moving its origin (changing the
workpiece coordinate system’s position).

一
A workpiece coordinate system’s reference position should meet conditions as possible, such as
easy programming, few dimension conversion, few machining errors. In general conditions, the

Programming
reference point should be on the dimension marking’s reference or positioning’s reference. For the
turning machine programming, the reference point is on the intersection point between the
workpiece axis and chuck’s end (Fig. 2-5-1) or the workpiece’s end (Fig. 2-5-1).

Fig. 2-5-1 the reference point on the chuck’s end

Fig. 2-5-2 the reference point on the workpiece’s end

Use the following three methods to set a workpiece coordinate system :

1．Use G50 to set a workpiece coordinate system, and refer to Section 4.2.8
2．Use G54~G59 to set a workpiece coordinate system, and refer to Ⅱ 3.4.2.1

9
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3．Use G54Pn to set a workpiece coordinate system, and refer toⅡ 3.4.2.2

2.6 Absolute Value Programming and Incremental Value

Programming

A code axis’ movement amount method is divided into two: an absolute value code and relative
value code. The absolute value code is to use an end point’s coordinate value of the axis movement
to perform a programming is called an absolute coordinate programming. The incremental coordinate
code is to use an axis movement value to directly program, which is called an incremental coordinate
programming. In the system, the absolute coordinate programming uses X, Z and the incremental
value programming uses U, W.

Table 2-6-1
一

Absolute value code Incremental value code Remark

Programming

X U X movement code

Z W Z movement code

Example: separately use the absolute value, incremental value, absolute value and incremental
value programming mode to compile A→B programs in Fig. 2-6-1.

Appendix

Fig. 2-6-1

Table 2-6-2

Programming Absolute coordinate Relative coordinate Compound coordinate

mode programming programming programming

Program G1 X200 Z-50 G1 U100 W-50 G1 X200 W-50

Suppose the tool is on the current workpiece coordinate system’s A

Remark
point, and use the linear interpolation to move

10
 Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals

Note: an alarm occurs when X/Z and U/W are in one block.
Example: G50 X10 Z20；

G1 X20 W30 U20 Z30；

2. 7 Diameter and Raduis Method to Programming

The outer appearance of the workpiece which is machined by CNC turning machine is rotating
body and X dimension can be specified by two methods: diameter and radius methods. It can be set
by bit parameter NO: 39#2.
When NO: 39#2 is 0, it is specified by the radius to programming.

When NO: 39#2 is 1, it is specified by the diameter to programming.

Table 2-7-1 Diameter and radius specification

一
Specified by the diameter
Item Specified by the radius value
vaue

Programming
Z axis code Be irrelevant with the diameter value, radius value
X axis code Specified by Specified by
the diameter value the radius value
Increment codes Specified by Specified by
of address U the diameter value the radius value
Setting coordinate system (G50) Specified by Specified by
the diameter value the radius value
Tool offset X axis value It is consistent with X axis dimension method and is set by
NO:39#2
Radius code of circular Specified by Specified by
interpolation （R, I , K ） the radius value the radius value
Feedrate of X axis direction Radius change (mm/min, mm/r)
Display X axis position Display the diameter
Display the radius value
value

Note 1: In the following content, it is normally specified by the diameter without special explanation.
Note 2: The meaning of the tool offset value using the diameter/radius is the outer diameter of the work piece
changes through the diameter or the radius value when the tool offset value changes. For example: if
the diameter specifies and compensation amount is 10mm, then the outer diameter value of cutting
work piece changes into 10mm; and if the radius specifies and compensation amount is 10mm, then
diameter value of cutting work piece diameter changes into 20mm.

2. 8 Mode, Non-Mode and Initial State

The mode means once the function and status of corresponding fields are executed, it will be
valid until the new function and status are executed again. That is to say, the following blocks use the
same function and status, and then the fields are not required to input again.

Example:
G0 X100 Z100；（Rapid position to X100 Z100）
X120 Z30；（Rapid position to X120 Z30，G0 is a modal code and can be omitted not to

11
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

input）
G1 X50 Z50 F300；（Linear interpolation to X50 Z50，feedrate: 300mm/min G0→G1）
X100；（Linear interpolation to X100 Z50，feedrate 300 mm/min, G1, Z50, F300 are modal
codes and can be omitted not to input）
G0 X0 Z0；（Rapid position to X0 Z0 G1→G0）

Non-mode means once the function and status of corresponding fields are executed, it will be
valid for one time. If the same function and status are required to use again, they should be executed,
again. That is to say, the following blocks use the same function and status, and then the fields should
be input again.

The initial state is the default function and status after the system is turned on, that is to say, if the
corresponding function and state are not specified after power on, it will execute the function in initial
mode and status. The initial states are G00, G18,G21, G40, G54, G97,G98.
一

Example:
Programming

O0001；
G0 X100 Z100； （Rapid position in X 100 Z100, G0 is the initial state of the system. When
the system does not code other mode, the system executes movement
in the initial state G00 mode）
G1 X0 Z0 F100； （Linear interpolation to X0 Z0 at the feedrate 100mm/min. Because G98
is the feed per minute mode and G98 is the system initial state when
power on.）

Appendix

12
 Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program

Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program

3.1 Structure of a Program

A program consists of many blocks, and a block is composed of words. Each block is separated
by a code for end of block (ISO uses LF, EIA uses CR). Using a character “；” means a code for end
of block.

Program
name
Word

一
Programming
Sequence Block end code
number
Block

Program end

Fig. 3-1-1 structure of a program

A group of codes for controlling the CNC machine to finish workpiece machining is called a
program. After the compiled program is input to the CNC system, the system makes the tool move
along a straight line or an arc, or rotate or stop the spindle. Please edit these codes according to the
actual movement sequence of the machine tool in the program. Structure of the program is shown in
Fig. 3-1-1.

3.1.1 Program Name

In the system, the system’s memory can store many programs. In order to mutually differentiate
these programs, each program begins with an address O followed by a five-digit number, which is
shown in Fig. 3-1-1-1.

13
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3.1.2 Sequence Number and Blocks

A program is composed of many codes and one code unit is called a block (see Fig. 3-1-1). The
block is separated through end code (see Fig.3-1-1), it adopts the field “；” as the end code.
Address N with a 4-digit sequence number behind it can be used at the beginning of the block
(see Fig. 3-1-1), and the leading zero can be omitted. Sequence numbers (whether the sequence
number is inserted is set by Parameter NO: 0 # 5, or set the number in the setting page directly. See
Section 3.3.1 in Operation) can be specified in a random order, and the intervals between them can
be unequal (set by Data Parameter P210). They can be specified in all blocks, or just in some
important blocks. However, the numbers should be arranged in ascending order according to general
machining sequence.
Note: The N code is not taken as a line number when it and G10 are in the same block.
一

3.1.3 Word
Programming

A word (See 3-1-3-1) is an element that composes a block. It consists of an address and its following
digits (with sign +or - before the digits sometimes).

X 1000 Z -500

Add Digit Add Digit

Command Word Command word

Fig. 3-1-3-1 General structure of a word

An address is one of the English letters（A～Z）. It specifies the meaning of its following digits.
In the system, the used addresses and their meanings as well as their ranges are shown in Fig.
3-1-3-1.
Appendix

Sometimes, an address may have different meanings based on different preparatory functions.
An address is used more than one time in the same code, and whether an alarm is issued is set
by bit parameter N0:32#6.

Table 3-1-3-1
Address Range Meaning
A, B, C Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
0.001～99999.999（mm/min） Feedrate per minute
F
0.001～500(mm/r) Federate per turn
G 00～99 Preparation function
H 01～99 Operator in G65
-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm） X vector between arc center and start point
I
0.06～25400（tooth/inch） Inch thread tooth quantity
K -9999.9999～9999.9999（mm） Z vector between arc center and start point
L 1～9999 Times of recalling a subprogram
,L -999999.99～999999.99（mm） Chamfering
M Miscellaneous function output, program executed flow,
Set by P204
subprogram call
N 0～99999 Serial number
O 0～99999 Program name

14
 Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program

Address Range Meaning

0～99999.9999（ms） Pause time
1～99999 Calling subprogram number
P 0.001～99999.999（mm） X cycle movement amount in G74, G75
Initial block’s serial number in the compound cycle code’s
0～9999
finishing
End block’s serial number in the compound cycle code’s
0～9999
Q finishing
0.001～99999.999（mm） Z cycle movement amount in G74, G75
-999999.99～999999.99（mm）
Cornering value

-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Arc radius/angle displacement

,R 0～99999.999（mm） G71, G72 cycle tool retraction amount

1～9999999（times） Roughing times in G73
R 0～99999.999（mm） Tool retraction amount after cutting in G74, G75
0～99999.999（mm） The tool retraction amount to end point in G74, G75

一
0～99999.999（mm） Finishing allowance in G76
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Taper in G90, G92, G94

Programming
Set by P205 Specify the spindle speed
S
00～04 Multi-gear output
T Set by P206 Tool function
Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） X increment
U -999999.99～999999.99（mm） X finishing allowance in G71, G72, G73
0.0001～99999.999 （mm） cutting depth in G71
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） X tool retraction distance in G73
Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
V
-999999.9～999999.99（mm） Y increment
Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Z relative coordinate address
W 0～99999.999（mm） cutting depth in G72
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Z finishing allowance in G71, G72, G73
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Z tool retraction distance in G73
Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
X -999999.99～999999.99（mm） X coordinate address
0～9999.999（S） Specify pause time
Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
Y
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Y coordinate address
Set by P175~179 Address of axis name
Z
-999999.99～999999.99（mm） Z coordinate address

All described in Table 3-1-3-1 are limited values for the CNC device, but the limit for the machine
tool is not described here. Therefore, users are required to refer to the manual provided by the
machine tool builder besides this one, in order to get a good understanding of the programming
limits before programming.
Note 1: Each word should not exceed 79 characters.

Note 2：The setting unit: ISC=0: maximum value, minimum value in MDI mode is +999999.99mm; ISC=1:
maximum value, minimum value in MDI mode is +99999.999mm.

Set unit’s displayed value：+999999.999mm +99999.9999mm

15
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Set unit’s inch：+99999.9999mm +9999.99999mm

3.2 General Structure of a Program

The program is divided into main program and subprogram. In general, the CNC system is
actuated by the main program. If a code for calling the subprogram is executed in the main program,
the CNC system acts by the subprogram. When a code for returning to the main program is executed
in the subprogram, the CNC system will return to the main program and execute the following blocks.
The program execution sequence is shown in Fig.3-2-1.
M ain program S ubprogram

C om m and 1 C om m and 1

C om m and 2
一

C om m and 2
Programming

…… ……

C alling subprogram
……
C om m and N

…… ……
M 30 M 99 R eturning to
m ain program

Fig. 3-2-1

The structure of a subprogram is consistent with that of a main program.

If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, the sequence or pattern
can be stored as a subprogram in the memory to simplify the program. The subprogram can be called
in Auto mode, usually by M98 in the main program. Besides, the subprogram called can also call
Appendix

another subprogram. The subprogram called from the main program is called the one-level
subprogram. Up to 4 levels subprogram can be called in a program (Fig.3-2-2). The last block of a
subprogram is the Code M99 used for returning to the main program. After the return, the blocks
following the subprogram calling block are executed. (If the last block of a subprogram is ended with
M02 or M03, the system will also return to the main program and proceed to the next block, just as
ended with M99.)
When a main program is ended with M99, its execution will be repeated.
Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram

O00001; O10000; O20000; O30000; O40000;

… … … … …
… … … … …
… … … … …
M98 P10000; M98 P20000; M98 P30000; M98 P40000;
… … … … …
… … … … …
… … … … …
… … … … …
M30; M99; M99; M99; M99;

One call nest Two calls nest Three calls nest Four calls nest
Fig. 3-2-2 Quadruple subprogram nesting

16
 Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program

The Code can be called with a subprogram. The same subprogram can be called up to 9999
times consecutively or repeatedly.

3.2.1 Subprogram Writing

Write a subprogram following the format below

O ; Subprogram number
……

…… Subprogram

……

一
M99;

Programming
Subprogram end

Fig. 3-2-1-1

Write the subprogram number behind the address O at the beginning of the subprogram, and
end the subprogram with Code M99 (M99 format as above).

3.2.2 Subprogram Call

The subprogram is called by the call code of the main program or subprogram. The format of the
subprogram is as follows:

M98 P L

Repetitive called times

Called subprogram number
Fig. 3-2-2-1

● If no repetition count is specified, the subprogram is called just once.

(Example) M98 P1002L5 ;(It means a subprogram with number 1002 is repeatedly called 5
times)
●Execution sequence of calling a subprogram from a main program

Main program 1 2 3 Subprogram

N0010 …… ; O10100 ;

N0020 …… ; N1020…… ;

N0030 M98 P10100L3 ; N1030…… ;

N0040 …… ; N1040…… ;

N0050 M98 P10100 ; N1050…… ;

N0060…… ; N1060 …… M99;

Fig. 3-2-2-2
17
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

A subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main program calls a
subprogram.

Note 1: An alarm is given when no subprogram number specified with address P is detected.
Note 2: Subprograms with number 90000~99999 are the system reserved programs. When users call such
kind of subprograms, the system can execute them but not display them.
Note 3: A subprogram can nest a quadruple.

3.2.3 Program End

The program begins with a program name, and ends with M02, M30 or M99 (see Fig. 3-2-2-2).
For the end code M02, M30 or M99 detected in program execution: If M02 or M03 is executed in a
program, the program is terminated, and the reset state is entered; M30 can be set by bit parameter
一

N0.33#4 to return to the program beginning, and M02 can be set by bit parameter N0.33#2 to return
to the program beginning. If M99 is executed in a program, the control returns to the beginning of the
Programming

program, and then executes the program repeatedly; if M99, M02 or M30 is at the end of the
subprogram, the control returns to the program that calls the subprogram and goes on executing the
following blocks.

Appendix

18
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

4.1 Categories of Preparatory Function G Code

Preparatory function is represented with G code and its following two digits, and describes its
belonging block’s meanings. G code is divided into two types:

Table 4-1-1

Classification Meaning
Non-modal G code It is valid only in the specified block
Modal G code It is valid till other code in the same group is commanded

一
(Example) G01 and G00 are G codes in the same group
G01 X ＿ ；

Programming
Z ＿＿＿ ； G01 is valid
X ＿＿＿ ； G01 is valid
G00 Z＿＿； G00 is valid

Table 4-1-2 G code and their functions

G code G code
Group （G code Function explanation Group （G code Function explanation
system A） system A）
G04 Dwell, exact stop G96 Constant surface speed control
Automatic return to machine 02
G28 G97* Constant surface speed control cancel
zero
G31 Skip function G98 Feed per minute
05
G50 Setting a coordinate system G99* Feed per rev
G65 Macro code non-modal call G20 Inch unit selection
06
G70 Finishing cycle G21* Metric unit selection
00
G71 Axial roughing cycle G40* Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G72 Radial roughing cycle 07 G41 Tool nose radius compensation(right)
G73 Closed-loop cutting cycle G42 Tool nose radius compensation (left)
G74 Axial grooving cycle G54* Workpiece coordinate system 1
G75 Radial grooving cycle G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G76 Multiple thread cutting cycle G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
G00* Positioning (rapid traverse) 14 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G01 Linear interpolation G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5
Circular interpolation CW
G02 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6
(clockwise)
Circular interpolation CCW
G03 G17 XY plane selection
(counter clockwise)
01 G32 Constant pitch thread cutting G18* ZX plane selection
G34 Variable pitch thread cutting
16
G90 Axial cutting cycle
G19 YX plane selection
G92 Thread cutting cycle
G94 Radial cutting cycle

Note 1: If modal Codes and non-modal Codes are in the same block, the non-modal codes take precedence. At
the same time, the corresponding modes are changed according to the other modal Codes in the same
block, but not executed.

19
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Note 2: For the G code with sign *, when the power is switched on, the system is in the state of this G code
(some G codes are determined by bit parameter NO:31#0~7).
Note 3: G codes in group 00 are non-modal.
Note 4: An alarm occurs if G codes not listed in this table are used or G codes that cannot be selected are
specified.
Note 5: G codes from different groups can be specified in a block, but 2 or more G codes from the same group
can not be specified in a block by principle. If no alarm occurs when two or more G codes in the same
group are in a block after parameter setting, the latter G code functions.
Note 6: G codes are represented by group numbers respectively based on their types. Whether the G codes of
each group are cleared after reset or emergency stop is determined by bit parameter NO:35#0~7 and
NO:36#0~7.

4.2 G code
一

4.2.1 Rapid Positioning G00

Programming

Format： G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_

Function: each axis move to the position specified by X(U), Z(W) at its separate rapid traverse
speed.
X（U）：absolute (U is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement distance)
coordinate value of X positioning end point;
Z（W）：absolute (W is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement
distance) coordinate value of Z positioning end point;
G00 code. The tool moves to the position in the workpiece system specified with the
absolute or an incremental code at a rapid traverse speed. Whether the absolute or
incremental code is used is set by bit parameter NO:12#1. Select one of the following two
tool paths (Fig. 4-2-1-1).
1. Linear interpolation positioning: The tool path is the same as linear interpolation (G01). The
tool is positioned within the shortest time at a speed not more than the rapid traverse speed
of each axis.
Appendix

2．Nonlinear interpolation positioning: The tool is positioned at the rapid traverse speed of each
axis respectively. The tool path is usually not straight.

Non-linear interpolation Linear interpolation

positioning Start position Start position
positioning

End position
End position

Fig. 4-2-1-1
Explanation:
1. After G00 is executed, the system changes the current tool movement mode for
G00 mode. Whether the default mode is G00 (parameter value is 0) or G01
(parameter value is 1) after power-on is set by bit parameter No.031#0.

20
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

2. With no positioning parameter specified, the tool does not move and the system
only changes the mode of the current tool movement for G00.
3. G00 is the same as G0.
4. The G0 speed of axes X, Y, Z, C and 4th is set by data parameters P88~P92.
Limitations:

The rapid traverse speed is set by parameter. The speed F specified in the G0 Code is the
cutting speed of the following machining blocks.
Example：
G0 X0 Z10 F800； Feeding at the speed set by system parameter
G1 X20 Z50； Using the feedrate of F800
The rapid positioning speed is adjusted by the keys F0%， 25%， 50%， 100% on the operation
panel (see fig. 4-2-1-2 ). The speed to which F0 corresponds is set by data parameter P93 and it is

一
common to all axes.

Programming
Fig. 4-2-1-2 Keys for rapid feedrate override
Note: Note the position of the worktable and workpiece to prevent tool collision.

Example: the tool rapidly positions to point B from point A, which relevant dimension is shown in
Fig.4-2-1-3.

Fig. 4-2-1-3

Programming:
G0 X20 Z0；（absolute value programming, diameter programming）
G0 U-22 W-18；（incremental value programming, diameter programming）
G0 U-22 Z0；（hybrid programming，diameter programming）

21
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.2.2 Linear Interpolation G01

Format： G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_

Function: The tool moves to the specified position along a straight line at the federate (mm/min)
specified by parameter F.。
Explanation:
X（U）：absolute (U is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement distance)
coordinate value of X interpolation end point;
Z（W）：absolute (W is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement distance)
coordinate value of Z interpolation end point;

1. X_ Y_ Z_ are the coordinates of the end point. Because they are related to the
一

coordinate system, please see Sections 2.4.

2. The feedrate specified by F keeps effective till a new F value is specified. The federate
Programming

specified by F code is calculated by an interpolation along a straight line. If F code is not

specified in a program, the default F value at system Power On is used (see data
parameter P87 for details).

Code path:

Appendix

Fig. 4-2-2-1

Program example（Fig. 4-2-2-2）

22
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

G01 X60.0 Z-25；（absolute value programming）

G01 U20.0 W-25.0；（incremental value programming）

Note: each axis’ speed is shown below:

G01 Xα ZγFf ；
In the block：

一
Programming
X speed：

Z speed：

L=

Fig. 4-2-2-2

Note:

1. All code parameters are positioning parameters except for F code. The upper limit of federate F is set by
data parameter P96. If the actual cutting federate (after using federate override) exceeds the upper limit, it
is clamped to the upper limit (unit: mm/min). The lower limit of the federate F is set by data parameter P97.
If the actual cutting federate (after using federate override) exceeds the lower limit, it is clamped to the
lower limit (unit: mm/min).

2. The tool does not move when no positioning parameter is specified behind G01, and the system only
changes the mode of the current tool movement mode for G01. By altering the system bit parameter
NO:31#0, the system default mode at power-on can be set to G00 (value is 0) or G01 (value is 1).

4.2.3 Circular (Helical) Interpolation G02/G03

G02 and G03 provision

The plane circular interpolation means that the arc path is finished according to the specified
rotation direction and radius (or circle center) from the start point to end point in the specified plane.
Since the arc path can not be determined only by the start point and the end point, other conditions
are required:
¾ Arc rotation direction（G02，G03）
¾ Circular interpolation plane（G17、G18、G19）
¾ Circle center coordinate or radius, which thus leads to two Command formats: Circle
center coordinate I, J ,K or radius R programming.

23
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Only the three points above are all determined, could the interpolation operation be done in
coordinate system.
The circular interpolation can be done by the following Codes to make the tool move along an arc,
as is shown below:
Arc in XY plane

G02 R_
G17 X(U)_Y(V)_ F_；
G03 I_J_
Arc in ZX plane
G02 R_
G18 X(U)_Z(W)_ F_；
G03 I_K_
Arc in YZ plane
一

G02 R_
G19 Y(V)_Z(W)_ F_；
G03 J_K_
Programming

Code path:

Appendix

Fig. 4-2-3-1 G02 path Fig. 4-2-3-2 G03 path

Table 4-2-3-1
Item Content Code Meaning
G17 Arc specification on XY plane
1 Plane specification G18 Arc specification on ZX plane
G19 Arc specification on YZ plane
G02 CW rotation
2 Rotation direction
G03 CCW rotation
Two axes of X,Y End point coordinate in
Absolute value and Z axes workpiece coordinate system
3
End point’s position Two axes of X,Y Coordinate of end point
and Z axes relative to start point
Two axes of I,J and
Vector from start point Coordinate of circle center
K
4 to circle center relative to start point
axes
Arc radius R Arc radius
5 Feedrate F Arc tangential speed

24
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

CW and CCW on XY plane (ZX plane or YZ plane) refer to the directions viewed in the
positive-to-negative direction of the Z axis (Y axis or X axis) in the right-hand Cartesian coordinate
system, as is shown in Fig. 4-2-3-3.

Y X Z

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

X Z Y
G17 G18 G19

Rear tool post

一
X Z Y

Programming
G02 G02 G02

G03 G03 G03

Y X Z
G17 G18 G19

Front tool post

Fig. 4-2-3-3

The default plane mode at power-on can be set by bit parameters NO:31#1 and #2.
The end point of an arc can be specified by parameter words X, Y and Z. It is expressed as
absolute values in G90, and incremental values in G91. The incremental values are the coordinates
of the end point relative to the start point. The arc center is specified by parameter words I, J, K,
corresponding to X, Y, Z respectively. Either in absolute mode G90, or in incremental mode G91,
parameter values of I, J, K are the coordinates of the circle center relative to the arc start point (for
simplicity, the circle center coordinates with the start point taken as the origin temporarily). They are
the incremental values with signs. See Fig. 4-2-3-4.
Note: the system supports X, Y, Z axis. But, it defaults to be G18 plane and X, Z axis after power on, its
command explanations are described based on the system supporting modes, and the user
executes operations according to a machine structure.

End point（X,Y) End point（Z,X) End point（Y,Z)

Start point Start point Start point

J I K
Center Center Center
I K J
Fig. 4-2-3-4

25
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

I, J, K are assigned with a sign according to the direction of the circle center relative to the start
point. The circle center can also be specified by radius R besides I, J and K.
G02 X_ Z_ R_ ；
G03 X_ Z_ R_ ；
1. Two arcs can be drawn as follows; one arc is more than 180°, and the other one is less
than 180°. For the arc more than 180°, its radius is specified by a negative value.

(Example: Fig. 4-2-3-5) ①When arc is less than 180°

G02 U60 W20 R50 F300 ；
②When arc is more than 180°
G02 U60 W20 R-50 F300 ；

R=50
一

End point
Programming

2
Start point R=50

Fig. 4-2-3-5

2. The arc equal to 180° can be programmed either by I, J and K, or by R.

Example: G90 G0 X0 Y0;G2 X20 I10 F100;
Equal to G90 G0 X0 Y0;G2 X20 R10 F100

Or G90 G0 X0 Y0;G2 X20 R-10 F100

Note: For the arc of 180°, the arc path is not affected whether the value of R is positive or negative.

3. For the arc equal to 360°, only I, J and K can be used for programming.
Appendix

Example: using G02 to compile programs shown in Fig. 4-2-3-6.

26
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Fig. 4-2-3-6

Programming
The programs are shown below: the tool’s current point is at start point):
G02 X63.06 Z-20 R19.26 F300 ； or
G02 U17.81 W-20.0 R19.26 F300 ； or
G02 X63.06 Z-20 I18.929 K-3.554 F300 ； or
G02 U17.81 W-20.0 I18.929 K-3.554 F300 ；
Restrictions:
1. If addresses I, J, K and R are specified simultaneously in a program, the arc specified by R
takes precedence, and others are ignored.
2. If neither arc radius parameter nor the parameter from the start point to the circle center is
specified, an alarm is issued in the system.
3. A full circle can only be interpolated by parameters I, J, K from start point to circle center
rather than parameter R.
4. Pay attention to the setting for selecting the coordinate plane when the circular interpolation is
being done.
5. If X, Y, Z are all omitted (i.e., the start point and the final point coincides), and R is specified
(e.g. G02R50), the tool does not move.

4.2.4 Dwell (G04)

Format: G04 X(U)_ or P_

Function: G40 is for dwell operation. The dwell per revolution in Feed per Revolution mode G99 can
be specified by bit parameter No.34#0.

Table 4-2-4-1 Value range of dwell time (with X, U code)

Least code increment Value range Unit of dwell time
No.5#1=0 0.001～9999.999
S or rev
No.5#1=1 0.0001~9999.999

Table 4-2-4-2 Value range of dwell time （with P)

27
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Least code increment Value range Unit of dwell time

No.5#1=0 1~99999.999 0.001s or rev
No.5#1=1 1~99999.999 0.0001s or rev

Explanation:
1. G04 is non-modal code, which is only effective in the current block.
2. If parameters X and P appear simultaneously, parameter X is effective.
3. An alarm occurs when the values of X and P are negative.
4. Dwell is not executed when neither X nor P is specified.

4.2.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection G54～G59

Function: for specifying the current workpiece coordinate system. The workpiece coordinate system
一

is selected by specifying G codes of workpiece coordinate system in a program.

Format: G54～G59
Programming

Explanation:

1. With no code parameter.

2. The system itself is capable of setting 6 workpiece coordinate systems, any one of which can
be selected by codes G54~G59.
G54 ---------------- Workpiece coordinate system 1
G55 ---------------- Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 ---------------- Workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 ---------------- Workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 ---------------- Workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 ---------------- Workpiece coordinate system 6
3. At Power On, the system displays the workpiece coordinate codes G54 ～ G59, G92 or
additional workpiece coordinate system ever executed before Power Off.
Appendix

4. When different workpiece coordinate systems are called in a block, the axis to move is
positioned to the coordinate of the new coordinate system; for the axis not to move, its
coordinate shifts to the corresponding coordinate in the new coordinate system, with its actual
position on the machine tool unchanged.
Example: The corresponding machine tool coordinate for G54 coordinate system origin is (10,
10)
The corresponding machine coordinate for G55 coordinate system origin is (30，30)
When the program is executed in order, the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of
the end point l are displayed as follows:

Table 4-2-6-1

Program Absolute coordinate Machine coordinate

G0 G54 X50 Z50 50，50 60，60
G55 X100 100，30 130，60
X120 Z80 120，80 150，110

28
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Workpiece
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
system 1
system 2 system 3 system 4
（G54）
（G55） （G56） （G57）

Workpiece
system 5
（G58）

Machine Workpiece coordinate

zero system offset Workpiece
system 6
（G59）

一
Machine reference point

Programming
Fig. 4-2-6-1

As shown in Fig. 4-2-6-1, after power-on, the machine returns to machine zero by manual zero
return. The machine coordinate system is set up by the machine zero, which thus generates the
machine reference point and determines the workpiece coordinate system. The origins of these
workpiece coordinate systems can be specified by inputting the coordinate offset in MDI mode or by
setting data parameters P15～P44. These 6 workpiece coordinate systems are set up by the
distances from machine zero to their respective coordinate system origins.
Z

X
Workpiece zero offset
X
Machine zero

Fig. 4-2-6-2

Example：N10 G55 G00 X100 Z20；

N20 G56 X80.5 Z25.5；

In the above example, when block N10 is executed, the tool traverses rapidly to the position in
workpiece coordinate system G55 (X=100，Y=20). When block N20 is executed , the tool traverses

29
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

rapidly to the position in workpiece coordinate system G56, and the absolute coordinates shifts to the
coordinates (X=80.5，Z=25.5) in workpiece coordinate system G55 automatically.

4.2.7 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System G50

1）Setting a workpiece coordinate system

Command format:：G50 X(U)_ Z(W)_；
Function: Set the work piece coordinate system. Two code parameters specify the absolute
coordinate value of new work piece coordinate system at the tool nose on the current
tool post. The code will not move the movement axis.
Explanation:
X: X absolute coordinate which current tool nose is at the work piece coordinate system;
一

Z: Z absolute coordinate which current tool nose is at the work piece coordinate system;
1. Once the coordinate system has been created, the positions of the following absolute
Programming

value codes all represent those on the coordinate system until G50 code is used again to
set the new coordinate system.
2. X direction is specified by diameter when the parameter is set to diameter programming,
X is specified by radius when the parameter is set to radius programming.
50

Appendix

Fig. 4-2-7-1
As shown in Fig. 4-2-7-1, after executing G50 X100 Z100 code, the work piece coordinate
system is set as the figure and the position of the tool nose at the current work piece coordinate
system is set. About the detailed coordinate setting methods, refer to the tool-setting operation,
Section 4.1.5.

Note 1: G50 setting a coordinate system is executed at state of the tool offset cancel. The absolute
coordinates after setting are G50’s setting value; the tool offset cancel is performed at the tool
offset cancel state: “T0100 G00 U0 W0” . Suppose that the current tool offset state is T0101.

An absolute coordinate display is divided into two conditions when G50 setting a coordinate
system is done at state of tool offset:

A. When a tool offset is executed (a movement command exists after tool offset), absolute
coordinates after setting are G50’s setting values as follows:

Table 4-2-7-1

30
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Program(executing the tool compensation Absolute coordinate’s No. 01 tool compensation

by coordinate offset mode displayed value value
G0 X0 Z0 X：0 Z：0
T0101 X：12 Z：23 X：-12
G0 X0 Z0 X：0 Z：0 Z：-23
G50 X20 Z20 X：20 Z：20

B. When a tool offset is not executed (without a movement command after tool offset) including tool
offset cancel and tool offset setting, absolute coordinates mirrors a tool offset value after
setting as follows:

Table 4-2-7-2

一
Program(executing the tool compensation by Absolute coordinate’s No. 01 tool compensation
coordinate offset mode displayed value value

Programming
G0 X0 Z0 X：0 Z：0
T0101 X：12 Z：23
X：-12
G0 X50 Z50 X：50 Z：50
Z：-23
T0100 X：38 Z：27
G50 X20 Z20 X：8 Z：-3

Table 4-2-7-3

Program(executing the tool compensation Absolute coordinate’s No. 01 tool compensation

by coordinate offset mode displayed value value

G0 X0 Z0 X：0 Z：0
X：-12
T0101 X：12 Z：23
Z：-23
G50 X20 Z20 X：32 Z：43

2）Coordinate system translation

Command format: G50 U_ W_ ；
Function: According to the above codes, the tool nose position of the tool post in the original
absolute coordinate system moves the distance specified by one parameter. That is to
say, the new coordinate tool nose position relative to the original absolute coordinate
system is: X+U，Z+W.
Note: When the parameter is set to the diameter programming, X direction is specified by the
diameter; it is set to the radius programming, X is specified by radius.

4.2.8 Plane Selection G17/G18/G19

Format:G17/G18/G19
Function: Select planes for circular interpolation, tool radius compensation, drilling or boring with
G17/G18/G19.
Explanation: It has no code parameter. G17 is the default plane at Power On. The default plane at
Power On can also be determined by bit parameters N0:31#1, and #2. The relation between
code and plane is as follows:

31
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

G17-------------XY plane
G18-------------ZX plane
G19-------------YZ plane

The plane keeps unchanged in the block in which G17，G18 or G19 is not specified.

Example：G18 X_ Z_； ZX plane

Prompt: The system supports the fixed cycle in only G18 currently. It’s better to specify a plane at a
corresponding block. In special, when many people share the same system, such can avoid
mistaken programming to cause unexpected or abnormality.

4.2.9 Skip Function（G31）

Command format： G31 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_

一

Function: Linear interpolation can be specified after G31 in the same way as after G01. During the
execution of this code, if an external skip signal is input, the execution of the code is
Programming

interrupted and the next block is executed. When the machining end point is not
programmed, but it is specified using a signal from the machine, use the skip function. For
example, use it for grinding. The function is used for measuring the dimension of a
workpiece as well.

Explanation:
1. G31 is a non-modal G code only effective in the block in which it is specified.
2. When tool radius compensation is being executed, if G31 is specified, an alarm will occur.
Therefore, the tool radius compensation should be cancelled before G31.
Example:
The block after G31 is a single axis movement specified by incremental values, which is shown
in Fig. 4-2-9-1 :
Appendix

50
Skip signal is input here

Y
100
Actual motion
X Motion without skip signal

Fig. 4-2-9-1 The next block is the single-axis movement specified by incremental values

The next block after G31 is a single-axis movement specified by absolute values, which is shown
in Fig. 4-2-9-2：

32
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Y100

G31 G90 X200 F100;

Y100;

Skip signal is input here

X200
Actual motion
X
Motion without skip signal

一
Fig. 4-2-9-2 The next block is a single-axis movement specified by absolute values

Programming
The next block after G31 is two-axis movement specified by absolute values, which is shown in
Fig. 4-2-9-3:：
Y

Skip signal is input here

100 (300,100)

Actual motion

Motion without skip signal

X
100 200 300

Fig. 4-2-9-3 The next block is two-axis movement specified by absolute value

Note: The setting can be done by bit parameter NO:02#7 [skip signal SKIP, (0:1, 1:0)].

4.2.10 Inch/Metric Conversion G20/G21

Format: G20：inch input

G21：metric input
Function: They are used for the inch/metric input conversion in a program.
Explanation:
After inch/metric conversion, the units of the following values are changed:
Feedrate specified by F code, position code, workpiece zero offset value, tool
compensation value, scale unit of MPG and movement distance in incremental feeding.
The G code status at power-on is the same as that held before power off.

Note：
1. When the inch input is converted to metric input or vice versa, the tool compensation value must be

33
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

preset according to the least input incremental unit.

2. After inch input is converted to metric input or vice versa, for the first G28, the operation from the
intermediate point is the same as that of manual reference point return.
3. When the least input incremental unit is different from the least code incremental unit, the
maximum error is half of the least code unit and this error is not accumulated.
4. Program inch/metric input can be set by bit parameter N0:00#2.
5. Program inch/metric output can be set by bit parameter N0:00#1.
6. G20 or G21 must be specified in a separate block.

4.2.11 Optional Angle Chamfering/Corner Rounding

Command format: ，L_：chamfering

一

，R_：corner arc transition

Function: When the codes above are added to the end of the block specifying linear interpolation
Programming

(G01) or circular interpolation (G02, G03), a chamfering or corner rounding is added

automatically outside the corner during machining. Blocks specifying chamfering or
corner rounding arc can be specified consecutively.
Explanation：
1. Chamfering: after L, specify the distance from the virtual corner point to the start and the
end points of the corner. The virtual corner point is the corner point that exists if chamfering is
not performed, which is shown below:：

( 1) G91 G01 X100 ,L10;

( 2) X100 Y100;
Inserted chamfering block

L
Appendix

Virtual corner point

Fig. 4-2-11-1

2. Corner R: after R, specify the radius for the corner rounding, which is shown below:

34
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

( 1) G91 G01 X100 ,R10;

( 2) X100 Y100;
Center of an arc with radius R

Fig. 4-2-11-2

一
Restrictions:
1. Chamfering and corner rounding can only be performed in a specified plane, and these

Programming
functions cannot be performed for parallel axes.
2. If the inserted chamfering or corner rounding block causes the tool to go beyond the
original interpolation move range, an alarm is issued.
3. Corner rounding cannot be specified in a threading block.
4. When the values of chamfering and corner rounding are negative, their absolute values
are used in the system.

4.2.12 Constant Pitch Thread Cutting（G32）

Command format:G32 X(U)__Z(W)__ F（I）__ J__K__Q__；

Code function: two axes simultaneously execute the thread cutting (their path is shown in Fig.
4-2-12-1) from the start point (the position before G32 runs) to the end point
specified by X(U), Z(W), Y(V). The code can execute the constant pitch straight
thread and taper thread, and end thread.
Explanation:
X(U)：X absolute(U is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement
distance) coordinate value of thread cutting end point;
Z(W)：Z absolute (W is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement
distance) coordinate value of thread cutting end point;
F：Metric pitch. Namely it is movement amount of the tool opposite to the workpiece when
the spindle rotates one rev, and its range: 0.001 ～ 500 mm, and it is a modal
parameter;
I ：The tooth quantity/inch in the inch system, its range is 0.06 teeth/inch~~25400
teeth/inch, and it is a modal parameter;
J:：Stroke in the short axis in thread run-out , its range(-99999999~99999999）x the least
input increment, its unit: mm with negative sign; if the short axis is X, its value is
specified with the radius; J value is a modal parameter.
K：Length in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 0~99999999x the least input

35
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

increment, and its unit: mm./inch. If the long axis is X, its value is in radius without
direction; K is a modal parameter.
Q：it is an initial angle defined to an offset angle between the spindle rotation one rev and
starting point of thread cutting: 0～360 (unit: degree). Q is a non-modal parameter,
must be defined, otherwise it is 00.
Q rules：
1. Its initial angle is 0 if Q is not specified;
2. For continuous thread cutting, Q specified by its following thread cutting block except
for the first block is invalid, namely Q is omitted even if it is specified;
3. Multi threads formed by initial angle is not more than 65535;
4. Unit : 10 . Q180 is input in program if it offsets 1800 with spindle one rev. it can be used
to multi-head thread cutting. The system automatically counts the thread initial angle
一

according to the thread head quantity.

Programming

Appendix

Fig. 4-2-12-1

The system uses long-short axis and its calculation method is shown below in Fig. 4-2-12-2.

36
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Fig. 4-2-12-2

一
Notes:

Programming
1. At the beginning and ending part of thread cutting, it will result in the incorrect lead due to
the lifting speed. Considering the factor, the length of commanded thread is longer than
that of the required thread, which is shown in Fig. 4-2-12-3.
2. During thread cutting, the feedrate override is not valid, and keeps at 100%.
3. During thread cutting, the spindle override is not valid, because once the spindle override is
changed, it will result in the incorrect thread due to lifting speed.
4. After the feed hold is executed, the system displays “Feed hold” and the thread cutting
continuously executes not to stop until the current block is executed completely; when the
continuous thread cutting is executed, the program run pauses after thread cutting blocks
are executed completely.
5. In Single block, the program stops run after the current block is executed. The program
stops run after all blocks for thread cutting are executed.
6. When the previous block is for thread cutting and the current block is the same, the system
does not test the spindle encoder signal per rev at starting when the thread is started.
7. The spindle speed must be constant. Thread errors occur when the spindle speed
changes.
8. An alarm occurs when F, I are in the same block.
9. J, K are modal. T J, K must not be specified in the block and is done in the last block in
continuous thread cutting. Their mode are cancelled when no thread cutting is executed;
10. There is no thread run-out when J, or J, K is omitted; K=J: a thread run-out is executed
when K is omitted;
11. There is no thread run-out when J=0 or J=0, K=0;
12. When K=0 or it is omitted, J=K: a thread run-out is executed.

Example 1：using G32 compiles a program shown in Fig. 4-2-12-3，and the thread pitch：
4mm.

37
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一

Fig. 4-2-12-3
Programming

Example: d1 = 3mm，d2 = 1.5mm, total cutting depth 1mm with two times cut-in.
G0 X100 Z50；（rapid positioning）
M03 S200；（start the spindle, the speed 200）
T0101； （call the thread tool）
G0 X49 Z3；（rapid positioning, the 1st time cut-in 1mm）
G32 W-74.5 F4.0；
G00 X55；
W74.5；
X48； （rapid positioning, the 2nd time cut-in 1mm）
G32 W-74.5 F4.0；
G00 X55
W74.5；
G0 X100 Z50 M05；
Appendix

M30；

Example: Use G32 code to program shown as Fig. 4-2-12-4. The long axis is Z axis, and
the thread lead is 3mm.

38
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Fig. 4-2-12-4

Programming
Example: d1 = 2mm，d2 = 1mm, total cutting depth 1mm(one-sided) with two times cut-in.
G0 X100 Z50；（rapid positioning）
M03 S200；（start the spindle, the speed 200）
T0101； （call the thread tool）
G00 X19 Z2； （rapid positioning, the 1st time cut-in 1mm）
G32 X49 Z-41 F3；
G00 X55；
Z2；
G0 X18； （rapid positioning, the 2nd time cut-in 1mm）
G32 X48 Z-41 F3；
G0 X55；
Z2；
G0 X100 Z50 M05；
M30；

4.2.13 Variable Pitch Thread Cutting（G34）

Command format：G34 X(U)__Z(W)__ F（I）__J__ K__R___Q__；

Function：two axes simultaneously execute the thread cutting from the start point (the position before
G34 runs) to the end point specified by X(U), Z(W), Y(V). The code can execute the
variable pitch straight thread and taper thread, and end thread.
Explanation:
X(U)：X absolute(U is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement
distance) coordinate value of thread cutting end point;
Z(W)：Z absolute (W is an incremental programming code and is the tool movement
distance) coordinate value of thread cutting end point;

39
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

F：Metric pitch. It is a pitch of the thread start point, its range: 0.001～500 mm, and it is a
modal parameter;
I ：The tooth quantity/inch in the inch system, its range is 0.06 teeth/inch~~25400
teeth/inch, and it is a modal parameter;
J:：Stroke in the short axis in thread run-out, with negative sign; if the short axis is X, its
value is specified with the radius; J value is a modal parameter.
K：Length in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 0~99999999x the least input
increment, and its unit: mm./inch. If the long axis is X, its value is in radius without
direction; K is a modal parameter.
R：When R value’s increasing or reducing makes the pitch exceed its permissive value
or the pitch reduces to 0 or a negative value, an alarm occurs; simultaneously, when
the pitch change is big, acceleration/deceleration is slow during thread machining
maybe cause an mistaken pitch.
一

Q：it is an initial angle defined to an offset angle between the spindle rotation one rev and
starting point of thread cutting: 0～360 (unit: 1 degree). Q is a non-modal parameter,
Programming

must be defined, otherwise it is 00.

Q rules：
1. Its initial angle is 0 if Q is not specified;
2. For continuous thread cutting, Q specified by its following thread cutting block except
for the first block is invalid, namely Q is omitted even if it is specified;
3. Unit : 0.0010 . Q180 is input in program if it offsets 1800 with spindle one rev. it can be
used to multi-head thread cutting. The system automatically counts the thread initial
angle according to the thread head quantity.（see Example 3）
Appendix

40
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Programming
Fig. 4-2-13-1

Fig. 4-2-13-2

Notes：
1. At the beginning and ending part of thread cutting, it will result in the incorrect lead due to the
lifting speed. Considering the factor, the length of commanded thread is longer than that of the

41
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

required thread, which is shown in Fig. 4-2-13-3.

2. During thread cutting, the feedrate override is not valid, and keeps at 100%.
3. During thread cutting, the spindle override is not valid, because once the spindle override is
changed, it will result in the incorrect thread due to lifting speed.
4. After the feed hold is executed, the system displays “Feed hold” and the thread cutting
continuously executes not to stop until the current block is executed completely; when the
continuous thread cutting is executed, the program run pauses after thread cutting blocks are
executed completely.
5. In Single block, the program stops run after the current block is executed. The program stops run
after all blocks for thread cutting are executed.
6. When the previous block is for thread cutting and the current block is the same, the system does
not test the spindle encoder signal per rev at starting when the thread is started.
7. The spindle speed must be constant. Thread errors occur when the spindle speed changes.
8. An alarm occurs when F, I are in the same block.
9. J, K are modal J, K must not be specified in the block and is done in the last block in continuous
一

thread cutting. Their modes are cancelled when no thread cutting is executed;
10. There is no thread run-out when J, or J, R is omitted; R=J: a thread run-out is executed when K is
omitted;
Programming

11. There is no thread run-out when J=0 or J=0, R=0;

12. When R=0 or it is omitted, J=R: a thread run-out is executed.

Example 1：using G34 compiles a program shown in Fig. 4-2-13-3，and the thread pitch：4mm.

Appendix

Fig. 4-2-13-3

Example: d1 = 3mm，d2 = 1.5mm, total cutting depth 1mm (one-sided) with two times cut-in.
G0 X100 Z50；（rapid positioning）
M03 S200；（start the spindle, the speed 200）
T0101； （call the thread tool）
G0 X49 Z3；（rapid positioning, the 1st time cut-in 1mm）
G34 W-74.5 F4.0；
G00 X55；
W74.5；
X48； （rapid positioning, the 2nd time cut-in 1mm）
G34 W-74.5 F4.0；

42
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

G00 X55
W74.5；
G0 X100 Z50 M05；
M30；

Example: Use G34 code to program shown as Fig. 4-2-13-4. The long axis is Z axis, the thread lead
is 3mm.

一
Programming
Fig. 4-2-13-4

Example: d1 = 2mm，d2 = 1mm, total cutting depth 1mm with two times cut-in.
G0 X100 Z50；（rapid positioning）
M03 S200；（start the spindle, the speed 200）
T0101； （call the thread tool）
G00 X19 Z2； （rapid positioning, the 1st time cut-in 1mm）
G34 X49 Z-41 F3；
G00 X55；
Z2；
G0 X18； （rapid positioning, the 2nd time cut-in 1mm）
G34 X48 Z-41 F3；
G0 X55；
Z2；
G0 X100 Z50 M05；
M30；
Example: Use G34 code to compile 2-head thread shown programs as Fig. 4-2-13-5 and the
thread lead is 2mm.

43
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一

Fig. 4-2-13-5
Programming

Example: d1 = 3mm，d2 = 1.5mm, total cutting depth(one-sided) 1mm with two times cut-in.
G0 X100 Z50；（rapid positioning）
M03 S200；（start the spindle, the speed 200）
T0101； （call the thread tool）
G0 X49 Z3；（rapid positioning, the 1st head’s 1st time cut-in 1mm）
G34 W-74.5 F4.0Q0；
G00 X55；
W74.5；
G0 X49 Z3；（rapid positioning, the 2nd head’s 1st time cut-in 1mm）
G34 W-74.5 F4.0Q180；
G00 X55；
W74.5；
X48； （rapid positioning, the 1st head’s 2nd time cut-in 1mm）
Appendix

G34 W-74.5 F4.0Q0；

G00 X55
W74.5；
G0 X48 Z3；（rapid positioning, the 2nd head’s 2nd time cut-in 1mm）
G34 W-74.5 F4.0Q180；
G00 X55
W74.5；
G0 X100 Z50 M05；
M30；

4.3 Reference Point G Code

The reference point is a fixed point on the machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by
the reference point return function.
There are 3 codes for the reference point, as is shown in Fig. 4-3-1. The tool can be
automatically moved to the reference point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G28; or

44
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

be moved automatically from the reference point to a specified point via an intermediate point along a
specified axis by G28.

(3 ) R （ R eferen ce p o in t）

(2 ) (4 )

(1 ) (5 )
B
（ In term ed iate p o in t）
A C
（ S tart p o in t fo r referen ce （ T arg et p o in t o f retu rn fro m
p o in t retu rn ） referen ce p o in t ）

一
Fig. 4-3-1

4.3.1 Automatic Return to Machine Zero（G28）

Programming
Command format:：G28 X（U）_ Z（W）_ ；

Function: the axis specified by the code moves to the middle point defined by X(U), Z(W) from start
point and then return to the machine zero. One or two axes can be commanded in the
code.

Table 4-3-1-1

Code Function
G28 X（U） X returns to machine zero and Z remains in the previous position
G28 Z（W） Z returns to machine zero and X remains in the previous position
G28 Remain in previous position（No. 166 alarm occurs）
G28 X（U） Z（W） X,Z simultaneously returns to the machine zero

Explanation: the code execution process（see Fig.4-3-1-1）：

（1）Rapid traverse to middle point of specified axis from current position(A point→B point) ;
（2）Rapid traverse to reference point from the middle point(B point→R point) ;
（3）If the machine is not locked, LED is ON when the machine zero return is completed.

Fig. 4-3-1-1

45
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Note 1: After the power supply is turned on, when the manual machine zero is not executed one time, and

G28 is code, the motion from the middle point to the machine zero is the same as the manual

machine zero return.

Note 2: The two axes position at the respectively rapid traverse speed from A to B and from B to R, and so

the path is not always a straight line.

Note 3: Do not use the function and the machine zero is not installed on the machine.

4.4 Simple Canned Cycle G Code

In some special roughing, due to the large cutting amount, the same machining path should be
repeated for many times. Then, the fixed cycle function can be used, that is one block can realize the
一

machining which is normally commanded by many blocks. Moreover, during repeated cutting, just the
corresponding numerical value is rewritten, which is very useful to simplify the program. The single
Programming

cycle codes include the outer/inter circle cutting cycle G90, thread cutting cycle G92 and end face
cutting cycle G94.
In the following explanatory figure, it is specified by diameter. When the radius specifies, replace
U with U/2, and X with X/2.

4.4.1 Axial Cutting Cycle（G90）

Command format：G90 X（U）__ Z（W）__ R__ F__；

Function: Executing the code can realize the single cycle machining of the cylinder and conical faces.
The cycle completes and the tool comes back to the start position. The broken line（R）
means the rapid traverse and the full line（F）means the cutting feed shown in figures
4-4-1-1 and 4-4-1-2. In increment programming, the codes of the numerical value after
address U depend on X direction of path1, the codes after address W are set by Z
Appendix

direction of path 2.
Explanation:
X, Z: Absolute coordinate value of cycle end point, unit: mm;
U, W: Coordinate of the cycle end point corresponding to the cycle start point, unit: mm;
R: Radius difference between the conical face cutting’s start point and its end point, unit:
mm;
F: The compound feedrate of X and Z axes in cycle, and it is a modal code.

46
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Fig. 4-4-1-1

Fig. 4-4-1-2 Programming

According to the different tool start-up positions, G90 code has four paths, which is shown in
Fig.4-4-1-3.

47
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Fig. 4-4-1-3 G90 code path

For example: The part program is edited by G90 code shown in Fig. 4-4-1-4. Appendix

Fig. 4-4-1-4

Program:
O0001；
M3 S300；
G0 X130 Z5；

48
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

G90 X120 Z-110 F200；（C→D）

X60 Z-30；（A→B）
G0 X130 Z-30；
G90 X120 Z-80 R-30 F150；（B→C）
M5 S0；
M30；

4.4.2 Radial Cutting Cycle（G94）

Command format：G94 X（U）__ Z（W）__ R__ F__；

Function: When the code is executed, the end single cycle machining can be performed, after the
cycle completes, the tool returns to the start position.。

一
R means rapid traverse and F means cutting feed in Fig. 4-4-2-1 and 4-4-2-2. In

Programming
increment programming, signs of numerical value after address U depend on X direction
of path 2, signs after address W by Z direction of path 1.
Explanation：
X , Z: Absolute coordinate value of cycle end point, unit: mm;
U, W: Coordinate of cycle end point corresponding to cycle start point, unit: mm;
R: Z coordinate vector of the end face cutting from start point to end point, unit: mm;
F: Compound feedrate of X and Z axes in cycle, a modal code

1(R)

U/2 2(F)
4(R)
3(F)

X/2 W

Fig. 4-4-2-1

49
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Fig. 4-4-2-2

According to the different tool start-up positions, there are four paths in G94 code, which is shown
in Fig. 4-4-2-3:

1) U<0，W<0，R<0 2) U<0，W<0，R>0(│R│≤│W│)

X X
W
R W
R
B
A B A
U/2
U/2
Appendix

C C D
D
Z Z

3) U>0，W<0，R>0 (│R│≤│W│) 4) U>0，W<0，R<0

X X
W R W
R
C D C D
U/2 U/2

B A B A
Z Z
Fig. 4-4-2-3 G94 code path

50
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Example: The part program is compiled by G94 code shown in 4-4-1-4.

Program：
O0002；
M3 S1；
G0 X130 Z5；
G94 X120 Z-110 F100；（D→C）
G0 X120 Z0；
G94 X60 Z-30 R-50；（C→B→A）
M5 S0；
M30；

4.4.3 Thread Cutting Cycle（G92）

一
Format:

Programming
G92X(U)__ Z(W)__ J__K__ F__ L__ ； （Metric thread）

Specified thread lead (F)

G92X(U)__ Z(W)__ J__K__ I __ L__ ； （Inch thread）

Specified thread lead (teeth /inch)

Function: Executing the code can process the straight, taper single cycle with a constant lead, then
the cycle completes and the tool returns to the start point. During thread cutting, it does not
need the tool retraction grooving. J, K is separate X, Z run-out length. In Fig.4-4-3-1,
Fig.4-4-3-2, the dotted line (R) means the rapid traverse, and the solid line (F) means the
cutting feed. When J, K sets its value, the system executes X, Z thread run-out based on
the setting value of J and K; when only J or K value is set, the system executes the thread
run-out by 45°, When the user does not require J and K to set the run-out length, the
run-out length=the value set by data parameter P473 X0.1 X pitch is executed by the
system. When is omitted, K=J thread run-out is performed; J=0 or J=0, K=0, there is no
thread run-out; when J≠0 and K=0, K=J thread run-out is performed; there is no thread
run-out, J0, K≠0 can be set.
Explanation:
X, Z: Coordinate value of cycle end point, unit: mm;
U, W: Coordinate of cycle end point corresponding to cycle start point, unit: mm;
J: X run-out length, without sign. Its range: 0~9999, its unit: mm, J is specified by radius;
K: Z run-out length, without sign. Its range: 0~999999, its unit: mm;
R: Radius difference of thread start point and end point, unit: mm;
F: The thread lead in metric system, the range is 0.001~~500, unit: mm, mode code;
I: Number of teeth/inch of inch system thread, the range is 0.06~~25400, unit: teeth/inch,
mode code;
L: Number of thread head, its range is 1~360, unit: head, modal code: it is default to 1
without specification;

51
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Fig. 4-4-3-1

W Tool

4(R)
U/2 3(R)
1(R)
2(F)

X/2

Lx
Appendix

Lz
Fig. 4-4-3-2
Note:
1. Notes of thread cutting are the same as those of G32 thread cutting, refer to Section 4.2.13;
2. If the feed hold signal (dwell) is input in thread cutting cycle, the cycle continues until the
movement 3 completes, and then it stops;
3. The thread lead range and spindle speed limitation are same as those of G32 thread cutting;
4. When G92 processes the straight thread, the tool start-up point of G92 is same as the
thread end point in X direction, it will alarm because the inner or outer thread can not be
differed;
5. About the range of R value in G92, refer to Fig. 4-4-1-3;
6. When one of J, K is set to 0, or they are not specified, 45°thread run-out is performed;
7. In MDI mode, I address value can be input but its relevant value is not displayed. Do not run
G92 in MDI mode.

52
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Example: Firstly, the part program is edited by G90 code shown in Fig. 4-4-3-3, and G92
machines a thread.

一
Programming
Fig. 4-4-3-3

Program：
O0001；
M3 S300；
G0 X150 Z50；
T0101； （Outer turning tool）
G0 X130 Z5；
G90 X120 Z-110 F200； （C→D）
X60 Z-30；（A→B）
G0 X130 Z-30；
G90 X120 Z-80 R-30 F150；（B→C）
G0 X150 Z150；
T0202； （Thread tool）
G0 X65 Z5；
G92 X58.5 Z-25 F3； （Machining thread, cutting divided into 4 times）
X57.5 Z-25；
X56.5 Z-25；
X56 Z-25；
M5 S0；
M30；

53
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.4.4 Notes of Single Fixed Cycle Codes

1） In the single fixed cycle, data X (U), Z (W) and R are modal values. When new X (U), Z (W)
and R are not specified , the previous code data are valid;
2）In the single fixed cycle, X (U), Z(W) and R are cleared when the system specifies the
non-modal G code besides G04 or other codes in Group 01 besides G90, G92 or G94;
3）There is only the block without motion codes after G90, G92 or G94, the system does not
repeatedly execute the fixed cycle.
（Example） N003 M3；
…
…
N010 G90 X20.0 Z10.0 F2000；
一

N011 M8；（do not repetitively execute G90）

…
Programming

…
4） In the fixed cycle state, if M, S and T are commanded, then, the fixed cycle can process
with M, S and T functions at the same time. Like the following examples, when the fixed
cycle is cancelled by accident due to the codes of G00 and G01 after codeing M, S and T,
please code the fixed cycle again.
（Example） N003 T0101；
…
N010 G90 X20.0 Z10.0 F2000；
N011 G00 T0202；
N012 G90 X20.5 Z10.0；

4.5 Compound Fixed Cycle Code

To simplify programming, multiple cycle codes of the system includes axial roughing cycle G71,
Appendix

radial roughing cycle G72, closed cutting cycle G73, finishing cycle G70, axial grooving multiple cycle
G74, axial grooving multiple cycle G75 and multiple thread cutting cycle G76. When the finishing path
and the cutting depth of roughing are specified , the system automatically counts the cutting path and
machining times.

4.5.1 Axial Roughing Cycle（G71 type Ⅰ）

Command format：G71u（Δd）R（e）；
G71 P（NS） Q（NF） U（Δu） W（Δw）F S T ；
N（NS）G0/G1 X（U） ．．．．．；
．．．．．．．．；
．．．．F；
．．．．S； blocks for finishing path
．．．．T；
·
N（NF）．．．．．；

54
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Function: According to the finishing path, cutting depth, tool infeed and tool retraction amount
given by blocks NS～NF , the system automatically counts the path of roughing, which is
shown in 4-5-1-1. the tool cuts the workpiece in paralleling with Z. The code is applied to
the formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Explanation：
Δd: Cut depth every time without sign. Cut-in direction is determined by AA'（specified by
radius），its range: 0.001mm～99999.999 mm. It is a modal code and is valid till it is
specified next time. P463 can set it. The parameter value can be changed according to
the program code.
e：Tool retraction amount (specified by radius), unit: mm. Its value: 0mm～99999.999mm. it
is a modal code and is valid till it is specified next time. P464 can set it. The parameter
value can be changed according to the program code.
NS：Block number of the first block of finishing path.

一
NF：Block number of the last block of finishing path.

Programming
Δu ： X finishing allowance’s distance and direction. Its value range: -999999.999 ～
999999.999mm.
Δw ： Z finishing allowance’s distance and direction. Its value range: -999999.999 ～
999999.999mm.
F：cutting feedrate，its range: feed per minute 1mm/min～6000mm/min，feed per rev
0.001mm/r～500mm/r.
S：Spindle speed.
T：Tool, tool offset number.

ΔD

Fig. 4-5-1-1 G71 code path

1. △d,△u are specified by the same U and different with or without being specified P, Q
codes.
2. A cycle movement is performed by G71 code specified by P and Q.
3. In G71 cycle, F, S and T functions are invalid among the sequence number NS~~NF
blocks, which can be ignored. However, F, S and T which are commanded before or in

55
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

G71 block are valid. F, S and T are only valid for G70 code cycle among sequence
number NS~~NF blocks.
4. With constant surface speed control selection function, G96 or G97 is invalid among
sequence number NS~~NF blocks, the codes before or in G71 are valid.
5. According to the different cutting direction, the G71 code path has the following four
situations (Fig. 4-5-1-2). Anyway, the tool cuts parallel with Z axis, signs of Δu and Δw are
shown below:

B A A B
U(+)..W(+) U(+)..W(-)

X
一

Z A' A'
Linear, arc
Programming

A' A' interpolation

can be executed

U(-)..W(+) U(-)..W(-)
B A A B

Fig. 4-5-1-2

6. The blocks of NS sequence number between A and A’ can include G00 or G01 code, but Z
coordinates of A and A' must be consistent.
7. X and Z axis must be monotone increasing or decreasing between A’ and B
8. In the blocks of sequence number from NS to NF, the subprograms can not be called.
9. Up to 100 blocks between NS and NF can be compiled. ERR137 alarm occurs when the
block quantity exceeds 100.
Appendix

Example: Use the compound fixed cycle G71 to edit the part program shown in Fig.4-5-1-3.

56
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Programming
Fig. 4-5-1-3
Program：
O0001；
N010 G0 X220.0 Z50； （Position to a safety position）
N020 M3 S300； （Spindle rotation CCW，speed: 300r/min）
N030 M8； （Cooling ON）
N040 T0101； （Import a roughing tool）
N050 G00 X200.0 Z10.0； （Rapid position, approach the workpiece）
N060 G71 U0.5 R0.5； （Cut depth 1 mm [diameter]; tool retraction[diameter] each
time）
N070 G71 P080 Q120 U1 W2.0 F100 S200； （Roughing a---d，X allowance 1mm，Z 2mm）
N080 G00 X40.0； （Position to X40）
N090 G01 Z-30.0 F100 S200；（a→b）
N100 X60.0 W-30.0；（b→c） Finishing path block a→b→c→d→e
N110 W-20.0；（c→d）
N120 X100.0 W-10.0；（d→e）
N130 G00 X220.0 Z50.0； (Rapid retract to the safety position）
N140 T0202； (Change No. 2 finishing tool，and execute its tool offset）
N150 G00 X200.0 Z10.0； （Position to the cycle start point commanded by G70）
N160 G70 P80 Q120； (Finishing a--- e）
N170 M05 S0； (Stop the spindle, speed）
N180 M09； （Stop cooling）
N190 G00 X220.0 Z50.0 T0100； (Rapid retract to the safety position, retrieve the reference tool,
clear tool offset）
N200 M30； （End of program）

57
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.5.2 Grooving Cycle Machining（G71 type Ⅱ）

G71 type II：the type Ⅱ is different from type 1, the outline contour along X axis does not need
monontonely increase or decrease. The contour can be machined, up to 20 groovings
when its shape along Z monontonely changes.
The first tool needs to be vertical, and Z axis can perform machining when Z direction is a
monotonous change’s shape.
一
Programming

Fig. 4-5-2-1
Because Z is the non-monotonously change, an alarm occurs, which is shown in Fig.
4-5-2-2.

Fig. 4-5-2-2
Command format: G71 U Δd R e
（ ） （ ）；
G71 P（NS） Q（NF） U（Δu） W（Δw）F S T ；
N（NS） G0/G1 X（U） Z（W）．；
．．．．．．．．；
Appendix

．．．．F；
．．．．S； blocks for finishing path
．．．．T；
·
N（NF）．．．．．；

58
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Fig. 4-5-2-3（G71 type Ⅱ machining path）

Programming
After the turning, the system should execute the tool retraction, the retraction amount is specified
by R（e）or No. 464 as Fig. 4-5-2-4.

Fig. 4-5-2-4

Note：
1. ns block is only G00, G01. When the workpiece is type II, the system must specify the two
axes X(U) and Z(W), and W0 must be specified when Z does not move.
2. The tool retraction point should be high or low as possible to avoid crashing the workpiece.
3. For type II, only X finishing allowance can be specified; when Z finishing allowance is specified,
the whole machining path offsets, and it can be specified to 0.
4. Other notes are consistent with those of G71 type I.
5. P0461 compound turning cycle G71，G72 are non-monotone allowable value (the plane 1st
axis), roughing direction’s axis of type I, type II is non-monotone change, an alarm occurs.
Sometime, a tiny non-monotone change’s shape is formed at case of automatically creating
programs, the parameter without a negative sign is set as a allowable value. So, even if a
non-monotone change’s shape is contained, G71, G72 can be executed.
6. P0462 compound turning cycle G71，G72 are non-monotone allowable value (the plane 2nd
axis), roughing direction’s axis of type I, type II is non-monotone change, an alarm occurs.
Sometime, a tiny non-monotone change’s shape is formed at case of automatically creating
programs, the parameter without a negative sign is set as a allowable value. So, even if a
non-monotone change’s shape is contained, G71, G72 can be executed.
7. P0477 compound turning fixed cycle G71, G72 start position’s idle stroke amount of cutting
feed, cutting feed distance of rapidly traverse to tool infeed points.

4.5.3 Radial Roughing Cycle（G72 type I）

Command format：G72 W（Δd）R （e）F_ S_ T_；

59
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

G72 P （NS） Q （NF） U （Δu） W （Δw） ；

U U U U U U U U

N（NS）G0/G1 Z(W) ．．；

．．．．．．．；
．．．． F；
．．．． S； blocks for finishing path
．．．． T；
N（NF）．．．．．；

Function: According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and retract
tool, the system automatically counts the path of roughing, the tool cuts the workpiece in
paralleling with X. The code is applied to the formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Explanation:
一

Δd：cutting depth every time, no sign. The cutting direction is depended on AB, the range is
0.001 mm～99999.999mm. It is a modal code, and it will be valid until it is commanded
Programming

next time. Moreover, according to program codes, P463 can also specify it and the
parameter value can also be rewritten according to the program code.
e： tool retraction amount, its unit: mm，its range: 0mm～99999.999mm. It is a modal code,
and it will be valid until it is commanded next time. Moreover, according to program
codes, P464 can also specify it and the parameter value can also be rewritten according
to the program code.
NS：the sequence number of the first block among the block group of finishing path.
NF：the sequence number of the last block among the block group of finishing path.
Δu ： X finishing allowance distance and direction, and its range is -999999.999mm ～
999999.999mm.
Δw: Z finishing allowance distance and direction, and its range is -999999.999mm ～
999999.999mm。
F：cutting feedrate, its range is feed per minute 1mm/min～6000mm/min，feed per rev
0.001mm/r～500mm/r.
Appendix

S：spindle speed.
T：tool, tool offset number. ΔD

ΔU/2

ΔW
60
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Fig. 4-5-3-1

Explanation:
1. △d, △u are specified by the same W and different with or without being specified P, Q
codes.
2. A cycle movement is performed by G72 code specified by P and Q.
3. In G72 cycle, F, S and T functions are invalid among the sequence number NS~~NF blocks,
which can be ignored. However, F, S and T which are commanded before or in G71 block
are valid. F, S and T are only valid for G70 code cycle among sequence number NS~~NF
blocks.
4. With constant surface speed control selection function, G96 or G97 is invalid among
sequence number NS~~NF blocks, the codes before or in G72 are valid.

一
5. According to the different cutting direction, the G72 code path has the following four
situations (Fig. 4-5-3-2). Anyway, the tool cuts parallel with X axis, signs of Δu and Δw are

Programming
shown below:
6. The blocks of NS sequence number between A and A’ can include G00 or G01 code, but X
coordinates of A and B must be consistent.
7. X and Z axis must be monotone increasing or decreasing between B and C
8. In the blocks of sequence number from NS to NF, the subprograms can not be called.
9. Up to 128 blocks between NS and NF can be compiled. ERR137 alarm occurs when the
block quantity exceeds 128.
C C

U(+)..W(+).. U(+)..W(-).. Z

B B X
B A A B 直线和圆弧插补都可以
A
A

U(-)..W(+).. U(-)..W(-)..
C C

Fig. 4-5-3-2 Four shapes of G72 code path

Example: Use the compound fixed cycle G72 to edit the part program shown in Fig. 4-5-3-3

61
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Fig. 4-5-3-3

Program:
PO0002；
N010 G0 X220.0 Z50.0； （Position to a safety position）
N015 T0202； （Change No. 2 tool and execute its tool offset）
N017 M03 S200； （Spindle rotation CCW，speed: 200）
N020 G00 X176.0 Z10.0；（Rapid position, approach the workpiece）
N030 G72 W2.0 R1.0； （Tool infeed 2mm，tool retraction 1mm）
N040 G72 P050 Q090 U1.0 W1.0 F100 S200； （Roughing a---d，X allowance 1mm，Z 2mm）
N050 G00 Z-55.0 S200 ；（Rapid position）
N060 G01 X160.0 F120； （Tool infeed to a）
Appendix

N070 X80.0 W20.0； （Machining a—b） Blocks for finishing path

N080 W15.0； （Machining b—c）
N090 X40.0 W20.0 ； （Machining c—d）
N100 G0 X220.0 Z50.0； （Rapid retract to the safety position）
N105 T0303； （Change No. 3 g tool，and execute its tool offset）
N108 G00 X176.0 Z10.0； （Rapid return to G70 position）
N110 G70 P050 Q090； （Finishing a—d）
N115 G0 X220.0 Z50.0； (Move to the safety position to execute tool change)
N120 M5 S0 T0200； （Stop the spindle, change No. 2 tool, cancel the tool offset）
N130 G0 X220.0 Z50.0； （Rapid return to the start point）
N140 M30； （Program end）

4.5.4 Grooving Cycle Machining（G72 type II）

The type II is different from the type I as follows:

62
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

1）Relative definition: more one parameter than the type I .

2）X external contour need not be the monotonous increasing or the monotonous decreasing be
up to 10 grooves as follows:

一
Programming
Fig. 4-5-4-1
But, X external contour must be the monotonous increasing or the monotonous decreasing, and
the following contour cannot be machined:

Fig. 4-5-4-2
1） The first tool cutting need not the vertical: the machining can be executed when Z is the
monotonous change shape as follows:

63
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-5-4-3
2） After the turning, the system should execute the tool retraction, the retraction travel is specified by
R（e）or No. 464 as follows:
一

Fig. 4-5-4-4
Programming

3） The finishing allowance specifies only Z direction. When X is specified, the whole machining path
offsets and it is better to specified it to 0.

Command format: G72 W（Δd）R （e）F_ S_ T_；

G72 P （NS） Q （NF） U （Δu） W （Δw） ；

U U U U U U U U

N（NS）G0/G1 X(U) Z(W) ．．；

．．．．．．．；
．．．． F；
．．．． S； Blocks for finishing
．．．． T；
N（NF）．．．．．；
Appendix

64
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Programming
Fig. 4-5-4-5（G72 type machining path）

4.5.5 Closed Cutting Cycle（G73）

Command format：G73u （Δi）W（Δk） R （d）；

G73 P（NS）Q（NF）U（Δu）W（Δw）F S T ；

Function: Use the cycle code, it can cut repeatedly along the path specified by NS~~NF blocks, and
the tool moves forward one time after cutting for each time. About the semi-finished
products of forging, molding and roughing, it can improve the high-efficiency machining.
Explanation:
Δi：X retraction distance and direction (radius value), unit: mm; modal codes are valid until
it is specified next time. Moreover, the parameter P467 can also set it and the
parameter value can be rewritten according to the program codes.
Δk：Z retraction distance and direction (radius value), unit:mm; modal codes are valid until
it is speicified next time. Moreover, the parameter P466 can also set it and the
parameter value can be rewritten according to the program codes.
D：Times of closed cutting, unit: time; mode codes are valid until it is speicified next time.
Moreover, the parameter P468 can also set it, and the parameter value can also be
rewritten according to the program codes.
NS：The sequence number of the first block which forms the finishing shape in block
group;
NF：The sequence number of the last block which forms the finishing shape in block
group;

65
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Δu：X finishing allowance, its range: -999999.999mm～999999.999mm ；

Δw：Z finishing allowance, its range:-999999.999mm～999999.999mm；
F：Cutting feedrate, its range: 1 mm/min～6000mm/min；
S：Spindle speed；
T：Tool and tool offset number；
一
Programming

Fig. 4-5-5-1 G73 code running path

1. F, S and T functions in any blocks of NS~NF are invalid, but they are only valid when specified
in G73.
2. Δi，Δk，Δu and Δw are specified by address U and W, and the difference is whether it includes
specified P and Q.
3.Blocks between NS and NF in G73 can not call subprograms.
4. Use NS~NF blocks to realize cycle machining, please pay attention to codes of Δu, Δw, Δi and
Δk during programming. After the cycle completes, the tool returns to point A.
5. Δi orΔk is 0 in program, input U0 or W0; or set parameters P73 and P74 as 0; otherwise, it will
Appendix

get affected by G73 setting value of last time.

6. Up to 100 blocks can compiled into the sequence number NS~NF. An alarm ERR0460 occurs
when the block quantity exceeds 100.

Example: Use the closed cutting cycle G73 code to edit the machining program of the part
shown in Fig.4-5-5-2.

66
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Programming
Fig. 4-5-5-2 G73 code example

Programs are as below: (diameter specification, metric input, least blank dimension Ø86）

N008 G0 X260.0 Z50.0 ； （Position to a safety position）

N009 T0101； （Change No.1 tool and executes its tool offset）
N010 G98 M03 S300； （The spindle rotation CW, speed 300）
N011 G00 X200.0 Z10.0； （Rapidly position to the start point）
N012 G73 U2.0 W2.0 R3 ； （X tool retraction 4mm，Z tool retraction 2mm，divided into
3 times to roughing, each tool’s diameter feed 2mm）
N013 G73 P014 Q020 U0.5 W0.5 F100 ；（X leaves 0.5mm，Z leaves 0.5mm finishing
allowance）
N014 G00 X80.0 W-10.0 S500 ；
N015 G01 W-20.0 F120 ；
N016 X100.0 W-10.0 ；
N017 W-30.0 ； Blocks for finishing shape
N018 G02 X120 W-10.0 R10.0 F100 ；
N019 G01 X140.0 ；
N020 G01 X160.0 W-10.0 ；
N021 G0 X260.0 Z50.0； (Move a safety position to conveniently execute tool change)
N022 T0303； （Change No. 3 tool，and execute its tool offset）
N023 G00 X200.0 Z10.0； （Rapidly return to G70 positioning）
N024 G70 P014 Q020； （Finishing）
N025 M5 S0 T0200； （Stop the spindle, change No. 2 tool, cancel the tool compensation）
N026 G0 X260.0 Z50.0； （Rapidly return to the start point）

67
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

N027 M30； （Program end）

4.5.6 Finishing Cycle（G70）

Command format：G70 P（NS）Q（NF）；

Function: When the code is executed, the tool begins finishing from the start position along with the
finishing path of the work piece which is specified by NS~NF blocks. After roughing
commanded by G71, G72 and G73, G70 code can execute finishing.
Explanation:
NS: The sequence number of the first block which forms the finishing shape in block group;
NF: The sequence number of the last block which forms the finishing shape in block group;
G70 code path is decided by programming path of NS~~NF blocks. The corresponding
一

position relations of NS and NF in G70~~G73 are as below:

．．
．．．．．．
Programming

．．
．．．．．．
G71/G72/G73 P（NS） Q（NF） U（Δu） W（Δw） F S T ；

N（NS） ．． ．．．．
．．．．．．．．
·F
·S
·T
·
·
·
N（NF）．．． ．．．
·
G70 P（NS） Q（NF） ；
·
Appendix

1. F, S and T functions are invalid which is specified by “NS” and “NF” in blocks G71, G72 and
G73; however, during executing G70, F, S and T are valid, which are specified by the
sequence number between “NS” and “NF” blocks.
2. When G70 cycle machining completes, the tool returns to the start point and reads the next
block.
3. In G70, the blocks between NS and NF can not call subprogram.
Example: see G71, G72 code examples.

4.5.7 Axial Grooving Cycle（G74）

Command format: G74 R（e）；

G74 X（U）Z（W）P（Δi）Q（Δk）R（Δd）F；

Function: When the code is executed, the system can determine the running path of tool according
to the cutting end point set by the block (the point is determined by the coordinate value of
X and Z axes in the block), and by the values of e, Δi, Δk and Δd. In the cycle, the chips of
outer shape cutting can be processed; moreover, if X (U) and P are omitted, only Z axis
movement is deep hole cycle. About the path, it is shown in figure 4-5-7-1.

68
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Explanation:
e: The retraction amount range after cutting Δk along Z direction is 0～9999.999 mm；the
mode code is valid until the next specification. Moreover, P469 can also set it,
according to the program codes, the parameter value can also be rewritten, the radius
code;
X： X absolute coordinate value of the cutting end point B2, unit: mm;
U： X total movement amount from the cutting end point B2 to the start point A, unit: mm;
Z： Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B2, unit: mm;
W：Z total movement amount from the cutting end point B2 to the start point A, unit: mm;；
Δi： X cycle movement amount every time (without sign and radius value), unit: mm;
Δk：Z cutting movement amount every time (without sign), unit: mm;
Δd：X tool retraction of cutting to the end point（radius value, unit：mm；

一
F： Cutting feedrate. Its range: feed per minute 1mm/min～8000mm/min，feed per rev
0.001mm/r～500mm/r”.

Programming

Fig. 4-5-7-1

1. e and Δd are specified by address R, their difference is whether there is specified X (U),
that is to say, if X (U) is commanded, it is Δd, otherwise, it is e;
2. The cycle movement adopts G75 code specified by X (U). When only “G74 R（e）” is
executed, the cycle operation is not performed.

Example: Use G74 code to edit the part program shown in Fig.4-5-7-2.

69
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Fig. 4-5-7-2

Program:
O0001； （Program name）
G0 X100 Z50； （Rapid position）
T0101； （tool width 2mm）
M3 S500 G97； （Start the spindle, set speed to 500）
G0 X36 Z5； （Position at the start point of machining，X adds the tool width）
G74 R1 ； （code Z tool retraction amount）
G74 X20 Z-20 P2 Q3.5 F50；（X cycle movement amount every time 4mm，Z cycle
Appendix

movement amount every time 3.5mm）

G0 Z50； （Z tool retraction）
X100； （X tool retraction）
M5 S0； （stop the spindle）
M30； （end of program）

4.5.8 Radial Grooving Cycle（G75）

Command format：G75 R（e）；

G75 X（U） Z（W） P（Δi）Q（Δk）R（Δd）F ；

Function: When the code is executed, the system determines the running path of the tool based on
the cutting end point set by blocks (the point is determined by X and Z coordinate values)
and by the values of e, Δi, Δk and Δd. Equivalent to G74, it interchanges X and Z, and the
chips of end face cutting can be performed in the cycle, and the external diameter can be
executed channel and cutting machining (Z, W and Q can be omitted). The path is shown
in Fig. 4-5-8-1.

70
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Explanation:
e: The retraction amount range after cutting Δi along X direction is 0～9999.999 mm；the
mode code is valid until the next specification. Moreover, P76 can also set it, according
to the program codes, the parameter value can also be rewritten, the radius code;
X: X absolute coordinate value of the cutting end point B2, unit: mm;
U: X total movement amount from the cutting end point B2 to the start point A, unit: mm
Z: Z absolute coordinate value of the cutting end point B2, unit: mm;
W: Z total movement amount from the cutting end point B2 to the start point A, unit: mm;
Δi：X cycle movement amount every time (without sign and radius value), unit: mm;
Δk：Z cutting movement amount every time (without sign), unit: mm;
Δd：Retraction amount of cutting to the end point, unit: mm;
F: Cutting feedrate.
G74 and G75 all can be used for cutting, grooving or hole machining and the tool can

一
automatically retract.

Programming

Fig. 4-5-8-1
1. e and Δd are specified by address R, their difference is whether there is specified X (U),
that is to say, if X (U) is commanded, it is Δd, otherwise, it is e;
2. The cycle movement adopts G75 code specified by X (U).

Example: Use G75 code to edit the part program shown in Fig.4-5-8-2.

71
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-5-8-2 G75 code cutting example

一

Program:
Programming

O0001； （Program name）

G0 X150 Z50； （Rapid position）
T0101； （tool width 4mm）
M3 S500 G97； （Start the spindle, set speed to 500）
G0 X125 Z-24； （Position at the start point of machining，Z adds the tool width）
G75 R1 ； （code X tool retraction amount）
G75 X40 Z-50 P2 Q3.5 F50；（X cycle movement amount every time 4mm，Z cycle
movement amount every time 3.5mm）
G0 X150； （X tool retraction）
Z50； （Z tool retraction）
M5 S0； （stop the spindle）
M30； （end of program）
Appendix

4.5.9 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle（G76）

Command format: G76 P（m）（r）（a）Q（△dmin） R（d）；

G76 X（U） Z（W） R（i）P（k）Q（△d）F（I） ；

Function: The system can automatically calculate and perform the thread cutting cycle for many
times based on the data which are specified by the code address, and the code path is
shown as Fig. 4-5-9-1.
Explanation:
X, Z: The coordinate value of thread end point (thread bottom), unit: mm;
U, W: The coordinate value which the thread end point corresponding to the start point
of machining, unit: mm;
m: The repeated times 1~~99 for final finishing, the code value is mode. It is valid before
the next specification. Moreover, P472 can also set it, and the parameter value can
also be rewritten based on the program code. Finally, the finishing repeated times can
be 1~99;
r: Thread chamfering value. If take L as lead among the range of 0.1L~~9.9L, and 0.1L is

72
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

taken as one level, then the two digits can be specified by 00~~99. If the code is
mode, it will be valid till the next specification. Moreover, P474 can also set it, and the
parameter value can be rewritten based on the program code. In G76 program, the
thread chamfering value can be set, then the cycle of thread cutting in G92 also
function.
a：The angle of tool nose, also the screw thread, can be selected from the 6 angles of
80°,60°,55°，30°, 29°and 0°.The original angel value is specified by two digits. The
code is mode, and it will be valid until the next specification. Moreover, parameter P78
can also be set, and the parameter value can also be rewritten according to the
program codes. The angels of tool nose can be selected from the 6 angles: 80°, 60°,
55°, 30°, 29° and 0°;
△ dmin ： Minimum cutting amount, unit: mm, When one time cutting amount

(△D× N -△D× N − 1 ）is less than △ dmin, △ dmin is taken as the cutting amount

一
of one time. The code is mode, and it will be valid until the next specification.

Programming
Moreover, it can also be set by P470, and the parameter value can be rewritten by the
program code. The setting range of the minimum cutting is 0 ～ 9999999, unit:
0.001mm;
d ： Finishing allowance, unit: mm. The code is mode, and it is valid until the next
specification. It can also be set by P471, and the parameter value can be rewritten by
the program code. The setting range of finishing allowance is 0～～9999.999, unit:
0.001mm;
i: Radius difference of threading parts, unit: mm, i=0 is the straight thread of cutting;
k: Height of screw thread (distance in X direction is commanded by the radius value), unit:
mm;
△d：Cutting depth at the first time, radius value, unit: mm.
F: Thread lead, unit: mm;
I: Tooth quantity each inch.

Fig. 4-5-9-1

The details of cutting method is referred to Fig. 4-5-9-2：

73
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-5-9-2
一

1. Use the data specified by P, Q and R, it can differ whether there is address X (U) and Z (W) or
not.
2. The cycle movement is commanded by G76, which is specified by address X (U) and Z (W).
Programming

3. In cycle machining, the tool is one-sided tool edge for machining, the load of tool nose can be
reduced.
4. The cutting amount at the first time is △d, and the N times is △D× N , and the cutting
amount is same in each time
5. Considering the code of each address, there are four figures of machining, which can also
process the internal thread. In the thread cutting shown in figure 4-5-8-1, only the feedrate is
specified by F code between B and C, the others are rapid feedrate.
In the cycle, the code of the increment is determined by the following methods:
U: It is determined by the path from direction A to C;
W: It is determined by the path from direction C to D;
R (I): It is determined by the path from direction A to C;
P (K): Positive;
Q（△D）: Positive.
6. About the precautions of cutting thread, they are same as those of G32 cutting thread.
7. The specified thread chamfering value is also valid for G92 thread cutting cycle.
Appendix

8. m, r and a are specified by address P in one time.

Example: the thread cutting compound cycle G76 compiles a program shown in Fig. 4-5-9-3, and
the machining thread M68×6.
6

68

60.64

Cutting point
62 zooming in

Fig. 4-5-9-3

74
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Program:
G00 X100 Z50； （position to the safety position）
M03 S300； （Start the spindle, specify the speed）
G00 X80 Z10； （Rapid position to the start point of machining）
G76 P011060 Q0.1 R0.2； （execute the thread cutting）
G76 X60.64 Z-62 P3.68 Q1.8 F6.0；
G00 X100 Z50； （return to the program’s start point）
M5 S0； （the spindle stop）
M30； （Program end）

4.5.10 Notes for Compound Fixed Cycle Code

一
1. The necessary parameters P, Q, X, Z, U, W and R must be commanded correctly in the specified
compound fixed cycle blocks

Programming
2. In the blocks of G71, G72 and G73, when P codes the sequence number, the sequence number
corresponding to the block must code G00 or G01 of G codes in group 01, otherwise, P/S
alarm occurs.
3. In MDI mode, G70，G71，G72，G73，G74，G75 and G76 codes can not be executed; even if
it is commanded, it can not be executed.
4. In blocks of G70, G71, G72 and G73, the range of the sequence number specified by P and Q
codes, the following codes can not be included.
★Group 01 codes except for G00，G01，G02 and G03;
★ M98/M99；
★G04 is valid in the finishing and the last tool of roughing.
5. During executing the compound fixed cycle (G70~~G76), the movement can be stopped and the
manual operation can be performed. However, when the fixed cycle in compound type should be
performed again, it must return to the position before the manual operation. If it restarts without
return, the manual movement amount can not be added in the absolute value, the following
movements will misplace, and the absolute value is same as the manual movement value.
6. During executing G70，G71，G72 and G73, the sequence number specified by P and Q can not
coincide in the program.

7. About the precautions of thread cutting specified by G76, the G32 thread cutting is same as G92
thread cutting cycle, and the specified chamfering value is also valid for G92 thread cutting cycle.

4.6 Tool Compensation Function

The actual tool nose is not one point, but a section of circular. Because the circular of tool nose,
there exist the errors between the actual machining result and the work piece program; the tool
compensation function C can compensate the tool radius to eliminate the above errors.

75
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-6-1
一

4.6.1 Basic Concept of Tool Compensation Function C

Programming

4.6.1.1 Imaginary Tool Nose Concept

In the following Fig. 4-6-1-1-1, the tool nose A is a imaginary point, so it does not exist actually.
Therefore, it is called the imaginary tool nose (or the ideal tool nose). The actual tool nose radius
center is very difficult to set at the start position while it is very easy for the imaginary one, which is
shown in the following figure. It is same as the tool nose center; it does not need to consider the tool
nose radius when using the imaginary tool nose programming.

Appendix

Fig. 4-6-1-1-1 Tool nose radius center and imaginary tool nose
Note: About the machine with zero point, a standard point, such as the tool post center, can be taken as the
start point. The distance from the standard point to the center of tool nose radius or the distance of
imaginary tool nose is set to the tool offset value.

Set the distance from the standard point to the center of tool nose radius as the offset value, like
setting the radius center of tool nose as the start point; set the distance from the standard point to
the imaginary tool nose as the offset value, like setting the imaginary tool nose as the start point. To
set the offset value of tool, normally, measuring the distance from the standard point to the imaginary
tool nose is easier than measuring the distance from the standard point to the tool nose radius
center. Therefore, generally, the distance from the standard point to the imaginary tool nose is to set
the tool offset value.

When the center of tool post is taken as the start point, the tool offset value is shown in Fig.
4-6-1-1-2：

76
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

OFX OFX
X tool X tool compensation
compensation

OFZ OFZ
Z tool compensation Z tool compensation

Set the distance between the standard point and Set the distance between the standard point and the
the tool nose center to the compensation value tool nose center to the compensation value

一
Programming
The start point is at the tool nose center The start point is at the imaginary tool nose center

Fig. 4-6-1-1-2 Setting the tool offset value under condition of the center of tool post as the standard point

Fig. 4-6-1-1-3 and Fig. 4-6-1-1- 4 respectively take the tool paths programmed by the tool nose
center and the imaginary tool nose. The left figure is without the tool nose radius compensation,
and the right figure is with the tool nose radius compensation.

If the tool nose radius compensation is not used, If the tool nose radius compensation is used,
the tool nose center path is same as the it achieves the cutting precisely.
programmed path.

Fig. 4-6-1-1-3 Tool path during tool nose programming

Without the tool nose radius compensation, Use the tool nose radius compensation,
the imaginary tool nose path is same as and achieve the cutting precisely.
the programmed path.

77
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-6-1-1-4 Tool path during the imaginary tool nose programming

4.6.1.2 Imaginary Tool Nose’s Direction

In the actual machining, due to the machining requirement of the work piece, the different
一

positional relations exist between the tool and the work piece. From the center of the tool nose, the
direction of the assumed tool nose is determined by that of the tool during cutting.
Programming

The assumed tool nose number defines the positional relation between the assumed tool nose
point and the tool nose circular center. Number of assumed tool nose totally has 10 (0~~9), and
represents 9 directions of the positional relations. Before the tool nose radius compensation, the
number of assumed tool nose must set with the compensation amount in the tool nose radius
compensation memorizer. The direction of assumed tool nose can be selected from the eight
specifications in the following figures. These figures illustrate the relation between the tool and the
start point, and the end point of arrow is the assumed tool nose.

Appendix

78
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Programming
Fig. 4-6-1-2-1 imaginary tool nose number of rear tool post coordinate system

79
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Appendix

Fig. 4-6-1-2-2 imaginary tool nose number of front tool post coordinate system

When the tool nose center complies with the start point, the tool nose number to 0 or 9 is set.
Correspond to the compensation number of each tool and T sets the assumed tool nose number
of each tool.
80
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Fig. 4-6-1-2-3 Tool nose center consistent with the start point

4.6.1.3 Setting Compensation Values

一
Programming
Fig. 4-6-1-3-1 Compensation value of tool nose radius

Before compensating the tool nose radius, the following compensation values should be set: X, Z,
R and T. Among them, X and Z respectively is the tool offset value from the tool post center to the
tool nose in X and Z axis; R is the radius compensation value of assumed tool nose; T is the
assumed tool nose number. Value of each group corresponds to one tool compensation number,
and set in the interface of tool compensation. About the details, refer to Section Operation,
Rewriting and Setting the Tool Compensation Values.
The details are shown in the following table 4-6-1-3-1：

Table 4-6-1-3-1 Display page of the system tool nose radius compensation values

No. X Z R T
001 0.020 0.030 0.020 2
002 0.060 0.060 0.016 3
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
015 0.030 0.026 0.18 9
064 0.050 0.038 0.20 1

4.6.1.4 Relative Position between the Tool and the Workpiece

When the tool nose radius compensates, the relative position of tool and work piece should be
specified. In the coordinate system of rear tool post, when the tool center path is at the right side of

81
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

the programmed path (part path) forward direction, which is called as the right tool compensation,
which can be realized by G42 code; when the tool center path at the left side of the programmed path
(part path) forward direction, it is called as the left tool compensation, which can be realized by G41
code; and the front tool post is opposite. About the relative position of the tool and the work piece in
the codes G40, G41 and G42, refer to the table 4-6-1-4-1:

Table 4-6-1-4-1
Code Function Note

G40 Cancel the tool nose radius compensation

About the
The tool nose radius compensation (left) in the rear tool post
details, refer to
G41 coordinate system, the tool nose radius compensation (right) in the
Fig. 4-6-1-4-1
front tool post coordinate system.
and Fig.
The tool nose radius compensation (right) in the rear tool post
一

4-6-1-4-2
G42 coordinate system, the tool nose radius compensation (left) in the
front tool post coordinate system
Programming

Z
Tool
G42:Look along G41:Look along
the tool the tool
movement movement
direction, the direction, the
tool is at the tool is at the
right side of left side of
work piece work piece.
Work piece
X axis X axis
Appendix

G 42 G 41
G 42
G 42 G 41 G 41

Z axis Z axis

G 42 G 42 G 41

G 41
G 42 G 41

Fig. 4-6-1-4-1 Tool nose radius compensation in rear tool post coordinate system

82
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Z
X
Tool

G41:Tool is right to G42:Tool is left to

workpiece from its workpiece from its
movement direction movement direction

Workpiece

一
Programming
Fig. 4-6-1-4-2 Tool nose radius compensation in front tool post coordinate system

4.6.1.5 Inside and Outside

Compensate the tool nose radius; the corners of the former and the latter programmed path are
different, and the tool compensation paths are different. Therefore, the point of intersection of two
movement blocks at the side of work piece is greater or is just 180°, it is called as “inside”. And the
angle is between 0～180°, it is “outside”.
W o rk p ie c e s id e
Inside α

P ro g ra m m e d p a t h
α ≥ 1 80°

Program med path

Outside

α
W orkpiec e side
0 °≤α＜180 °

Fig. 4-6-1-5-1 Inside and outside

83
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.6.1.6 G41, G42 and G40 Command Format

Command format：

Note 1 : G40, G41 and G42 all are mode G codes.

Note 2: After setting the tool compensation, G02 or G03 code can follow G41/G42.

4.6.2 Tool Compensation

一

4.6.2.1 Analyzing the Tool Nose Radius Compensation

Programming

Generally, realizing the tool radius compensation requires three steps: setting, executing and
cancelling the tool compensation.

1. Setting the tool compensation

Change the offset cancelling mode into the offset mode; it is called setting the tool compensation.
About the details of the tool compensation, it is shown in Fig.4-6-2-1-1：

a) Tool movement around an inner side of a corner（α≥180°）

（ii）Straight line— arc

α
Appendix

r
G42
C
S
L
Tool center path Programmed
path

b) Tool movement around the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle ( 180°＞α≥90°）

84
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

（i）Straight line--straight line （ii）Straight line—arc

一
Programming
(c) Tool movement around the outside of an acute angle （α＜90°)

（i）Straight line— （ii）Straight line--- arc

straight line
G42 G42

L r
L r α
α
Programmed path
S L
S L Tool nose
center path Tool
nose center path Programmed path

(d) Tool movement around the outside linear→linear at an acute angle less than 1 degree（α＜1°)

Tool nose center path

L
r

G41 Programmed path

Less than 1°

Fig. 4-6-2-1-1 Setting the tool compensation

Note 1: During setting the tool compensation, without specifying the compensation number or the tool
compensation number is 0, #036 alarm occurs.
Note 2: During setting the tool compensation, it requires G0 or G1 to be executed; if the circular is
commanded, #036 alarm occurs.

85
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

2. Executing the tool compensation

After setting the tool compensation, the offset path before cancelling the tool compensation is
called executing the tool compensation.
About the details of the tool compensation, it is shown in Fig.4-6-2-1-2 and 4-6-2-1-3:

(a) Tool movement around the inside of a corner（α≥180°）

Straight line---- straight line Straight line----arc

α α

Programmed path
一

S
L
S Programmed
C
Tool center
Programming

intersection
path
L path L Intersection
Tool center path

Arc---Straight line Arc---arc

α α

Programmed path

S L Tool center path

S C
c Intersection
L intersection Programmed
Tool center path path
Appendix

86
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

（i）Straight line---straight line

（Ⅴ）Inside machining is less than 1° and
compensation vector is magnified.

s
Tool center path

r
Compensation vector

Programmed path
r

s
Consider the following
situations through the

一
same method:
（ii）Arc--- straight line

Programming
（iii）Straight line---Arc
（iv）Arc---Arc

(b) Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle （180°＞α≥90°）

（iii）Arc---straight line （iv）Arc---arc

a
a
C Programmed path C r
r
r
r L
Tool nose center path Programmed path
L S L
S L
Tool nose center path

(c) Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle（α＜90°)

87
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

（ii）Straight line--- arc

（i）Straight line---straight line

L
L
S G42 S G42

L L
a Programmed path a

r L r
L
Tool nose center path
S L
S L Programmed
Tool nose
path
一

center path
Programming

Fig. 4-6-2-1-2 executing tool compensation

（d）Special situations
Appendix

1） W ithou t inte rsec tion

In left f igu re , w hen t he
A la rm and sto p
ra diu s v alu e is sm all,
W hen com pens ation C e nter of arc B there e xis ts inters ection in
com pen sation p ath of a rc;
W hen com pens ation value is big. C ente r of arc A
value is sm all. while th e radiu s ch ange s

ｒ ｒ bigg er, p erhap s t he

P rog ram m ed p ath inte rs ec tion does not exist

P
and the sy stem a larm s
A B (P /S 3 3).

88
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

2) The center of arc is identical with the start position or the end position

Tool path When the tool radius is too big,

the start or finish point
of arc coincides with the
center of a cycle. The system
Programmed path alarms P/S38, and the programs
are shown as below:
G01 W20；
G02 U30 W15 R15；
G01 W20；

一
Fig. 4-6-2-1-3 executing tool compensation ②

Programming
3. Cancelling the tool compensation

In the compensation mode, the block can satisfy any conditions as below, the system enters the
compensation cancel mode, and the movement of block is called cancelling tool compensation.
(a) Use code G40, C tool compensation is cancelled, and during the execution of tool compensation
cancel, the circular codes (G02 and G03) are not allowed to use; otherwise, it alarms (NO.34)
and the tool stops.
(b) The tool radius compensation number is specified to 0.

The details of tool compensation cancel are shown in the following figures:

(a) Tool movement around the inside of a corner（α≥180°）

(i) Straight line---straight line （ii）Arc---straight line

α α

Programmed path
r：Compensation value r
Tool center path G40 G40
C
L S S
L L
Programmed path

(b) Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle（180°＞α≥90°）

89
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

(i) Straight line---straight line （ ii） A rc---straight line

G40
α
G40
α L
r
Programmed path L
r C S
L
S Program med
Tool center path To ol ce nter path
path

（c）Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle （α＜90°)

一

（i）Straight line---straight line （ii）Arc---straight line

L
Programming

L G42 S
G42 S L
L r
r α
α
Programmed path L
L
L
Tool nose center path L Programmed
path Tool center path

（d）Tool movement around the outside linear→linear at an acute angle less than 1 degree
（α＜1°).

L
S To ol cen te r pa th
Appendix

L
r P r og ra mm e d p a th
G4 2
α >1°
G 40

Fig. 4-6-2-1-4 Cancel tool compensation

4.6.2.2 Change Compensation Direction in the Tool Compensation

Tool radius compensation G codes (G41 and G42) determine the direction of compensation;
signs of compensation amount are as below:
Table 4-6-2-2-1
Sign
+ -
G code
G41 Left side compensation Right side compensation
G42 Right side compensation Left side compensation

90
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

In the special situation, the direction can be changed in the compensation mode, but it’s not allowed
to change at the block beginning. Once the compensation direction changes, the concept of inside
and outside doesn’t exit. Assume the following compensation amount as the positive.

（i） Straight line---straight line （ii）Straight line---arc

S
L C
G42
ｒ
ｒ Programmed path ｒ G41
G41
Programmed path L ｒ G42

L S
Tool center path
Tool center path

一
（iii）Arc---straight line （iv）Arc---arc
G42

Programming
Tool center path G 42 Tool center path
ｒ L C
G41 ｒ
ｒ
C ｒ
C Programmed
Programmed path G41
S path
S

Fig. 4-6-2-2-1 Change in compensation direction during tool compensation

If compensation is executed normally without an intersection, G41 and G42 change the offset
direction from block A to B. If the intersection of offset path is not required, the start point of block B
is vertical to the vector of block B.

i ) Linear----linear

Fig. 4-6-2-2-2 Linear----linear

91
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

ii ) Linear----circular

Fig. 4-6-2-2-3 Linear----circular, without intersection (change the compensation direction)

一

4.6.2.3 Cancel Tool Compensation Temporarily

Programming

In the compensation mode, if the following codes are specified, the compensation vector will be
cancelled temporarily. Then, the compensation vector will automatically recover. Then, it is
different from the compensation cancel mode, the tool can directly move from the intersection to
the code point of cancelling compensation vector. After the compensation mode recovers, the tool
moves to the intersection directly.
1. Setting a coordinate system（G50）

N1 T0101；
N2 G42 G00 X0 Z0；
N3 G01 U-30 W30；
N4 U30 W30；
N5 G50 X0 Z60；
N6 G01 U-30 W30；
N7 G01 U30 W30；
Appendix

N8 G00 X0 Z0；
N8 M30；

S（Intersection）
S (Intersection）

r L
r
L L

N9
Tool center path N5 N6 SS N8

Programmed path N7 G50 block

Fig. 4-6-2-3-1 Cancel the tool compensation temporarily①

Note: SS represents the point which the tool stops two times in a single block

2. G90, G92 and G94 fixed cycle, G71~G76 fixed cycle, thread codes G32/G33/G34.

92
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Fig. 4-6-2-3-2 Cancel tool compensation temporarily②

N1 T0101

一
N2 G0 X100 Z100
N3 G0 X0 Z0

Programming
N4 G42 G90 X-20 W-50 F500 （Cancel the tool compensation temporarily）
N5 G0 X50 Z50 （Recover the tool compensation）
N6 G0 X100 Z100
N7 M30
Note: G90/G94 tool compensation cancel temporarily will realize only when G41/G42 shares with the
same block of G90/G94; otherwise, the system will automatically process G90/G94 as the normal
tool offset compensation. About the details, refer to G90/G94 tool nose radius compensation.

4.6.2.4 Non-Movement Codes in Tool Compensation

1. Non-movement codes at the beginning of compensation

If the tool doesn’t move at the beginning of compensation, the vector of compensation is not be
created.

N1 T0101；
N2 G0 X0 Z0；
N3 G01 U-30 W20 F500；
N4 G42 U0；
N5 U30；
N6 U20 W20；
N7 G40 G0 X100 Z100；
N8 M30；

Fig. 4-6-2-4-1 Non-movement codes at the beginning of the tool compensation

2. Non-movement codes in the compensation mode

In the compensation mode, when only one block free of the tool movement is commanded,
the vector and the tool center path are same as those of the block which isn’t commanded.
(refer to Section 4.6.2.1, executing tool compensation. The block without the tool movement
is executed at the stop point of single block.

93
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

N3 T0101；
N4 G0 X100 Z100；
N5 G41 G01 X0 Z0；
N6 U-30 W20；
N7 G04 X5；
N8 W30；
N9 G40 G0 X100 Z100；
N10 M30；
Fig. 4-6-2-4-2 Non-movement codes during tool compensation

3. Non-movement codes during cancelling compensation

When the block, which is commanded with the block of cancelling compensation, is free of the
tool movement, it will form the length as the compensation amount. The direction is vertical to
一

the vector of the movement direction in the former block, and the vector will be cancelled in
the next movement code.
Programming

N3 T0101；
N4 G0 X100 Z100；
N5 G41 G01 X0 Z0 F500；
N6 U-30 W20；
N7 G04；
N8 G0 X100 Z100；
N9 M30；
Fig. 4-6-2-4-3 Non-movement codes during cancelling tool compensation

4.6.2.5 Tool Compensation Interference Check

The tool overcut is called as “interference”. The interference check of tool compensation can
check the situation of tool overcut in advance, that is to say, even if the overcut does not occur, the
Appendix

system also checks the interference.

(a) Basic conditions of interference
(1) The path direction of tool and that of program are different. (The angle between paths is
between 90°and 270°.)
(2) During machining the circular, besides the above condition, the angle between the start
position and the end position in the center of tool path has big difference with that of
start position and end position in the programmed path (More than 180°).
Example ①

Fig. 4-6-2-5-1 Tool compensation interference ①

94
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Fig. 4-6-2-5-2 Tool compensation interference ②

(b) Interference example

一
(1) One smaller depth is less than compensation amount.

Programming
Fig. 4-6-2-5-3 Tool compensation interference example ①
Program:

N1 T0101； (R<=10)
N2 G0 X0 Z30；
N3 G42 G01 X50 Z0 F500；
N4 U50；
N5 W20；
N6 U10；
N7 W20；
N8 U-10；
N9 W20；
N10 G40 G0 X0 Z30；
N11 M30；

In the above programs, the tool nose radius compensation value of #01 tool is R<=10; when
R>10, the system will alarm the interference because the program direction in block B is
opposite with that of the tool radius compensation.

(2) Concave depth is less than the compensation amount.

95
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-6-2-5-4 Tool compensation interference example②

Program :
N1 T0101； (R<=25)
一

N2 G0 X0 Z30；
N3 G42 G01 X50 Z0 F500；
Programming

N4 U50；
N5 W20；
N6 U10 W10；
N7 U-10 W10；
N8 W20；
N9 G40 G0 X0 Z30；
N10 M30；

In the above programs, the tool nose radius compensation value of #01 tool is R<=25; when
R>25, the system will alarm the interference because the program direction of block c is
opposite with that of the tool radius compensation path.

4.6.2.6 Tool Nose Radius Compensation in G90/G94

1. About each cycle path, the tool nose center path is generally parallel with the programmed
Appendix

path.

① G90

Fig. 4-6-2-6-1 G90 tool nose radius compensation

② G94

96
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Fig. 4-6-2-6-2 G94 tool nose radius compensation

Programming
(b) G41 or G42 mode is used, and the offset direction is shown below.

Fig. 4-6-2-6-3 G90/G94 Tool nose radius compensation

4.6.2.7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation in G70

In the finishing cycle (G70), the system can realize the tool nose radius compensation, and the tool
center path moves along with the finishing path and automatically offsets one compensation value. To
realize G70 tool nose radius compensation, G70 can share with G41/G42 for execution or specify
G41/G42 in finishing cycle block.

4.6.3 Notes for Tool Compensation C

1. When the system continuously specifies 30 or more non-movement codes in compensation, an

alarm occurs. For example:

97
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

N1 M05 ；................................................ M code output

N2 S21 ；................................................. S code output
N3 G04 X10 ；....................................….. Dwell
……
N29 G01 U0 ；............................................. Movement distance 0
N30 G98 ；................................................... Only G code.
2. In MDI mode, it executes the block rather than the tool nose radius compensation.
3. After power on or executing M30, the system enters the cancel mode at once. The program
must end in the cancel mode. Otherwise, the tool can not position at the end position, the tool
will stop in the position keeping a vector distance from the end position.
4. For setting and cancelling the tool nose radius compensation, only G00 or G01 code can be
一

used rather than the circular codes (G02 or G03); otherwise, it will alarm (NO.34).
5. Before calling the subprogram, namely, before executing M98, the system must be in the
Programming

compensation cancel mode. After entering the subprogram, the offset can start, but it must be
in the compensation cancel mode before returning the main program (before M99); otherwise,
an alarm occurs.
6. If the compensation value (R) is negative, G41 and G42 interchange in the program. If the tool
center moves along the outside of work piece, the tool compensation will move along with the
inside, vise versa. Because the compensation value code changes, the tool nose offset
direction also changes, but the assumed tool nose direction remains unchanged. Do not
change at random.
7. Generally, in compensation cancel mode or tool change, the compensation value should be
changed. If the value is rewritten in the compensation mode, only new compensation value is
valid after tool change.
8. When the tool compensation programs are executed, mistake or alarm occurs due to some
Appendix

reasons; while G codes remain same, for example, G41 is still G41, G42 is G42; if it requires
cancelling the tool compensation, it can input G40 to run in MDI mode, then the tool
compensation can be cancelled.

4.6.4 Machining Examples of Tool Compensation C

Tool compensation C example①：

Machine the parts shown in the following Fig. 4-6-4-1, the part dimension is shown in the figure,
the radius of tool nose R=1, and it is the first tool.

98
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

一
Programming
Fig. 4-6-4-1 Tool compensation C example ①

Program:
O0001；
N010 G0 X100.0 Z100.0； （Position to a safety position）
N020 M3 S300； （Spindle rotates CCW, speed:300r/min）
N030 M8； （Cooling ON）
N040 T0101； （Change No.1 tool and execute its tool compensation）
N050 G00 X10.0 Z10.0； （Rapid position, approach to the work piece）
N060 G42 G1 Z0 F80； （Start to execute the tool nose radius compensation）
N070 G3 X30 Z-10 R10；
N080 G1 Z-17.639；
N090 G2 X32.111 Z-22.111 R10；
N100 G1 X33.803 Z-23.803；
N110 G3 X35.914 Z-28.275 R14；
N120 G1 Z-35；
N130 X50；
N140 G40 G0 X80 Z80； （Cancel the tool nose radius compensation）
N150 M09； （Cooling OFF）
N160 G00 X100.0 Z100.0 T0200； （Rapid return to the safety position, change the referebce
tool and clear the tool offset）
N170 M30； （Program end）

Tool compensation C example②：

Machine the parts which are shown in Fig. 4-6-4- 2, the part dimension is shown in the figure, the
radius of tool nose R=1, and it is the first tool.

99
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Fig. 4-6-4-2 Tool compensation C example②

O0002
NI G0 X100 Z100；
N2 M3 S800；
N3 M8；
N4 T0202；
N5 G0 X70 Z10；
N6 G71 U3 R1；
N7 G71 P8 Q14 U0 W0 F120；
Appendix

N8 G0 X10；
N9 G1 Z-10 F80；
N10 G02 X30 W-10 R10；
N11 G1 X38；
N12 Z-30；
N13 G02 X48 W-5 R5；
N14 G1 X60；
N15 G0 X100 Z80；
N16 M3 S300；
N17 T0101；
N18 G0 X70 Z10；
N19 G42 G70 P8 Q14； (G42 and G70 share the same block to execute the tool nose radius
compensation)
N20 G40 G0 X80 Z50； (Cancel the tool nose radius compensation)
N21 G0 X100 Z100 T0200；
N22 M30；

100
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Tool compensation C example③：

Machine the parts shown in Fig. 4-6-4-3 , the part dimension is shown in Fig. 4-6-4-3, the radius of
tool nose R=1, and it is the first tool.

一
Programming
Fig. 4-6-4-3 Tool compensation C example ③

O0003
N1 G0 X100 Z100；
N2 M3 S800；
N3 M8；
N4 T0101；
N5 G42 G0 X70 Z10； （Start to execute tool nose radius compensation）
N6 G90 X45 Z-30 R-5 F80；
N7 G40 G0 X80 Z80； (Cancel tool nose radius compensation)
N8 G0 X100 Z100 T0100；
N9 M30；

4.7 Macro Function G Code

4.7.1 User Macro Program

Some function which is achieved by one group of codes can store in the memorizer in advance,
and one code represents these functions. In the programs, as long as the representative codes are
written, these functions can be realized. This group of codes is called as the user macro body, and
the representative codes are called as “the user macro code”. The user macro body sometimes is
abbreviated as the macro. And the user macro code is also called as the macro calling code.

101
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 4-7-1-1
Variables can be used in custom macro body. Operation can be performed between them and
they can be assigned values by macro codes.
一

4.7.2 Macro Variable

Programming

In the user macro, the normal CNC codes can be used, and the variable, calculation and transfer
codes can also be used.
The user macro the program starts with a program, and ends with M99.

Appendix

Fig. 4-7-2-1 （composition of user macro program body）

1. The usage methods of variables:

The variable can code the parameter value of the user macro body. The variable value can be
set by the main program assignment or by LCD/MDI , or assign the count value during executing the
user macro body.
Many variables can be used and they are differed by variable numbers.
(1) Expression of variables
The variable number behind # can indicate the variable, the format is shown below:
#i (i = 1， 2， 3， 4 ……)
(Example) #5， #109， #1005
(2) Quotation of variables

102
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Variables can replace the numerical values after the address.

(Example) F#103 #103 = 15: it is the same with F15.
G#130 #130 = 3: it is the same with G3.
Note 1: Address O and N can not quote the variable. O#200 and N#200 can not be used for
programming.
Note 2: If it exceeds the maximum code value specified by the address, it can not be used. When
#30=120, M#30 exceeds the max code value
Note 3: Display and setting the variable value: the variable value can display on LCD screen, the
variable value can also be set by keys.

2. Variable types
According to the different variable numbers, the variables can be differed from the common and
the system variables, and their purposes and characteristics are different.
（1）Null variable#0： (the variable is always null and no value is assigned to the variable)

一
（2）Local variables #1～#50：They can only be used for data storage in a macro, such as the
results of operations. whether the local variables are cleared or not after reset is set by bit

Programming
parameter NO:52#7. When a macro program is called, arguments are assigned to local
variables.
（3）Common variable #100～#199，#500～#999：whether to clear the common variables
#100～#199 is set by NO：52#6 after reset or emergency stop.
The common variable is common in the main program and in each user macro called by the main
program, that is to say, variable #i used by some user macro and #i used by other macro programs
are same. Therefore, the common variable #i of calculation result in some macro can be also used in
other macro programs.
The purpose of the common variable, which is not stipulated in the system, can be freely used by
the user.

Table 4-7-2-1

Variable number Variable type Function

＃100～＃199 They are cleared at power-off, and all are
initialized to “null” at power-on
Common
＃500～＃999 variables Data is saved in files and it will not be lost
even if the power is turned off.

（4）System variables: They are used for reading and writing a variety of CNC data, which are
shown below:
1） Interface input signal #1000 --- #1015 (read signal input to system from PLC by bit, i.e. G
signal)
#1032 (read signal input to system from PLC by byte, i.e., G signal)
2） Interface output signal #1100 --- #1115 (write signal output to PLC from the system by bit,
i.e. F signal)
#1132 (write signal output to PLC from the system by byte, i.e. F
signal)
3） Tool length compensation value #1500 --- #1755 (read-write)
4） Length wear compensation value #1800 --- #2055 (read-write)
5） Tool radius compensation value #2100 --- #2355 (read-write)

103
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

6） Radius wear compensation value #2400 --- #2655 (read-write)

7） Alarm #3000
8） User data table #3500 --- #3755 (read only, must not write)
9） Modal message #4000 --- #4030 (read only, must not write)
10） Position message #5001 --- #5030 (read only, must not write)
11） Workpiece zero offset amount #5201 --- #5235 (read-write)
12） Additional workpiece coordinate #7001 --- #7250 (read-write)

3．Explanation for system variables

1）Modal message

Table 4-7-2-2

No. Function Group

一

#4000 G04,G28,G31,G50,G65,G70,G71,G72,G73,G74,G75,G76 Group 00

#4001 G00,G01,G02,G03,G32,G34,G90,G92,G94 Group 01
#4002 G96,G97 Group 02
Programming

#4003 To extend Group 03

#4004 To extend Group 04
#4005 G98，G99 Group 05
#4006 G20,G21 Group 06
#4007 G40,G41,G42 Group 07
#4008 To extend Group 08
#4009 To extend Group 09
#4010 To extend Group 10
#4011 To extend Group 11
#4012 To extend Group 12
#4013 To extend Group 13
#4014 G54,G55,G56,G57，G58,G59 Group 14
#4015 To extend Group 15
#4016 G17,G18,G19 Group 16
#4017 To extend Group 17
#4018 To extend Group 18
#4019 To extend Group 19
Appendix

#4020 To extend Group 20

#4021 To extend Group 21
#4022 D
#4023 H
#4024 F
#4025 M
#4026 S
#4027 T
#4028 N
#4029 O
#4030 P(currently selected additional workpiece coordinate system)

Note 1: P code indicates the current selected additional workpiece coordinate system.
Note 2: When G#4002 code is being executed, the value obtained in #4002 is 17, 18 or 19.
Note 3: The modal message can be read but not written.

2）Current position message

Table 4-7-2-3
Relative Reading Tool offset
Position message
Variable coordinate operation value
104
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

number system during

moving
#5001 X block end position (ABSIO) Tool nose
#5002 Y block end position (ABSIO) position not
Workpiece involved
#5003 Z block end position (ABSIO)
coordinate allowed
#5004 The 4th axis block end position (ABSIO) （Position
system
instructed by
program）
#5006 X block end position (ABSMT)
Machine
#5007 Y block end position (ABSMT)
coordinate
#5008 Z block end position (ABSMT)
system
#5009 The 4th axis block end position (ABSMT) Tool reference
unallowed
#5011 X block end position (ABSOT) Position
#5012 Y block end position (ABSOT) involved
#5013 Z block end position (ABSOT) （Machine
Workpiece
#5014 The 4th axis block end position (ABSOT) coordinate）

一
coordinate
#5016 X block end position (ABSKP)
system
#5017 Y block end position (ABSKP)
allowed

Programming
#5018 Z block end position (ABSKP)
#5019 The 4th axis block end position (ABSKP)
#5021 X tool length compensation value
#5022 Y tool length compensation value
#5023 Z tool length compensation value
#5024 The 4th axis block end position
unallowed
#5026 X servo position compensation
#5027 Y servo position compensation
#5028 Z servo position compensation
#5029 The 4th axis servo position compensation

Note 1: ABSIO: The end point coordinates of the last block in workpiece coordinate system.
Note 2: ABSMT:The current machine coordinate system position in machine coordinate system.
Note 3: ABSOT:The current coordinate position in workpiece coordinate system.
Note 4: ABSKP:The effective position of the skip signal of block G31 in workpiece coordinate system.

3）Workpiece zero offset value and additional zero offset value：

Table 4-7-2-4
Variable
Function
number
#5201 External workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#5204 External workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#5206 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#5209 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#5211 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#5214 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#5216 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#5219 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#5221 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#5224 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#5226 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#5229 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#5231 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis

105
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

… …
#5234 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#7001 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#7004 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#7006 G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#7009 G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis
#7246 G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of 1st axis
… …
#7249 G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of 4th axis

4．Local variables

The correspondence relationship between address and local variable:：

一

Table 4-7-2-5
Argument Local variable
Programming

Argument address Local variable No.

address No.
A #1 Q #17
B #2 R #18
C #3 S #19
I #4 T #20
J #5 U #21
K #6 V #22
D #7 W #23
E #8 X #24
F #9 Y #25
M #13 Z #26

Note 1: The assignment is done by an English letter followed by a numerical value. Except letters G, L, O, N,
H and P, all the other 20 letters can assign values for arguments. Each letter from A-B-C-D… to X－Y－
Z can assign a value once and the assignment needs not to be performed in alphabetical order. The
addresses that assign no values can be omitted.
Note 2: G65 must be specified before any argument is used.
Appendix

5．Notes for custom macro body

1) Input by keys
Press key # behind the parameter words G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S, T, P, Q for inputting
“#”.
2) Either operation or transfer code can be specified in MDI mode.
3) H, P, Q, R of the operation and transfer codes preceding or behind G65 are all used as
parameters for G65.
H02 G65 P#100 Q#101 R#102 ; Correct
N100 G65 H01 P#100 Q10 ; Correct
4) Variable range: the input figure is no more than 7-digit and the result is no more than 8-digit no
matter negative or positive.
5) The result of the variable operation can be a decimal fraction with a precision of 0.0001. All
operations, except H11 (OR operation), H12 (AND operation), H13 (NOT operation), H23
(ROUNDING operation) with decimal portions neglected in operation, are done without the
decimal portions abnegated.
Example:
#100 ＝ 35， #101 ＝ 10， #102 ＝ 5
#110 ＝ #100÷#101 (＝3.5)
#111 ＝ #110×#102 (＝17.5)

106
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

#120 ＝ #100×#102 (＝175)

#121 ＝ #120÷#101 (＝17.5)
6) The execution time of operation and transfer code differs depending on different conditions.
The average time is usually 10ms.
7) When the variable value is not defined, the variable becomes “null”. When the variable #0 is
always null, it is only read instead of being written.
a. Quotation
When an undefined variable is referred, the address itself is ignored.
For example:
When the variable #1 value is 0，and the variable #2 value is null, G00X#1 Y#2 execution
result is G00X0；
b. Operation
Except for using <Null> assigns, <Null> in other conditions is the same that of 0.
Table 4-7-2-6
#1=<vacant> #1=0

一
#2=#1 #2=#1
↓ ↓

Programming
#2=<空> #2=0
#2=#1*5 #2=#1*5
↓ ↓
#2=0 #2=0
#2=#1+#1 #2=#1+#1
↓ ↓
#2=0 #2=0

c. Conditional expression
<Null > in EQ and NE are different from 0.
Table 4-7-2-7
#1=< vacant > #1=0
#1 EQ #0 #1 EQ #0
↓ ↓
Established Not established
#1 NE #0 #1 NE #0
↓ ↓
Not established Established
#1 GE #0 #1 GE #0
↓ ↓
Established Established
#1 GT #0 #1 GT #0
↓ ↓
Not established Not established

107
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一

Fig. 4-7-2-2
Programming

When the variable value is null, the variable is null.

4.7.3 Non-Modal Call G65

When G65 is specified, the user macro specified by address P is called, and the data is transferred to
the user macro body by arguments.

Format：

G65 P □□□□□L□□□□ < argument specification >；

Calling times
Program number of called user macro body

Behind G65 code, P is used to specify custom macro number, L is used to specify custom macro
Appendix

calling times, and the arguments are used to transfer data to custom macro.
If repetition is needed, specify the number of repeats behind L code from 1-9999; if L is omitted,
the default time is 1.
If it is specified by arguments, the values will be assigned to the corresponding local variables.

Note 1: If the subprogram number specified by address P is not retrieved, an alarm (PS 078) is issued.
Note 2: No. 90000~99999 subprograms are the system reserved programs, if such subprograms are called,
they can be executed, but the cursor will keep staying at block N65 and the program page displays
the main program all the time. (The subprogram can be displayed by setting bit parameter No: 27#4)
Note 3: Up to five macro calls are nested.

4.7.4 User Macro Program Function A

1．General format：
G65 Hm P#i Q#j R#k ；
m： 01～99 indicate functions of operation code or transfer code
#i： Variable name for saving the operation result.
#j: Variable name 1 for operation, or a constant which is expressed directly without #.
#k: Variable name 2 for operation，or a constant.

108
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Meaning： #i = #j ○ #k
└───────Operation sign, specified by Hm

(Example) P#100 Q#101 R#102……#100 = #101 ○ #102 ；

P#100 Q#101 R15 ……#100 = #101 ○ 15 ；
P#100 Q-100 R#102……#100 = -100 ○ #102
H code specified by G65 has no effect on the offset selection.
G code H code Function Definition
G65 H01 Value assignment #i ＝ #j
G65 H02 Addition #i ＝ #j + #k
G65 H03 Subtraction #i ＝ #j - #k
G65 H04 Multiplication #i ＝ #j × #k
G65 H05 Division #i ＝ #j ÷ #k

一
G65 H11 Logic addition (OR) #i ＝ #j OR #k
Logic multiplication
G65 H12 #i ＝ #j AND #k

Programming
(AND)
G65 H13 Exclusive OR #i ＝ #j XOR #k
G65 H21 Square root #i = # j

G65 H22 Absolute value #i ＝| # j |

G65 H23 Complement #i＝#j-trunc(#j ÷ #k)×#k
Compound
G65 H26 multiplication and #i ＝ (#i × #j) ÷ #k
division operation
Compound square
G65 H27 #i = # j + # k
2 2
root
G65 H31 Sine #i ＝ #j×SIN(#k)
G65 H32 Cosine #i ＝ #j×COS(#k)
G65 H33 Tangent #i ＝ #j×TAN(#k)
G65 H34 Arc tangent #i ＝ ATAN(#j/#k)
G65 H80 Unconditional transfer GOTO N
G65 H81 Conditional transfer 1 IF #j ＝ #k， GOTO N
G65 H82 Conditional transfer 2 IF #j ＝ #k， GOTO N
G65 H83 Conditional transfer 3 IF #j ＞ #k， GOTO N
G65 H84 Conditional transfer 4 IF #j ＜ #k， GOTO N
G65 H85 Conditional transfer 5 IF #j ＞ #k， GOTO N
G65 H86 Conditional transfer 6 IF #j ＜ #k， GOTO N
G65 H89 Alarm
Table 4-7-4-1

2．Operation code：
1）Variable assignment：# I = # J
G65 H01 P#I Q#J；
（Example）G65 H01 P#101 Q1005； （#101 = 1005）
G65 H01 P#101 Q#110； （#101 = #110）
G65 H01 P#101 Q-#102； （#101 = -#102）

2）Additive operation：# I = # J+# K

109
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

G65 H02 P#I Q#J R#K；

（Example）G65 H02 P#101 Q#102 R15； （#101 = #102+15）

3）Subtraction operation：# I = # J- #K
G65 H03 P#I Q#J R# K；
（Example）G65 H03 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102-#103）

4）Multiplication operation：# I = # J×# K

G65 H04 P#I Q#J R#K；
（Example）G65 H04 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102×#103）

5）Division operation：# I = # J÷# K

G65 H05 P#I Q#J R#K；
（Example）G65 H05 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102÷#103）
一

6）Logic add（or）：# I = # J.OR. # K

Programming

G65 H11 P#I Q#J R#K；

（Example）G65 H11 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102.OR. #103）

7）Logic multiply（and）：# I = # J.AND. # K

G65 H12 P#I Q#J R#K；
（Example）G65 H12 P# 101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102.AND.#103）

8）XOR(Exclusive OR)：# I = # J.XOR. # K

G65 H13 P#I Q#J R#K；
（Example）G65 H13 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102.XOR. #103）
9）Square root: # I = #J
G65 H21 P#I Q#J ；
（Example）G65 H21 P#101 Q#102 ； （#101 = #202 ）
Appendix

10）Absolute value：# I = | # J |
G65 H22 P#I Q#J ；
（Example）G65 H22 P#101 Q#102 ； （#101 = | #102 |）

11）Remainder：# I = # J－TRUNC(#J/#K)×# K，TRUNC：rounding the decimal part

G65 H23 P#I Q#J R#K；
（Example）G65 H23 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102- TRUNC (#102/#103)×#103）

12）Composite multiply-divide operation：# I =（# I×# J）÷# K

G65 H26 P#I Q#J R# k；
（Example）G65 H26 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 =（#101×# 102）÷#103）

13）Compound square root: # I = # J 2 +# K 2

G65 H27 P#I Q#J R# k；

14）Sine：# I = # J•SIN（# K）（Unit：°）

G65 H31 P#I Q#J R#K；

110
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

（Example）G65 H31 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102•SIN（#103））

15）Cosine：# I = # J•COS（# K）（Unit：°）

G65 H32 P#I Q#J R# K；
（Example）G65 H32 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 =#102•COS（#103））

16）Tangent：# I = # J•TAN（# K）（Unit：°）

G65 H33 P#I Q#J R# K；
（Example）G65 H33 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 = #102•TAN（#103））

17）Arc tangent：# I = ATAN（# J /# K）（Unit：°）

G65 H34 P#I Q#J R# K；
（Example）G65 H34 P#101 Q#102 R#103； （#101 =ATAN（#102/#103））

一
Note 1: The unit of angular variable is degree.
Note 2: If the required Q and R are not specified in operations above, their values are 0 by default.
Note 3: trunc: rounding operation, the decimal portion is abandoned.

Programming
3．Jump code

1）Unconditional jump
G65 H80 Pn； n：Sequence number
（Example）G65 H80 P120；（jump to N120）

2）Conditional jump1 #J.EQ.# K (＝)

G65 H81 Pn Q#J R# K； n：Sequence number
(Example) G65 H81 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
# 101 = #102: jump to N1000，#101 ≠ #102: programs are executed orderly.

3）Conditional jump 2 #J.NE.# K (≠)

G65 H82 Pn Q#J R# K； n：Sequence number
(Example) G65 H82 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
# 101 ≠ #102: jump to N1000，#101 = #102: programs are executed orderly.

4）Conditional jump 3 #J.GT.# K (＞)

G65 H83 Pn Q#J R# K； n：Sequence number
(Example) G65 H83 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
#101 ＞ #102: jump to N1000，#101 ≤ #102: programs are executed orderly.

5）Conditional jump 4 #J.LT.# K (＜)

G65 H84 Pn Q#J R# K； n：Sequence number
(Example) G65 H84 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
# 101＜#102: jump to N1000，#101 ≥ #102: programs are executed orderly.

6）Conditional jump 5 #J.GE.# K (≥)

G65 H85 Pn Q#J R# K； n：Sequence number
(Example) G65 H85 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
# 101 ≥ #102: jump to N1000，#101＜#102: programs are executed orderly.

111
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

7）Conditional jump 6 #J.LE. # K (≤ )

G65 H86 Pn Q#J R# K； n：Sequence number
(Example) G65 H86 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
# 101≤ #102: jump to N1000，#101＞#102: programs are executed orderly.

Note: The sequence number can be specified by variables. Such as G65 H81 P#100 Q#101 R#102;if the
conditions are satisfied, it goes to the block of which the number is specified by #100.

4．Logic AND, logic OR and logic NOT codes

Example：
G65 H01 P#101 Q3；
G65 H01 P#102 Q5；
一

G65 H11 P#100 Q#101 Q#102；

The binary expression for 5 is 101, for 3 is 011, and the operation result is #100=7;
Programming

G65 H12 P#100 Q#101 Q#102；

The binary expression for 5 is 101, for 3 is 011, and the operation result is #100=1.

5．Macro variable alarm

Example：
G65 H99 P1； Macro variable 3001 alarm
G65 H99 P124； Macro variable 3124 alarm

4.7.5 User Macro Program Function B

1. Arithmetic and logic operation

The operations listed in the following table can be executed on variables. The expressions on the
right of the operation characters can contain constants and/or variables constituted by functions or
Appendix

operation characters. The variables #j and #k in the expression can be replaced by constants. The
values of the variables on the left can also be assigned by an expression.
Table 4-7-5-1 Arithmetic and logic operation
Function Format Remarks
Definition #i = #j
Addition #i = #j + #k;
Subtraction #i = #j - #k;
Multiplication #i = #j * #k;
Division #i = #j / #k;
Sine #i = SIN[#j];
Arcsine #i = ASIN[#j];
Cosine #i = COS[#j]; The angle is specified by degree.
Arc cosine #i = ACOS[#j]; 90°30’ indicates an angle of 90.5°.
Tangent #i = TAN[#j];
Arc tangent #i = ATAN[#j] / [#k];
Square root #i = SQRT[#j];
Absolute value #i = ABS[#j];
Rounding-off #i = ROUND[#j];
Rounding up to an #i = FUP[#j];

112
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

integer
Rounding down to #i = FIX [#j j];
an integer
Natural logarithm #i = LN[#j];
Exponential #i = EXP[#j];
function
OR #i = #j OR #k;
Logic operation is executed by the
Exclusive OR #i = #j XOR #k;
binary system.
AND #i = #j AND #k;
BCD to BIN #i = BIN[#j];
Used for switching with PMC signal
Bin to BCD #i = BCD[#j];

Explanation：
(1) Angle unit
The angle unit of functions SIN，COS，ASIN，ACOS，TAN and ATAN is degree, e.g., 90°30ˊ

一
indicates an angle of 90.5°.

Programming
(2) ARCSIN #i = ASIN [ #j ]
Ranging from -90° to 90°.
When #j is beyond the range from -1 to 1, an alarm occurs.
（3）ARCCOS #i = ACOS [ #j ]
Ranging from 180° to 0°.
When #j is beyond the range from -1 to 1, an alarm occurs.
Variable #j can be replaced by constants.
（4）ARCTAN #i = ATAN [ #j ] / [ #k ]
Specify the lengths of two sides, separated by a slash（/）.
Ranging from 0° to 360°.
[Example] When #1 = ATAN [ -1 ] / [ -1 ]; is executed, #1=225°.
Variable #j can be replaced by constants.
（5）Natural logarithm #i = LN [ #j ]
When antilog (# j) is 0 or smaller, an alarm occurs.
Variable #j can be replaced by constants.
（6）Exponential function #i = EXP [ #j ]
When the operation result exceeds 99997.453535 (j is about 11.5129), an overflow occurs
and an alarm is issued.
(7) ROUND（rounding-off）function
The round function rounds off at the first decimal place.
Example:
When #1=ROUND[#2]; is executed where #2 holds 1.2345, the value of variable #1 is 1.0.

（8）Rounding up and down to an integer

When the value operation is processed by CNC, if the absolute value of the integer
produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number,
such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer. If the absolute value of the integer
produced by an operation on a number is smaller than the absolute value of the original number,
such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer. Please be careful when handling
negative numbers.
Example:

113
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Suppose that #1=1.2，#2=－1.2.

When #3=FUP[#1] is executed, 2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#1] is executed, 1.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FUP[#2] is executed, -2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#2] is executed, -1.0 is assigned to #3.

（9）Abbreviations of the arithmetic and logic codes.

When a function is specified in a program, the first two characters of the function name can
be used to specify the function. (See Table 4-10-5-1）
Example：
ROUND→RO
FIX→FI
一

（10）Operation sequence

① Function
Programming

② Multiplication and division operation（* / AND）

③ Addition and subtraction operation（+ - OR XOR）
Example) #1 = #2 + #3 * SIN[#4] ;

3
1 , 2 and 3 indicate the operation sequence.

（11）Restrictions

Brackets [, ] are used to enclose an expression.

When a divisor of 0 is specified in a division or TAN[90], an alarm is given.
Appendix

2. Jump and loop

1）Jump and loop

In the program, GOTO statement and IF statement are used to change the control flow. There
are three types of jump and loop operations:

Jump and cycle GOTO statement（unconditional jump）

IF statement（conditional jump：
IF…THEN…）
WHILE statement（When… loop is
performed）

2）Unconditional jump
¾ GOTO statement
Jump to the block with sequence number n. The sequence number can be specified by an
expression.

GOTOn; n: Sequence number（1 to 99999）

114
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

Example：
GOTO 1；
GOTO #10；

3）Conditional jump（IF statement) [<conditional expression >]

IF[<conditional expression >]GOTO n

If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, the system transfers to the block with
sequence number n; if the specified conditional expression is not satisfied, the next block is executed.

If the value of a variable is greater than 10, the system jumps to

the block with sequence number N2.
If the condition is
IF [#1 GT 10] GOTO 2 ;
not satisfied,

一
If the condition is
Program satisfied,

Programming
N2 G00 G91 X10.0 ;
:
IF[<conditional expression>]THEN

If the conditional expression is satisfied, a predetermined macro statement is executed. Only a

single macro statement is executed.

If the values of #1 and #2 are the same，0 is assigned to #3.

IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN #3=0;

Explanation:
¾ Conditional expression
A conditional expression must include an operator, which is inserted between two variables or
between a variable and a constant, and must be enclosed with brackets （[ ，]）. An expression can
replace a variable.
¾ Operator
Operators each consists of two letters are used to compare two values to determine whether
they are equal or one is greater or smaller than the other one.

Table 4-7-5-2 Operators

Operator Meaning
EQ Equal to（=）
NE Not equal to ≠）
GT Greater than（>）
GE Greater than or equal to（≥）
LT Smaller than（<）
LE Smaller than or equal to（≤）

¾ Typical program
The program below calculates the sum of numerical value 1 to 10.

115
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

O9500；
#1=0；
Initial value of the variable to hold the sum
#2=1；
Initial value of the variable as an addend
N1 IF[#1 GE 10]GOTO 2；
Jump to N2 when the addend is greater than or equal to 10
#1=#1+#2；
#1=#2+1； Calculation to find the sum
GOTO 1； The next addend
N2 M30； Traverse to N1
Program end

4）Loop (WHILE statement)

Specify a conditional expression behind WHILE, when the specified condition is satisfied, the
program from DO to END is executed, otherwise, program execution proceeds to the block after
END.
一

WHILE[ conditional expression] DO m ; (m=1,2,3)

If the condition is satisfied

Programming

Program
If the condition is not satisfied

END m ;
:

当 When the specified condition is satisfied, the program from DO to END is executed. Otherwise,
program execution proceeds to the block after END. This kind of command format is applicable to IF
statement. A number after DO and a number after END are the identification numbers for specifying
the range of execution. The identification numbers are 1, 2 and 3. If numbers other than 1, 2 and 3
are used, an alarm occurs.

Explanation:
¾ Nestling
The identification numbers (1 to 3) in the loop from D0 to END can be used repeatedly as
Appendix

required. However, when a program includes crossing repetition loop (overlapped DO ranges), an
alarm occurs.

116
 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function : G Code

1.The identification numbers (1 to 3) 3. DO loops can be nested to 3 levels

can be used as many times as
required.
WHILE[ … ] DO 1;
WHILE[ … ] DO 1;
：

WHILE[ … ] DO 2;
Program ：
WHILE[ … ] DO 3;
END 1 ;
: Program
WHILE[ … ] DO 1;

一
Processing END 3 ;

Programming
END 2 ;
END 1 ;
: END 1 ;

2. The ranges of DO cannot overlap 4. The control can be jumped to

the outside of a loop.

WHILE[ … ] DO 1; WHILE[ … ] DO 1;

IF[…] GOTO n ;
Program

WHILE[ … ] DO 2;
END 1 ;
:

END 1 ; Nn

Program 5. Jump cannot enter the loop area.

END 2 ;
IF […] GOTO n ;
:
WHILE […] DO 1 ；

Nn… ;

END 1 ;

Explanation:
¾ Infinite loop
When DO is specified without specifying WHILE statement, an infinite loop from DO to END is
produced.
¾ Processing time
When a transfer to a sequence number in GOTO statement occurs, the sequence number is

117
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

searched for. Processing in the reverse direction is longer than the one in the forward direction. The
processing time can be reduced by using WHILE statement for repetition.
¾ Undefined variables
In the conditional expression using EQ or NE, <vacant> and zero have different affects. In the
other conditional expressions, <vacant> is taken as 0.
¾ Typical program
The program below calculates the sum of numbers 1 to 10.

O0001 ；
#1=0；
#2=1；
W HILE [#2 LE 10] DO 1;
#1=#1+#2;
#2=#2+1;
END 1;
一

M30;

Notes：
Programming

z When a macro program is called by G65, and F is used for transferring variables. The system
performs call according to the variable value.
z A GOTO statement starts searching at the beginning of the program and searches from the start
again when the corresponding line number is not retrieved. Try not to use the same N code in
one program.
z When the variable number is expressed by a decimal fraction, the system will remove the
decimal part with carry ignored.
z The values of local variables are retained before the main program ends. They are common to
each subprogram.
Appendix

118
 Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code

Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code

The M codes of this machine available for users are listed as follows:

Table 5-1
M code Function
The program ends and returns to the program beginning, the machining
M30
number increases by 1.
M codes The program ends and returns to the program beginning, the machining
M02
used for number increases by 1.
control M98 Subprogram calling
program M99 Subprogram ends and returns/execution is repeated
M00 Program dwell
M01 Program optional dwell
M03 Spindle CCW

一
M04 Spindle CW
M05 Spindle stop
M08 Tool change

Programming
M09 Cooling ON
M10 Cooling OFF
M11 Tailstock retreat
M12 Chuck clamp
M13 Chuck release
M14 Spindle switched from speed control mode into position control mode
M15 Spindle switched from position control mode into speed control mode
M18 Spindle orientation cancel
M codes M19 Spindle orientation
controlled M20 C axis release
by PLC M21 C axis clamp
M26 M26 output（custom）
M27 Close M26 output
M28 Cancel rigid tapping
M29 Code rigid tapping
M35 M35 output（custom）
M36 Close M35 output
M41 Spindle 1st gear
M42 Spindle 2nd gear
M43 Spindle 3rd gear
M44 M44 output（custom）
M45 Close M44 output

When a movement code and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block, they are
simultaneously executed.
When a numerical value is specified behind address M, code signal and strobe signal are sent to
the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on/off these functions. Usually only one M code
can be specified in a block. In some cases, up to three M codes can be specified in a block by setting
bit parameter No.33#7. Some M codes cannot be specified simultaneously because of the
restrictions of the mechanical operation. See the machine manual provided by the tool builder for the
mechanical operation restrictions on simultaneous specification for M codes in one block.

5.1 M codes Controlled by PLC

When an M code controlled by PLC is in the same block with a movement code, they are
simultaneously executed.

119
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

5.1.1 Spindle Rotation CCW/CW（M03, M04）

Code ：M03（M04） Sx x x；
Explanation：
M03：Spindle rotation CCW，
M04：Spindle rotation CW
Sx x x specifies the spindle speed, or the current gear in gear control mode.
Unit: revolution per minute (r/min)
When it is controlled by a frequency converter, Sx x x specifies the actual speed. e.g. S1000
specifies the spindle to rotate at a speed of 1000r/min.

5.1.2 Spindle Stop（M05）

一

Code: M05. When M05 is executed in auto mode, the spindle is stopped, but the speed specified by
S code is retained. The deceleration at spindle stop is set by the machine builder. It is
Programming

usually done by energy consumption brake.

5.1.3 Cooling ON/OFF（M08, M09）

Code：M08，control the cooling ON. M09，control the cooling OFF. When the miscellaneous function
is locked in auto mode, the code is not executed.

5.1.4 Chuck Control（M12、M13）

Code：M12，chuck release. M13，chuck clamp

5.1.5 Spindle Speed/Position Mode Switch (M14, M15)

Appendix

Code：M14，the spindle is switched from speed control mode into position control mode.
M15，the spindle is switched from position control mode into speed control mode.

5.1.6 Spindle Orientation, Spindle Orientation Cancel（M18，M19）

Code: M18，cancel the spindle orientation. M19，the spindle performs orientation, which is used to the
tool change orientation.

5.1.7 C-Axis Releasing, Clamping（M20, M21）

Code: M20，C releases. M21，C clamps.

5.1.8 Spindle Gear Control（M41, M42, M43）

Code: M41，the spindle’s 1st gear. M42，the spindle’s 2nd gear. M43，the spindle 3rd.

120
 Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code

5.2 M Codes Used by Control Program

M codes used by a program are divided into a main program type and macro type. When an M
code used by a program and a movement code are in the same block, the movement code is
executed prior to the M code.

Note
1: M00, M01, M02, M06, M30, M98 and M99 cannot be specified together with other M codes, or an alarm is
issued. When these codes are in the same block with other non-M codes, the non-M codes are executed
prior to the M codes.
2: This kind of M codes include the codes that direct the CNC to perform the internal operation in addition to
sending the M codes themselves to the machine, e.g. the M code to disable the block prereading function.
Moreover, the codes to send the M codes themselves to the machine (without performing the internal
operation) can be specified in the same block.

一
5.2.1 Program End and Return（M30, M02）

Programming
When M30（M02）in the program is executed in auto mode, the auto mode is cancelled. The
blocks following them are not executed and the spindle and cooling are stopped. Meanwhile, the
workpiece machined number increases by 1. Whether the control returns to the beginning of the
program after M30 is executed is set by bit parameter N0:33#4; whether the control returns to the
beginning of the program after M02 is executed is set by bit parameter N0:33#2. If M02 and M03 are
in a subprogram, then the control returns to the program calling the subprogram after they are
executed and proceeds to the following blocks.

5.2.2 Program Dwell（M00）

In Auto running, the automatic operation pauses after a block containing M00 is executed.
Meanwhile, the previous modal information will be saved. The automatic operation is continued by
pressing Cycle Start key, which is equivalent to pressing down key Feed Hold.

5.2.3 Program Optional Stop（M01）

Automatic operation is stopped optionally after a block containing M01 is executed. If the
“Optional Stop” switch is set to ON, M01 is equivalent to M00; if the “Optional Stop” switch is set to
OFF, M01 is ineffective. See OPERATION.

5.2.4 Subprogram Calling（M98）

M98 is used to call a subprogram in a main program. Its format is as follows:

M98 P L
Number of called times
Subprogram number

Fig. 5-2-4-1

121
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

5.2.5 Program End and Return（M99）

Command format:
M99 P

Block number（0001～9999）to be executed after returning to the main

program , the leading zero can be omitted.

Function: After other codes in the current block (in the subprogram) are executed, the system
returns to the main program, and executes the block specified by P. When P is not input, the system
returns to the main program to call the next block following the current subprogram’s M98. When M99
is used to end the main program, the current program is repetitively executed.

1．In auto mode, if M99 is executed at the end of the main program, the control returns to the
一

program beginning to continue automatic operation. Meanwhile, the following blocks are not
to be executed, and the number of the machined workpieces is not accumulated.
Programming

2．If M99 is executed at the end of a subprogram, the control returns to the main program and
proceeds to the next block following the subprogram block.

Appendix

122
 Chapter 6 Spindle Function S Code

Chapter 6 Spindle Function S Code

By using an S code and the numerical values behind it, the code signal can be converted to the
analog signal and then sent to the machine, for controlling the machine spindle. S is a modal value.

6.1 Spindle Analog Control

When the bit parameter NO.1#2 SPT=0, the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage which
is specified by address S and the numerical values behind. See OPERATION in the manual for details.
Command format：S_
Explanation:

一
1. Only one S code can be specified in a block.
2. The spindle speed is specified directly by address S and a numerical value behind it. Unit: r/min.

Programming
e.g. For M3 S300, it means the spindle is rotated at a speed of 300 r/min.
3. If a move code and an S code are specified in the same block, they are executed simultaneously.
4. The spindle speed is controlled by an S code followed by a numerical value.

6.2 Spindle Switch Value Control

When the bit parameter NO.1#2 SPT=1, the spindle speed is controlled by the switch value,
which consists of an address S and a two-digit number behind it.
Three mechanical gears for the spindle are provided when the spindle speed is controlled by the
switch value. For the correspondence between S codes and spindle speed as well as the number of
spindle gears, please see the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
Command format：S01（S1）；
S02（S2）；
S03（S3）；
Explanation:
There are 8 gears in the software at present, and 3 gears in the ladder diagram. When S
codes beyond the codes above are specified, the system displays “Miscellaneous function
being executed”.

6.3 Constant Surface Speed Control G96/G97

Command format：
Constant surface speed control: G96 S_ Surface speed（m/min or inch/min）
Constant surface speed control cancel: G97 S_ Spindle speed（r/min）
Constant surface speed controlled axis G96 P_ P1 X；P2 Y；P3 Z；P4 4th axis

Function: The number following S is used to specify the surface speed (relative speed between tool
and workpiece). The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the
tool position.

Explanation:

123
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

1. G96 is modal. After it is specified, the program enters the constant surface speed control
mode and the specified S value is assumed as a surface speed.
2. G96 code must specify the axis along which constant surface speed control is applied. It
can be cancelled by G97 code.
3. To execute the constant surface speed control, it is necessary to set a workpiece
coordinate system, then the coordinate value at the center of the rotary axis becomes zero.

Z
0
一

Fig. 6-3-1 workpiece coordinate system controlled by constant surface cutting speed
Programming

4. When constant surface speed control is applied, if a spindle speed higher than the value
specified in G 92 S_, it is clamped at the maximum spindle speed. When the power is
switched on, and the maximum spindle speed is not yet set, in G96, S=0 till M3 or M4 appears
in the program.

Spindle speed（rpm)

n
The spindle speed almost coincides
3000
with the surface speed at approx
2800
2600
160mm（radius)
2400
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
Appendix

1200
1000
Surface speed S is
800 600mm/min
600
400
200
0 Radius（mm)
0 20 40 60 80 100120140 160180 200 220240 260 280300

Fig. 6-3-2 Relation between workpiece radius, spindle speed and surface speed

124
 Chapter 6 Spindle Function S Code

5. Surface speed specified in G96 mode:

G96 mode G97 mode

Specify surface speed in

mm/min(inch/min)

G97 instruction

Save the speed, in

mm/min(inch/min)

一
Specified

Programming
Specify
the The specified
spindle spindle speed
speed is used（rpm)

Not specified

The surface speed (mm/min or

inch/min) is converted to the
spindle speed (rpm) .

Instructions other than G96

G96 instruction
Specified
The
specified Specify the
surface surface
speed is speed
used

Not specified

The saved surface speed

mm/min(inch/min) is used . If
there is no saved surface speed,
the speed is assumed as 0.

Fig. 6-3-3

6. G96 relevant parameter setting: bit parameter No.37#2 sets a reference coordinates (0: end
point, 1: current point) to count G96 spindle speed when G0 rapidly positions, bit parameter
No.37#3 sets G96 spindle speed clamped（0：before the spindle override，1：after the spindle
override），bit parameter No.61#0 sets whether to use the constant surface speed control.
Restrictions:

125
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

1. Because the response problem in the servo system may not be considered when the spindle
speed changes, and the constant surface speed is also effective during threading, it is
recommended to cancel the constant surface speed by G97 before threading.
2. In a rapid traverse block specified by G00, the constant surface speed control is not made by
calculating the surface speed by a transient change of the tool position, but is made by
calculating the surface speed based on the position at the end point of the rapid traverse
block, on the condition that cutting is not performed during rapid traverse. Therefore, the
constant surface cutting speed is not used.
3. In flexible tapping, rigid tapping or deep hole rigid tapping, use G97 to cancel the constant
surface cutting speed, otherwise, random teeth or broken screw tap exists.
一
Programming

Appendix

126
 Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code

Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code

The feed functions are used to control the feedrate of the tool. The functions and control modes
are as follows:

7.1 Rapid Traverse

G00 code is used for rapid positioning. The traverse speed is set by data parameters P88~P92. An
override can be applied to the traverse speed by the OVERRIDE adjusting keys on the operator panel,
which are shown as follows:

一
Programming
Fig. 7-1-1 Keys for rapid traverse override

F0 is set by data parameter P93.

The acceleration of rapid positioning (G0) can be set by data parameters P105~123. It can be
properly set depending on the machine and the motor response characteristics.
Note: G00 block, the feedrate code F is invalid even if it is specified. The system performs positioning at the
speed specified by G0 instead.

7.2 Cutting Feedrate

The tool feedrates in linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation(G02，G03) are specified
with the numbers after F code in mm/min. The tool is moved by the programmed feedrate. An
override can be applied to the cutting feedrate using the override keys on the operator panel
(Override range: 0％～ 200%).
In order to prevent mechanical vibration, acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied at the
beginning and the end of the tool movement respectively. The acceleration can be set by data
parameters P125~P128.
The minimum cutting feedrate is set by data parameter P96, and the maximum cutting feedrate
in the forecast mode is set by P97. If it is smaller than the lower limit, the cutting feedrate is clamped
to the lower limit.
The cutting feedrate in auto mode at power-on is set by data parameter P87.
The cutting feedrate can be specified by the following two types:
A) Feed per minute (G94): it is used to specify the feed amount per minute after F code.
B) Feed per revolution (G95): it is used to specify the feed amount per revolution after F code.

7.2.1 Feed per Minute（G98）

Command format: G98 F_

Function: It specifies the tool feed amount per minute. Unit: mm/min or inch/min.
Explanation:

127
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

1. After G98 is specified (in feed per minute mode), the feed amount of the tool per minute is
directly specified by a number after F.
2. G98 is a modal code. Once specified, it remains effective till G99 is specified. The default
at power-on is feed per minute mode.
3. An override from 0% to 200% can be applied to feed per minute with the override keys or
band switch on the operator panel.

7.2.2 Feed per Revolution（G99）

Command format: G99 F_

Function: Feed amount per revolution. Unit: mm/r or inch/r
Explanation:
一

1. This function is unavailable until a spindle encoder is installed on the machine.

2. After specifying G99 (feed per revolution mode), the feed amount of the tool per revolution
Programming

is directly specified by a number after F.

3. G99 is a modal code. Once specified, it keeps effective till G98 is specified. The default
feedrate per revolution during initialization is 0.
4. An override from 0% to 200% can be applied to feed per revolution with the override keys
or band switch on the operator panel.

Note 1：When the spindle speed is low, feedrate fluctuation may occur. The lower the spindle speed is, the
more frequently the feedrate fluctuation occurs.
Note 2：For G99 feed per rev, the system executes its max. speed F500，an alarm occurs when it exceeds
the max. speed.

7.3 Tangential Speed Control

The cutting feed usually controls the speed in the tangential direction of the contour path to make
Appendix

it reach the specified speed value.

Y Y
Start point
FX

End point F
FY

F End point
Start point FY

FX
X X
Linear interpolation Circular interpolation

Fig. 7-3-1

128
 Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code

7.4 Keys for Feedrate Override

The feedrate in MANUAL mode and AUTO mode can be overridden by the override keys on the
operator panel. The override ranges from 0～200%(21 gears with 10% per gear). In AUTO mode, if
the feedrate override is adjusted to zero, the feeding is stopped by the system with 0 cutting override
displayed. The execution is continued if the override is readjusted.

7.5 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration

The system enables the motor to perform acceleration/deceleration control at the beginning and
the end of the movement, which thus obtains a stable start and stop. In addition, the automatic
acceleration/deceleration can also be applied when the moving speed is changed, the speed thus

一
can be changed steadily. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration needs not to be considered during
programming.

Programming
Rapid traverse: Pre-acceleration/deceleration （ 0 : linear type ; 1 : S type ）
Post acceleration/deceleration（0:linear type;1:exponential type）
Cutting feed: Pre-acceleration/deceleration （ 0 : linear type ; 1 : S type ）
Post acceleration/deceleration（0:linear type;1:exponential type）
MANUAL feed: Post acceleration/deceleration（0:linear type;1:exponential type）
(Set the common time constant for each axis by parameters)

Speed

Speed after interpolation

Speed after acceleration/deceleration

Time

Speed
TR: Acceleration/deceleration time constant for
rapid feed
(data parameter 105-124)

Time
TR TR
Rapid feed

speed

TC：Acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting

feed and manual feed
(data parameter 125-128 )

Time
TC TC
Cutting feed/manual feed

Fig. 7-5-1

129
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

7.6 Acceleration/Deceleration at the Corner in a Block

Example: If a block containing only Y movement is followed by a block containing only X

movement, the latter X block accelerates as the former Y block decelerates. The tool path
is as follows:

Y An exact stop instruction is

inserted here.
(2)

Programmed path
Actual tool path
(1)
一

X
Programming

Fig. 7-6-1

If an exact stop code is inserted, the tool is moved along the real line as in the above figure by the
program, otherwise the bigger the cutting feedrate is, or the longer the time constant of the
acceleration/deceleration is, the bigger the arc at the corner is. For circular code, the actual arc radius
of the tool path is smaller than the arc radius specified by the program. The mechanical system
permitting, reduce the acceleration/deceleration time constant as far as possible to minimize the error
at the corner.

Appendix

130
 Chapter 8 Tool Function

Chapter 8 Tool Function

8.1 T Command Format Meaning

By specifying a numerical value (up to 4 digits) following address T, the tools on the machine can
be selected.

Two or more than T codes cannot be in the same block. If no alarm occurs when codes in the
same group are in the same block, the last T code takes effect. Refer to the manual provided by the
tool machine builder for the digits after address T and the corresponding machine operation of T
code.
T code represents the following meanings:

一
T

Programming
Tool offset number

Tool selection number

a) Tool selection

The tool selection is performed by specifying a T code relative to a tool number.

Relationship between a tool selection number and a tool is referred to the machine
manufacture.
b) Tool offset number

It is used to select an offset value relative to an offset number. An offset value is input by
keyboard unit. A corresponding offset number has two offset amount, one of which is used to X and
another of which is used to Z. Refer to Operation, Tool Compensation Display, Modification and
Setting.
Table 8-1-1
Offset amount
Offset number X offset amount Z offset amount
01 0.040 0.020
02 0.060 0.030
03 0 0
.. . .
.. . .
.. . .

When a T code is specified and its offset number is not 00, the tool offset is valid.
When an offset number is 00, the tool offset function is cancelled.
The offset value range is set below:
mm input：-9999.999 mm～9999.999mm

8.2 Tool Offset

Offsetting X, Z is for a programmed path. T code specifies an offset number’s offset value which is
added or subtracted at the end of each block.

131
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Path after offset

（Offset X，Z to compensate it(offset vector))

Programmed path

T code offset command in the block

Fig. 8-2-1

a）Offset vector
一

In the above figure, a vector which offsets X, Z is called an offset vector. A compensation
Programming

takes effect to offset the vector.

b）Offset cancel

When T code’s offset number selects 00, the offset is called. When the cancel is performed at
the end of a block, the offset vector is zero.
N1 G01 U50.0 W100.0 T0202；
N2 W100.0：
N3 U0.0 W50.0 T0200；

Offset path
Path after offset

N3
(Suppose an offset value is given in
Appendix

No. 02 offset number)

N2
Programmed path

N1

(Suppose an offset value is given in No. 02 offset number)

Fig. 8-2-2

8.3 Programming Example

Tool nose offset（Z，X） tool

Tool #1……B（0.120，0.200） 01
Tool #2……C(-0.180，-0.050) 02

132
 Chapter 8 Tool Function

No.2 tool offset value’s path No.1 tool offset value’s path

Fig. 8-3-1 tool offset value compensation example -2

一
(Programming example 1)

Programming
G00 X280.0 Z240.0；
G00 X120.0 Z200.0 T0101；
G01 Z140.0 F30；
X160.0 Z80.0；
G03 X227.7 Z30.0 R53.81；
G00 X280.0 T0100；
#1 tool nose is the same as the program’s programmed path.
（Programming example 2）
Rewrite the example 1 to the #2 tool’s tool nose path is the same as the programmed path.

133
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
一
Programming

Appendix

134
Ⅱ OPERATION

Ⅱ
Operation

135
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

136
 Chapter 1 Operation Panel

Chapter 1 Operation Panel

1.1 Panel Layout

GSK980TC3 series including GSK980TC3-H, GSK980TC3-V separately use horizontal and

verical structure, divided into LCD area, edit keyboard area, soft key functional area and machine
control area, which is shown bellows:

Edit keyboard
LCD display area
area

Machine control
area

Ⅱ
Operation
Soft key
functional area

Fig. 1-1-1 GSK980TC3-H panel

LCD display area

Edit keyboard
area
Soft key
functional area

Machine control
area

Fig. 1-1-2 GSK980TC3-V panel

137
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

1.2 Panel Function Explanation

1.2.1 LCD（Liquid Crystal Display）Display Area

GSK 980TC3-H, GSK980TC3-V use a color 8.4 inch LCD with resolution 800×600.

1.2.2 Editing Keyboard Area

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig.1-2-2-1 GSK980TC3-H editing keyboard area

Appendix

Fig.1-2-2-2 GSK980TC3-V editing keyboard area

The functions of the keys on the editing keyboard area are divided into 10 small areas, which are

138
 Chapter 1 Operation Panel

explained as follows:

No. Designation Explanation

1 Reset key For system reset, feed and output stop
Address
2 For inputting addresses in MDI mode
key
Number
3 For inputting numerical values in MDI mode
key
For Inputting numerical values, addresses or data into the buffer
4 Input key
area; confirming the operation result
Screen By pressing any of the keys, the corresponding page is entered. See
5
operation key chapter 3 for details.
For page switching in the same display mode, and page down/up in
6 Page key
the program
7 Cursor key For moving the cursor in different directions
For moving the cursor to the beginning or the end of a block or a
8 Editing key
program.
9 Search key For searching data and addresses to view and modify
For inserting, modifying or deleting a program or a block during
10 Editing key programming, by using compound keys.

1.2.3 Screen Operation Keys

Ⅱ
There are 8 display keys for operation pages and 1 display key for the help page on the panel in this
system. See the figure below:

Operation
Graphic page Alarm page Help page PLC page Diagnosis page

System page Position page Program page Setting page

Name Function Remark

Press this key Subpages for graphic parameters and graphic display can be
Graphic
to enter viewed by switching corresponding soft keys. The center, size and
page
graphic page ratio for the graph are set using graphic parameters
Press this key
Alarm Subpages for a variety of alarm message can be viewed by
to enter alarm
page switching corresponding soft keys.
page
Press this key
Help Help message about the system can be viewed in this page by
to enter help
page switching corresponding soft keys.
page
Press this key The version of the PLC ladder and the configuration of system I/O
PLC
to enter PLC can be viewed on this page, and the modification for PLC ladder is
page
page available in MDI mode.
Press this key
Diagnosi The states of I/O signals on the system side can be viewed in this
to enter
s page page by switching corresponding soft keys
diagnosis

139
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

page

Press this key Subpages for tool offsets, parameters, macro variables and screw
System
to enter pitch can be displayed by switching corresponding soft keys
page
system page
Press this key Subpages for relative coordinates, absolute coordinates and all
Position
to enter coordinates of the current point and PLC can be displayed by
page
position page switching corresponding soft keys
Subpages for programs, MDI, current/mode, current/time, and
Press this key program directory can be displayed by switching corresponding soft
Pgrogram
to enter keys. Program names in different pages can be viewed by pressing
page
program page page keys in directory subpage.

Press this key

Three subprograms to be converted by a corresponding softkey,
Offset to enter the
i.e., display offset page, workpiece coordinate page, macro
page tool offset
variable page
page

Note: The page switch above can also be done by pressing corresponding function keys repeatedly after bit
parameters NO:25#0～25#7, NO:26#6～26#7 are set. Refer to CHAPTER 3 in this manual for the
explanation for each page.

1.2.4 Machine Control Area

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 1-2-4-1 GSK980TC3-H machine control area

Appendix

Fig. 1-2-4-2 GSK980TC3-V machine control area

The use and function definition of the basic keys for the machine control area of GSK980TC3-H and

140
 Chapter 1 Operation Panel

GSK980TC3-V are the same.

Remarks and operation

Keys Designation Explanation
explanation
Switching to Edit mode in Auto mode,
MDI mode and DNC mode. System
Edit mode key To enter edit mode decelerates to stop after current
block is executed

Auto mode key To enter auto mode In this mode, program in internal
memory is selected
Switching to MDI mode in Auto
MDI mode key To enter MDI mode mode, system decelerates to stop
after current block is executed

Machine zero To enter machine Switching to Machine zero mode in

mode key zero mode Auto mode. System immediately
decelerates to stop
Program zero Switching to Program zero mode in
T o e n t e r program
mode key Auto mode. System immediately
zero mode
decelerates to stop
Switching to Manual Mode in Auto
Manual mode To enter manual
mode, system immediately
key mode
decelerates to stop

Ⅱ
Switching to MPG mode in Auto
To enter MPG mode, system immediately
MPG mode key
mode

Operation
decelerates to stop

For a block preceding

with “/” sign. If it is on,
Block skip key the indicator lights up Auto mode, MDI mode, DNC mode
And the block is skipped.

For switching the

execution between single
Single block key block and blocks. If it is Auto mode, MDI mode, DNC mode
on, the indicator Lights
up.
Auto mode, MDI mode, DNC
The indicator lights up
Dry run switch mode
if dry run is valid.

Whether the operation

Optional stop is stopped after a block
ON/OFF key Auto mode, MDI mode, DNC mode
containing M01 is
executed.
M.S.T. function output is
invalid if the indicator for
M.S.T. lock switch M.S.T. function lock lights Auto mode, MDI mode, DNC mode
up.

141
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Remarks and operation

Keys Designation Explanation explanation
Auto mode, MDI mode,
The indicator lights up
Machine lock Machine zero, MPG
if it is on, and the axis
switch mode, Step mode,
movement output is
MANUAL mode, DNC
invalid.
mode
Lubricant oil Machine lubricant
switch Any mode
ON/OFF

Cooling switch Cooling ON/OFF Any mode

Spindle CCW MPG mode, step

Spindle control
Spindle stop mode, manual mode
keys
Spindle CW
Spindle speed
Spindle override
adjustment (spindle Any mode
keys
speed analog control
valid)

Spindle JOG Spindle JOG Manual mode, Step mode,

switch ON/OFF MPG mode
Ⅱ

C/S axis rotation

Valid when the spindle
C/S axis rotation
CW/CCW is analog amount control
CW/CCW
Operation

mode in Manual mode

Valid in Manual
Tool change Tool change
mode, Step mode,
switch key switch
MPG mode
USER1 single block runs,
Bus switch Bus switch press the mode during running
key a program, the program is
executed by block by block
Appendix

Rapid Rapid traverse Manual

traverse key ON/OFF mode

Rapid override, Rapid override,

Auto mode, MDI mode,
manual step, MPG manual step, MPG Machine zero return mode,
override selection override selection key MPG mode, Manual mode
key
X, Y, Z, C axis
positively/ negatively Machine zero return
Manual feed moves in Manual, Step mode, Manual mode,
key mode, the axis’positive MPG mode
direction is MPG
selecting a axis
Press it and the
Feed hold key Auto mode, MDI mode
system stops the
automatic run
Press it and the
Cycle start key Auto mode, MDI mode
program automatically
runs

142
 Chapter 1 Operation Panel

Note 1：A block with more than 1 “/” sign at its beginning is skipped by the system even if the skip function
is OFF.
Note 2：In Manual mode, the manual federate override is regulated by the federate override switch without
pressing the rapid traverse key.
Note 3：Keys in <> are on the panel; keys in【 】are soft keys at the bottom of the screen;【 】is a page
corresponded to the current soft key; means there is a submenu in the menu.
Note 4：There is an user defined key USER1.

Ⅱ
Operation

143
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

144
 Chapter 2 System Power on/off and Safety Operation

Chapter 2 System Power on/off and Safety Operation

2.1 System Power-on

Before GSK980TC3 CNC system is powered on, the user must ensure that:
1. The machine state is normal.
2. The voltage of the power supply conforms to the requirement of the machine.
3. The wiring is correct and reliable.

The current position (relative coordinates) is displayed after system self-check and initialization.

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 2-1-1

2.2 Power off

Before turning off the system, make sure that:
1. The axes X, Y, Z of the CNC are at halt;
2. Miscellaneous functions (spindle, pump, etc.) are off.
3. The CNC power is cut off prior to cutting off the machine power.

When cutting off the power, check that:

1. The LED, which indicates the cycle start on the operator panel, is off.
2. All the movable parts of the CNC machine tool are at halt.
3. Press POWER OFF button to turn off the power.

Cutting off the power in an emergency

The power should be cut off immediately to prevent accidents in an emergency situation during the
machine running. However, the zero return, tool setting, etc. must be performed again because an
error between system coordinates and actual coordinates may occur after power-off.

Note: See the manual provided by the machine tool builder for the machine power cut-off.

145
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

2.3 Safety Operations

2.3.1 Reset Operation

With key pressed, the system enters the reset state:

1. All axes movement stops;
2. The M functions are ineffective;
3. Whether the G codes are saved after resetting is determined by NO:35#1～NO:35#7 and
NO:36#0～NO:36#7;
4. Whether F, H, D codes are cleared after resetting is determined by NO:34#7;
5. In MDI mode, whether the edited program is deleted after resetting is determined by
NO:28#7;
6. Whether the relative coordinates are cancelled after resetting is determined by NO:10#3;
7. In non-Edit mode, whether the cursor returns to the beginning of the program after resetting
is determined by NO:10#7;
8. Whether macro local variables #1 ～ #50 are cleared after resetting is determined by
NO:52#7;
9. Whether macro common variables #100～#199 are cleared after resetting is determined by
NO:52#6;
10. Resetting can be used during abnormal system output and coordinate axis action.

2.3.2 Emergency Stop

Ⅱ

If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during machine running, the system enters into
Operation

emergency state and the machine movement is stopped immediately. Release the button (usually
rotate the button towards left) to exit the state.

Note 1: Confirm the faults have been removed before releasing the Emergency Stop button;
Note 2: Perform Reference Point Return again after releasing the Emergency Stop button to ensure the
coordinate position is correct.
Appendix

In general, the emergency stop signal is a normal closed signal. When the contact point is open,
the system immediately enters into the emergency stop state and emergently stops the machine. The
connection for the emergency stop signal is as follows:

+24V
Emergency stop switch

ESP

Fig. 2-3-2-1

146
 Chapter 2 System Power on/off and Safety Operation

2.3.3 Feed Hold

Users can suspend the execution pressing key during the machine running. Please
note that the execution is not suspended in rigid tapping codes and cycle codes until the current code
is executed.

2.4 Cycle Start and Feed Hold

The keys and are used for the program start and dwell operations in Auto
mode, MDI mode and DNC modes. Whether the external start and dwell is used is set by PLC
address K5.1.

Note 1：Switch Auto/MDI mode. Before the current block is executed, the cycle start is valid, <Feed hold> key
is pressed, the feed hold is invalid.
Note 2：Switch Auto/MDI mode into Edit mode. Before the current block is executed, the cycle start is invalid,
<Feed hold> key is pressed, the feed hold is invalid.
Note 3：Switch Auto/MDI mode into the Machine Zero Return, Step, Manual, MPG mode. Press the feed hold
key and the feed hold function is invalid.

Ⅱ
Note 4：When the cycle start key is valid, the Auto/MDI mode is switched into the Edit mode, and the feed hold
key is pressed before the current block is executed, the feed hold function is invalid.

Operation
2.5 Overtravel Protection

Overtravel protection must be employed to prevent the damage to the machine due to the
overtravel of the X, Y, or Z axis.

2.5.1 Hardware Overtravel Protection

The overtravel limit switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum stroke of the
machine X, Y and Z axes respectively. If the overtravel occurs, the moving axis decelerates and
stops after it touches the limit switch. Meanwhile, the overtravel alarm is issued.

Explanation:
Overtravel in auto mode
In Auto mode, if the tool hits the stroke limit switch during the movement along an axis, all the
axis movements are decelerated to stop with the overtravel alarm being issued. The program
execution is stopped at the block where the overtravel occurs.

Overtravel in Manual mode

In Manual mode, if any axis contacts the stroke limit switch, all axes will slow down immediately
and stop.

2.5.2 Software Overtravel Protection

The software stroke ranges are set by the data parameters P66~P73, with the machine

147
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

coordinates taken as the reference values. Overtravel alarm occurs if the moving axis exceeds the
setting software stroke. Whether the stroke check is performed after power-on and before manual
reference point return is determined by bit parameter N0:11#6 (0: No, 1: Yes). Whether the overtravel
alarm is issued before or after the overtravel when the software limit overtravel occurs is set by bit
parameter N0:11#7 (0: before, 1: after). After the overtravel occurs, move the axis out of the
overtravel range in the reverse direction in Manual mode to release the alarm.

2.5.3 Overtravel Alarm Release

Method to release the hardware overtravel alarm: In manual or MPG mode, press key
on the panel, then move the axis in the reverse direction (for positive overtravel, move negatively; for
negative overtravel, move positively).
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

148
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3.1 Position Display

3.1.1 Four Types of Position Display

Press key to enter position page, which consists of 【REL】, 【ABS】, 【All】and
【PMONI】. The four subpages can be viewed using corresponding soft keys, as is shown below:
1) Relative coordinate: It displays the position of the current tool in the relative coordinate
system by pressing soft key【REL】. (See fig. 3-1-1-1):

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 3-1-1-1
2) Absolute coordinate: It displays the current position of the tool in absolute coordinate system
by pressing soft key【ABS】(see Fig.3-1-1-2).

Fig. 3-1-1-2

149
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3) ALL: It enters【ALL】page by pressing soft key【ALL】, displaying the following items:

(A) The position in relative coordinate system;
(B) The position in absolute coordinate system;
(C) The position in machine coordinate system;
(D) The offset amount (displacement) in MPG interruption;
(E) Speed component;
(F) Remaining distance (only displayed in Auto, MDI and DNC mode)
The display is shown below（Fig.3-1-1-3）:
Ⅱ

Fig. 3-1-1-3
Operation

4）In【ALL】page, pressing soft key【OPERATION】to display the following items:（See Fig.

3-1-1-4）
Appendix

Fig. 3-1-1-4
5）Monitor mode
It enters 【PMONI】 page by pressing soft key 【PMONI】. In this mode, the absolute
coordinates, relative coordinates of the current position as well as the modal message and blocks
of the program being executed can be displayed (See Fig. 3-1-1-5):

150
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-1-1-5
Note 1: Whether the modes are displayed in 【PMONI】page can be set by parameter NO:23#6. When BIT6=0,
the machine coordinates are displayed in the position where the modal codes are displayed.
Note 2: In <MACHINE ZERO>, <STEP>, <MANUAL>, <MPG>, <MACHINE ZERO>, <EDIT>modes, the
intermediate coordinate system is a relative one; while in <AUTO>, <MDI> modes, it is the distance to
go.

3.1.2 Display of Cut Time, Part Count, Programming Speed, Override and Actual

Ⅱ
Speed

Operation
The programmed speed, actual speed, feedrate and rapid override, G codes, tool offset, part
number, cut time, spindle override, spindle speed, tools etc. can be displayed on the subpages【REL】
and【ABS】of page <POSITION> (see Fig.3-1-2-1) :

Fig. 3-1-2-1

The meanings of them are as follows:

Speed: The actual cutting speed overridden.
Programmed speed: Speed specified by F code.

151
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Feedrate override: Feed override selected by feedrate override keys.

Rapid override: Rapid override selected by rapid override keys.
G codes: The values of the G codes in the block being executed.
Part count: “0002/0000”，“0002” is the machined part quanity, “0000” is the required machining
total part quantity. When M30 or M02 is executed in Auto mode, the count increases
by 1, in other modes, the count does not increase; when the machined part quanity is
more than or equal to the required machining part quantity, the system sends the
signal F61#1=1，and the application method of the signal is defined by the machine
tool manufacturer.

Cut time: Time counting starts after Auto run starts, with a unit of “hour: minute: second”.

S00000: Specify the speed. Press key in Page ACT POS(RELATIVE), locate the
cursor to “S 0000”: in this way S value can be changed (range:0~value set by data
parameter P258).
Tool offset: A tool number specified T code in program.

Note: The part count is memorized after power-down.

Ways to clear part count and cut time:

1）Switch to POSITION page, select MDI mode
Ⅱ
Operation

2）Press key to locate the cursor to the PRT CNT item, input data and press key

for confirmation; if key is pressed directly, the part count will be cleared.
3）Shift to CUT TIME by keys Up and Down.
Appendix

4）Press key to clear the CUT TIME.

Note 1: To display the actual spindle speed, an encoder must be applied to the spindle.
Note 2: The actual speed= the programming speed F × override; The speed of each axis is set by data
parameters P88～P92 in G00 mode and it can be overridden by rapid override; the dry run speed is
set by P86.
Note 3: The programming speed for feed per revolution is displayed when the block involving feed per
revolution is being executed.

3.1.3 Relative Coordinate Clearing and Halving

The steps for clearing relative coordinate position are as follows:

1) Enter any page that displays the relative coordinates (Fig. 3-1-3-1);

152
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-1-3-1
2） Clearing operation: Press and hold key “X” till X in the page flickers, then press key

to clear the relative coordinate in X axis; (Fig. 3-1-3-2):

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-1-3-2
3）Halving operation: Press and hold key “X” till “X” in the page flickers, then press key

to halve the relative coordinate in X axis. (The relative coordinate of the axis is
divided by 2);
4）Coordinate setting: Press X” and “U”, and “X” in the page flickers, input the data to be set

and press key for confirmation, then the data will be input into the coordinate
system.
5）Z clearing method is the same as the above.

153
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3.1.4 Bus Monitor Page Display

When the system uses the Ethernet bus communication mode, is pressed to enter the
position page. Press【 】 to enter 【PMONI】page. In the page, the system simultaneously
displays the current position’s machine coordinates, multi-coil position, single-coil position, grating
position, motor speed, motor load(% is a percentage of rated load). The page is convient to debug
the machine and monitor the servo’s current run state. (See Fig. 3-1-5)
Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-1-4

3.2 Program Display

Press key to enter program display page which consists of 5 subpages: 【 PRG】,
Appendix

【MDI】and 【DIR】. They can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys (See Fig.3-2-1).

1） Program display
Press soft key【 PRG】 to enter program page. In this page, a page of blocks being executed
in the memory can be displayed (See Fig. 3-2-1).

154
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-2-1
Press soft key 【 PRG】 again, and the program EDIT and modification page is entered (see
Fig.3-2-2):

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-2-2

Press【X】to enter the next page

Press【X】to enter the next page

Press【W】to return to the previous page

Note: The 【CHECK】 function can only be performed in Auto mode.

【B. EDIT】and 【B. END】are used only in AUTO and DNC mode (background edit function).
Functions of 【B.EDIT】are the same as the program edited in <EDIT> mode (See Chapter Ten
“Program Edit”). Save the editing by 【B. END】or exit the background EDIT page by 【RETURN】
after editing.

2） MDI input display

155
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Press soft key 【MDI】 to enter MDI page. In this mode, multiple blocks can be edited and
executed. The program format is the same as that of the editing program. MDI mode is applicable to
simple program testing operation (see Fig. 3-2-3) .

Fig. 3-2-3

3) Program (DIR) display

Ⅱ

Ⅰ. Press soft key【DIR】to enter program (DIR) page, the contents of which are displayed as
follows (Fig.3-2-4):
Operation

(a) PRG USED: The saved programs (including subprograms) /maximum number of the
programs that can be saved.
(b) MEM USED: The capacity occupied by the saved programs /the total capacity for
program storage.
(c) PROGRAM DIR: The sequence numbers of the saved programs are displayed in
sequence.
(d) Previewing the program where the cursor is located
Appendix

Fig. 3-2-4
Note: The program numbers in memory can be displayed by the page keys. The program names with more
than 6 digits or irregular formats cannot be previewed.

156
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3.3 System Display

Press key to enter system page, which consists of four subpages: 【CNC SETTING】,
【 PARA】, 【PITCH】,【 DATA】, 【 BUS】,【 TIME LIMIT STOP】, which can be displayed
by pressing the corresponding soft key.

3.3.1 CNC Display, modification and setting

3.3.1.1 Modification and Setting for Password Authority

To avoid of machining programs and CNC parameters being modified viciously, GSK980TC3
provodies authority setting function, and its password level is divided into 5, including 1 level
(end-user level), 2 level (the system debugging level), 3 level (machine manufacture level), 4 level
(system manufacture level) and 5 level (machining operation level). The system defaults the lowest
level after power on (see Fig. 3-3-1-1-1).
1 level：modity some of the CNC’s state parameters, data parameters.
2 level：modify the CNC’s state parameters, data parameters, tool offset data and pitch.
3 level, 4 level：modify the CNC’s state parameters, data parameters, offset data and
transmitting PLC ladder diagram.

Ⅱ
5 level：No password. Modify offset data, macro variables, executing operations by machine

Operation
the operation panel. Must not modify the CNC’s state parametes, data parameters
and pitch data.

Fig. 3-3-1-1-1
1）After the system enters the page in <MDI MODE>, the cursor positions to the target position.

2）Input the corresponding password and press . When the input password is correct,

157
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

the system prompts “Password Correct”.

3）When the password needs to modify, 0~6 digits or letters are input. Press to confirm
the input.

4）After modification, press ，and the cursor moves to “Cancel（END）” button, and the

system prompts：“press<Input>key to confirm the cancel！”，After is pressed to

confirm the cancel, the system prompts:” Cancel Completes!”. At the same time, the cursor
returns to the password toolbar. The password is automatically cancelled after power-off.

3.3.2 Display, Modification and Setting for Parameters

3.3.2.1 Parameter Display

1）Bit parameter page. Press soft key【 PARA】to enter parameter page.（See 3-3-2-1-1）：
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-3-2-1-1
Refer to APPENDIX 1 PARAMETERS for details.
2）Number parameter page Press soft key【NUMPAR】to enter this page. (See fig. 3-3-2-1-2):

158
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-3-2-1-2
Refer to APPENDIX 1 PARAMETERS for details.

3） Common parameters

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-3-2-1-3

In the above 【Common parameter】page, select the required parameter catalog number
toenter the corresponding page. (See Fig. 3-3-2-1-4):

159
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-3-2-1-4

Concrete operation methods:

1）Select MDI mode.
Ⅱ

2）Press , and then press【 NUMPAR】 to enter【Common Parameter】display page.

Operation

3 ） Select the parameter catalog by pressing , , , , ,

4）Move the cursor to the parameter number to be modified:

Appendix

Method 1：press<Input> to enter the selected, press page up/down to display the page
in which the set parameter is; press the direction key to move the cursor and
to position the required parameter position to modification.

Method 2：press the corresponding digit key, and then press <Input> key，press page
up/down to display the page in which the set parameter is; press the
direction key to move the cursor and to position the required parameter
position to modification.

5）Press <HOME> key or press【Return to catalog】to return to the common parameter catalog.

6）Press <G> key to skip the parameter page in which the parameter is selected.

7）Letters in front of the parameter number represent different parameter type.（B: bit parameter，
P: data parameter，K:K parameter，T:T parameter，D:DATA parameter，C:CTR parameter）

8）Modify the maximum/miminum value range of data parameters in the NUMPAR parameter.
Note: Catalog of common parameters and parameter included in the catalog from the CNC’s
correspondingly allocated files can be freely selected by the user.

160
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3.3.2.2 Modification and Setting Parameter Values

1) Select MDI mode;

2) Press key to enter <SETTING> page, turn on the parameter switch. Set the
parameter switch to 1.

3) Press key , then the soft key【 NUMPAR】to enter 【BITPAR】or【PAR】or

【COMPAR】display page.
4) Move the cursor to the parameter number to be modified:
Method 1: Press page keys to display the parameter to be set; then move the cursor to the
place to be modified;

Method 2: Press key to search after inputting the parameter number.

5) Input a new parameter value using number keys (corresponding passwords are required for
modifying parameters of different levels).

6) Press key for confirmation, then the parameter value is input and displayed.
7) Turn off the parameter switch after setting all the parameters.

Ⅱ
Note: There is no search function in【COMPAR】page.

Operation
3.3.3 Display, Modification and Setting for Screw Pitch Offset

3.3.3.1 Pitch Offset Display

Press soft key【PITCH】to enter pitch offset page, which is shown as follows (Fig. 3-3-3-1-1 ):

Fig. 3-3-3-1-1

161
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3.3.3.2 Modification and Setting for Pitch Offset

1) the pitch error compensation number is set by data parameters P226～P230, and the pitch
error offset interval is set by data parameters P226～P230.

2) In <MDI> mode, input the offset value for each point in turn.
Note: Refer to Ⅳ 4 Installtion and Connection of “GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC, Installation and
Connection User Manual” for the setting of pitch offset.

3.3.4 Backup, Restoration and Transmission for Data

Press soft key【 DATA】to enter SETTING (DATA DEAL) page. The user data (such as ladder,
ladder parameters, system parameter values, tool offset values, pitch offset values, system macro
variables, custom macro programs and CNC part programs) can be backup (saved) and restored
(read); and the data input and output via PC or U disk are also available in this system. The part
programs saved in CNC are not affected during the data backup and restoration.（See Fig.3-3-4-1）
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-3-4-1
Operation:
1. Set the password for a corresponding level in password page pressing soft key
【PASSWORD】. For the corresponding password levels of the data, please see to
3.3.1.1 setting and modification for password authority in this passage:
2. Press soft key【 DATA】twice to enter the DATA DEAL page, as Fig 3-3-4-2 below is
shown:

162
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-3-4-2

Press【X】to enter the next page

The functions of the operations are shown in the table below (table 3-3-4-1):
Table 3-3-4-1

Ⅱ
Item Function explanation
It is available to backup the data saved in the system disk such as

Operation
ladder (PLC), parameters (PLC), system parameter values, tool offset
values, pitch offset values, and system macro variables separately.
Data backup
After the backup, the system will create a backup file with file
extension .bak.

It is available to restore the data saved in the system disk such as

ladder (PLC), parameters (PLC), system parameter values, tool offset
Data
values, pitch offset values, or system macro variables separately. The
restoration
operation reads the backup file saved in the system firstly and then
recovers the data.
This operation can output the data saved in the system disk to the
Data output
external storage devices.
This operation can input the data saved in the external storage
Data input
devices to the system disk.
One key It can backup a variety of data items to the system disk
backup (OTB) simultaneously.
One key
restoration It can restore the backup files of multiple data items simultaneously.
(Ghost)
One key It can copy multiple data items saved in the system disk to a U disk
output simultaneously.
It can copy multiple data items to the system disk from a U disk
One key input
simultaneously.

163
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3. Press and to select the target file, press and to

switch between data item directory and file directory.
4. Press corresponding soft keys to perform operations such as backup, recovery, output,
input, one key backup, one key recovery, one key output and one key input.

Note：
1) When I/O channel is set to “U Disk”, the functions of soft keys Data Output and Data
Input are the same.
2) When performing data output/input operation, ensure the setting for the I/O channel
is correct. When using a U disk, set the I/O channel to 2; when using transmission
software via PC, set the I/O channel to 0 or 1.
3) The contents of One Key Output/Input are determined by password authorities. See
table 3-3-1-1 for the correspondence between data items and password authorities.

4) Relevant parameters
Bit parameter N0:54#7: for setting whether one key output/input is valid for part
programs in debugging-level authority or above.
Bit parameter N0:27#0: for setting whether the editing for subprograms with program
numbers from 80000-89999 is forbidden.
Bit parameter N0:27#4: for setting whether the editing for subprograms with program
Ⅱ

numbers from 90000-99999 is forbidden.

5) There are concerned operation prompts in the system during data processing, the
Operation

contents of which are shown as follows (table 3-3-4-2).

Table 3-3-4-2
No. Prompt message Cause Handling
Transmission is
1 Once key operation completed Operation succeeded
completed
The input/output
Appendix

operation of the macro

One key operation completed, program has been
Skip the input/output
2 system prompts: Copy after performed, but the
operation of this file.
modifying parameters parameters concerned
in the system have not
been set.
The update for the
ladder and ladder Transmission is
One key operation completed,
parameters has been completed, please
3 system alarm: Parameters taking
executed, which turn on the power
effect after power-off are modified.
requires power-on again.
again.
Interrupt the
4 File reading failed File error
input/output operation
Interrupt the
5 File writing failed File error
input/output operation
Interrupt the
6 File copy failed File error
input/output operation
The part program is Interrupt the
7 Large file, please use DNC
greater than 4M input/output operation
The storage capacity is Interrupt the
8 Insufficient storage capacity
not enough. input/output operation
164
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

File LADCHI**.TXT is invalid after it is transmitted to the system until the power is turned off and
on again.

3.3.5 Bus Servo Parameter Display, Modification and Setting

Press【 Bus Allocation】to enter the bus page. The bus page is shown beow (See Fig. 3-3-5-1）：

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 3-3-5-1
【 bus allocation】operation explanation:
Press 【 bus allocation】soft key to enter the bus allocation page as Fig. 3-3-5-1 to search or
modify parameters:
1. Enter <MDI> operation mode；
2. Press the move cursor UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT to move it to the required change item;
3. Modify it according to the following explanation:
1) Bus

2) Encoder type
0：incremental 1：absolute
Note: No：20#6 sets to use an absolute encoder or not.
3) Select permissive max. deviation
Note: the system defaults 50.000mm，and P450~P454，P455~P459 can set a deviation.
X, Z simultaneously returns to the machine zero 0：no expansion cards 1：have expansion
cards
Note: No：0#6 can set to use the bus servo card or not.
4) Grating type
0：incremental 1：absolute
Note: No：1#0 can set to use an absolute grating rule or not.
5) Spindel expansion card
0：no expansion cards 1：have expansion cards
Note: No：1#1 sets the spindle driver to be the bus control mode or not.
6) Absolute zero setting

165
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

a) Firstly, set the system terminal’s gear ratio, feed axis’ direction and zero return
direction.
b) In MDI mode, “Bus or not” in the bus allocation page is set to 1, “Encoder Type” is set
to 1, manual moving each axis sets the machine zero position.

c) Move the cursor to . According the prompt, press <INPUT>key twice，and the
zero return indicator lights, the current position record of each axis’ motor absolute
encoder is taken as the machine zero. The system is turned off and then turned on,
the zero return indicator is OFF. The user can manually set negative border and
positive border according to the actual machine’s max. storke, which makes the
current machine’s absolute coordinate offsets forward or backward one value,
No.61#6 is set to 1, and the posititve/negative limit is valid.
Setting range：-99999.9999~99999.9999， P66~P85 sets each axis’ positive/negative
border.
d) Whether to allocate with grating. Each axis is set to allocated with grating or not, 0：
no grating，1：have grating.
Note 1：After the machine zero is set, modifying each axis’ zero return direction, feed axis movement direction,
servo and system gear ratio cause zero missing, the machine zero must be reset.
nd rd
Note 2：After the machine zero is reset, it influences other reference points, the 2 , 3 reference point must
be reset.

3.3.5.1 Servo Parameter Display

Ⅱ

Press the soft key【 Bus Allocation】 to enter the servo debugging page, then press【 Servo
Operation

Parameter】to enter the servo parameter page, which is shown below: (see Fig. 3-3-5-1-1）.
Appendix

Fig. 3-3-5-1-1

3.3.5.1.1 Servo Parameter Modification and Setting

1) Select <MDI> operation mode.

2) Press to enter【CNC Setting】 page, and set the parameter switch to “1”.

166
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3) Press ，and then press【 Buse Allocation】to enter the servo debugging page.
Press【 Servo Parameter】to enter the parameter setting and display page.
4) Move the cursor to the current selected axis parameter #0，input the corresponding
password, press the input key to load the driver parameter to the system, and modify the
servo parameter in【Servo Parameter】page.
5) Move the cursor to the required modified parameter number’s position:
Method 1：press page up/down to display page where the parameter to be set is; or press
the direction key to move the cursor, and position the required modified
parameter’s position.

Method 2：after the parameter number is input, is pressed to position.

6) Press to confirm it. The parameter value is loaded into the driver, and the status
bar displays “ Driver parameter load success!”

7) Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters, and the status bar
displays “ Driver parameter save success!”

Ⅱ
8) After all parameters’ setting compelets, the parameter switch is OFF.

Operation
3.3.5.1.2 Parameter Setting of Servo Matched with Motor model

1) Select <MDI> operation mode.

2) Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and set the parameter switch to “1”.

3) Press , then press【 Buse Allocation】 to enter the servo debugging page, at last
press【 Servo Parameter】to enter the parameter display page.
4) Move the cursor to the current selected axis parameter #0，input the password 385，press
the input key to load the driver parameter to the system, and modify the servo parameter i
【Servo Parameter】page.
5) Move the cursor to the parameter #1，input a number matched with the motor model：

6) Press to confirm it. The parameter value is loaded into the driver, and the status
bar displays “ Driver parameter load success!”

7) Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters, and the status bar
displays “ Driver parameter save success!”
8) After all parameters’ setting compelets, the parameter switch is OFF.

167
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3.3.5.1.3 Servo Parameter Backup

1) Select <MDI> operation mode.

2) Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and set the parameter switch to “1” .

3） Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and input the end-user password or higher

level password.

4) Press , then press【 Buse Allocation】 to enter the servo debugging page, at last
press【 Servo Parameter】to enter the parameter display page.
5) Select【Backup】key to backup the current selected axis’ parameter into the file DrvParXX.txt.
（XX axis number. Such as: backup X axis, the file name: DrvPar01.txt）.
6) After all parameters’ setting compelets, the parameter switch is OFF.

3.3.5.1.4 Servo Parameter Recover

1) Select <MDI> operation mode.

Ⅱ

2) Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and set the parameter switch to “1” .

Operation

3） Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and input the end-user password or higher

level password.

4) Press , then press【 Buse Allocation】 to enter the servo debugging page, at last
press【 Servo Parameter】to enter the parameter display page.
Appendix

5) Select【Restore】key to restore the current selected axis’ backup parameter file DrvParXX.txt
into the servo drive.（XX axis number. Such as：backup X axis, the file name:DrvPar01.txt）.

6) Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters, and the status bar
displays “ Driver parameter save success!”
7) After all parameters’ setting compelets, the parameter switch is OFF.

3.3.5.1.5 Servo Grade Zero

When the parameters are debugged, the servo parameter’s rigid is too big to cause the machine 当
shake. To avoid a danger, the servo grade zero function can rapidly restore the servo parameter into
0 grade initinal state.
1) Select <MDI> operation mode.

168
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

2) Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and set the parameter switch to “1” .

3） Press to enter【CNC Setting】page, and input the end-user password or higher

level password.

4) Press , then press【 Buse Allocation】 to enter the servo debugging page, at last
press【 Servo Parameter】to enter the parameter display page.
5) Select【Grade Zero】to restore all servo axis parameters into 0 grade parameters.

6) Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters, and the status bar
displays “ Driver parameter save success!”

7) After all parameters’ setting compelets, the parameter switch is OFF.

3.3.5.2 Servo Debugging

To ensure the servo debugging function really responsing the servo performances, cancel the
drive side’s gear ratio and the system side’s all compensations (including pitch error compensation

Ⅱ
and backlash compensation).

Operation
3.3.5.2.1 Page Constitution

Press 【 Servo Debugging】 to enter the servo debugging tool page. The page is shown below
（See Fig. 3-3-5-2-1-1~Fig.3-3-5-2-2）.

Fig. 3-3-5-2-1 rigid grade page

169
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-3-5-2-2 Circular degree test page

Note: The coordinate axis display in the servo debugging page is determined by the system’s
controlled axis quantity and the smaller number in the bus servo’s salve station.

3.3.5.2.2 Function Introduction

1. Rigid grade and parameter optimization operation function

Ⅱ

The function is to set the servo parameter to the servo performance’s optimal state.
Operation

2. Circular degree
The circular degree tests can simulate a circumference cutting movement circle, and hereby
collect the motor mask position message to judge each servo axis response’s synchronism of
the machine tool.

3.3.5.2.3 Operation Explanation

Appendix

1. Rigid grade debugging operation

Explanation: debug and set the ridig grade. The system can perform one axis one time.
Operation key:

A. and key: selection axis. (note: once the system enters the
optimizing process, the user cannot use the UP, DOWN direction key to change the
current operating axis. )

B. and key: reduce or increase the current axis’ rigid grade, press
every time the ridig grade to reduce or increase one grade;
C. 【Axis move+】 and 【axis move-】soft key: positively or negatively move at the speed
set by P393 the currect axis to some distance set by P392. Before entering the
optimizing processing, repetitively press【axis move+】 and 【axis move-】soft key
movement axis to view whether the motor vibrates or is abnormal. Must not
continuously press 【axis move+】 and 【axis move-】 to get the motor characteristic
data after entering the optimizing process.
170
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Note 1：After entering the optimizing process, press【axis move+】and【axis move-】soft key
movement axis and sample data.
Note 2：The non-specialized person must not change P392 and P393，otherwise, it maybe cause
optimization unsuccessfully.

D. key: confirm the operation or enter the next step;

E. key: cancel some operation or return to the previous step;

F. key: reset the operation and return to the initial operation step;

G. key: save operations.

Operation process is shown below:

Ⅱ
Operation

171
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

172
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

2. Circular test
Operation key：
A. Number key：input various parameter values;

B. and key：select a parameter item;

C. and key：select functions(collect and analysis)；

D. key：input parameter values or confirm and execute operations;

E. key：clear data and reset to the initial state.

Parameter items:
A. plane：select a test plane G18;
B. CW/CCW circle： select the circle direction G02, G03;
C. Sampling period：set the sampling period, which is set by the circle radius and
federate. The bigger the radius is, the longer the sampling period is; the slower the
federate is, the longer the sampling period;

Ⅱ
D. feedrate：move speed when test;
E. magnification times：the circular degree analysis is a multiple of error magnifying.

Operation
Operation steps:

Step 1: After setting various parameters, press or to select the

sampling function;

Step 2： Press to start the circular movement and start sampling data. After

sampling, press or to select the analysis function.

Step 3: Press to the analysis function and output the circular degree data and
draw circular error distribution diagram, which is shown below:

173
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-3-5-2-3-1
Note: After debugging the rigid grad and parameter optimizing function, use the circular degree
test function to test the current feed axis’ synchronism. Each plane’s circular degree test
within 6u is taken as a better synchronism of current each feed axis, and the parameter
debugging basically succeeds.

3.3.6 Time Limit Stop Display

Ⅱ
Operation

Press【X】, and then press【Time limit Stop】to enter the time limit stop display page which
is divided into staging authority and password modification function. A new password can be
modified by the staging authority, which is shown below (see Fi.g3-4-6-1):
Appendix

3-3-6-1

174
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3.3.6.1 Staging Authority Setting and Modification

1）After entering the page in <MDI mode>, move the cursor to position to the target position.

2）After getting the machine manufacturer’s password, press to input the password, then

press to confirm the password. If the password is correct, the system prompts
“Password correctness”.（the password is vacancy when delivery, and the user directly input
it.）

3）When the authority password is modified, 0~6 digits number or letters are input, and
is pressed to confirm the input.

4）The system prompts “Please input a new password again”.

5） After inputting the new password, press . When the twice inputs are the same, the
system prompts “the password modified, please save the new”. The operation password is

Ⅱ
modified successfully.
Note: When the twice inputs are different, the system prompts “the new password and the confirmation

Operation
password are inconsistent, this moment, please input the new password”.
Press 【Time limit stop】again to enter the time limit stop page which includes【Newly increased
, Delete periods】function, and the concrete contents are shown below: (see Fig. 3-4-6-2）：
periods】【

Fig. 3-3-6-2

In the figure, press 【Newly increased periods】page to enter the operation page.(See Fig.
3-4-6-3）

175
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-3-6-3
Concrete operations:
1） After entering the page in <MDI mode>, move the cursor to position to the target position.
2） After getting the machine manufacturer’s authority, set the stop data and password. Set up
to12 periods. Set the password: such as password 1, password 2 …….
Ⅱ
Operation

3） Input the password, press to confirm the input, and the system prompts “Input the
new password again”. When the input is correct, the cursor automatically jumps to

“Confirmation”, press to set the newly increased periods successfully. Press

not to newly increase the periods.

Appendix

4） In【Newly increased】，press or to exit.

Note: When the twice inputs are different, the system prompts “the new password and the confirmation
password are inconsistent, this moment, please input the new password”.

【Delete periods】page display:

176
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-3-6-4

Operation steps:
1） After entering the page in <MDI mode>, move the cursor to position to the required
deleted period position.
2） Press “Delete periods” and pop-up a dialog of time limit stop period.

Ⅱ
Operation
3） Input the stop limit password, press to confirm the input. When the input is

correct, the cursor automatically jumps to “Confirmation”, press to delete the selected
time limit stop periods. When the password is incorrect, the deletion cannot be done
successfully.

4） In【Delete periods】，press or to exit.

3.4 Tool Offset Display

Press to enter the offset message display page which is divided into three subpages
【 Offset】, 【 Workpiece coordinates】, 【 Macro variable】，press the corresponding soft key to
view or modify messages. The concrete content is shown below: (See Fig. 3-4-1）：

177
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-4-1

3.4.1 Offset Display, Modification, Setting

Press【 Offset】to enter the offset display page as follows (See Fig. 3-4-1-1-1）:
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-4-1

Press to enter the next page

to directly input the compensation amount or add/subtract the current position’s value.

3.4.1.1 Offset Value’s Setting

Set the offset in the offset page:

1) Press 【 Offset】to enter the offset display page.
2) Move the cursor to the required input compensation number’s position.
Method 1：press page up/down to display the page where the required modified compensation
amount is; press the direction key to move the cursor to the required modified compensation
number’s position.

178
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Method 2：after inputting the compensation number, press to position.

3) Input digital value.
A. Offset line:

（1） Absolute axis: press the address keys（ , corresponding axis name’s key），

input the digital value, press on the panel or F1【Measure input】soft key
（displayed value=absolute coordinates －input value）；the system automatically clears
the current wear value after input.

（2）Relative axis: press press the address keys（ , corresponding axis name’s

key），input a digital value, press on the panel or F2【+input】soft key（displayed

value=current numerical value +input value）；

Ⅱ
（3）Absolute axis: axis: press the address keys（ , corresponding axis name’s

Operation
key），press F3【C input】soft key（displayed value=relative value – wear value）；

（4）Press on the panel, input a digital value，press <Input>key.（displayed value=input

value）;

（5）Press on the panel, input a digital value（0～9 integer），press key on the

panel. （displayed value=input value）
B. Wear line：

Relative axis：press , corresponding axis name’s key），input a digital value,

press on the panel or F2 【 +input 】 soft key （ displayed value=current

numerical value +input value）

Note 1：Taking example of T：only input on the panel, other letters are invalid.
Note 2：All operations are mistaken for formats except for the above operations in the offset page.
Note 3：Data color becomes after offset modification, the cursor restores after it is moved or the page is
swtiched.

179
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

3.4.1.2 Offset Value Modification

1）Move the cursor to the required changed tool offset number’s position according to the method
described in Section 3.4.2.1.
2）Require to change X tool offset value, input U. For Z, input W; or select the required changed data

position, press the address key（ , and other corresponding axis name’s key_ to
input the digital value.

3）Press on the panel or F2【+input】. Add the current tool offset value to the input
incremental value. The result is taken as the new tool offset value to display.
Example: the set X tool offset value is 5.678
Input the increment U1.5 by keyboard
The new set X tool offset value is 7.178（=5.678+1.5）
Note 1：When the tool offset is changed, the new offset amount does not take effect immediately. It becomes
valid till its compensation number T code is executed.
Note 2：The user can modify the tool compensation value during the program running, but the mofication is
done before the tool compensation number runs.
Ⅱ
Operation

3.4.2 Workpiece Coordinate Setting Page

Press【 WORK】to enter the coordinate system setting page, and the displayed content is shown
below (See Fig. 3-4-2-1）.
Appendix

Fig. 3-4-2-1
Another 50 additional workpiece coordinate systems can be used besides the 6 standard
workpiece coordinate systems (G54～G59 coordinate systems), as is shown in Fig. 3-4-2-2.
Each coordinate system can be viewed or modified by page keys. See section 4.2.7 Additional

180
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

workpiece coordinate system in PROGRAMMING for details about its operation.

Fig. 3-4-2-2

3.4.2.1 Directly Input (Digit)

Ⅱ
After entering the workpiece coordinate system page, press , to move the

Operation
cursor to the input position, press the input digital value, press to directly input the digit. (as
Fig. 3-4-3-2）

3.4.2.2 Two Methods to Input Coordinates:

Method 1: press , to move the cursor the input position, press the address key

（ , , or other corresponding axis name keys），input digits; press

and the CNC automatically completes count and input the result data;

Method 2: press , to move the cursor the input position, press the address key

（ , , or other corresponding axis name keys），input digits; press the soft

key and the CNC automatically completes count and input the
result data;

Method to search a coordinate system:

181
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

1) In any mode, press key to search after inputting a coordinate system, e.g. inputting
“G56”.

2) In any mode, by inputting ”P6” or ”P06” and then pressing key , the cursor will be
located in the additional workpiece coordinate system ”G54 P06”.

3.4.2.3 A Workpiece Coordinate System Modification

After the system entering the workpiece coordinate system page, press , to the
required data position to modiy, input a digit, press F3【+Input】，add the current workpiece coordinate
system’s offset value to the input value’s increment, and its result is taken as a new coordinate
system’s offset value.(Value=current value+input value) as Fig. 3-4-3-3-1.
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig.3-4-2-3-1

3.4.2.4 Clearing a Workpiece Coordinate System

After the system enters the workpiece coordinate system setting page, the user presses

to clear all workpiece coordinate system’s offset values, and then the system

prompts to require to press , and the deletion is completed. When the deletion is cancelled, 。
<Cancel>key is pressed to cancel the deletion; the user can use the direct input method in this
chapter to set any coordinate system’s axis offset value to 0.

182
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3.4.3 Macro Variables Display, Modification and Setting

3.4.3.1 Macro variable display

Press soft key【 MACRO】 to enter macro variable page, which consists of two subpages:
【CUSTOM】 and 【SYSTEM】. Both of them are available to be viewed and modified by
corresponding soft keys, which is shown below:

1） Customer variable page Press soft key【CUSTOMER】to enter this page.（See 3-4-3-1-1）：

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 3-4-3-1-1

2） System variable page Press soft key【SYSTEM】to enter this page（See Fig.3-4-3-1-2）：

Fig. 3-4-3-1-2
Refer to Section 4.7.2 in PROGRAMMING for the explanation and use of macro variables.

3.4.3.2 Macro Variables Modification and Setting

1) Select <MDI> mode.

183
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

2) Press key , then soft key【 MACRO】to enter macro variable page.
3) Move the cursor to the variable number to be modified.
Method 1: Press page keys to display the page where the variable is to be modified; move
the cursor to the variable to be modified.

Method 2: Press key to search after inputting the variable number.

4) Input a new value using number keys.

5) Press key for confirmation, and then the value will be input and displayed.

3.5 Graphic Display

Press key to enter the graphic page which consists of two subpages:【G. PARA】and
【 GRAPH】. They can be switched between each other by corresponding soft keys. (See Fig.3-5-1)
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-5-1
1） Graphic parameter page: Press soft key【G. PARA】 to enter this page, see Fig.3-5-1.
A. Graphic parameter meaning
AXIS: set drawing plane, with 2 selection modes (0-1), shown in the 2nd line.
Graphic mode: set graphic display mode
Automatic erasion: When it is set to 1, the program graphic is erased automatically at next
cycle start-up after the program is finished.
Scale: set drawing ratio
Graphic center: set the coordinates corresponding to the LCD center in workpiece
coordinate system
The maximum and minimum value: The scaling and the graphic center are automatically
set when the maximum and minimum value of the axis are set.

184
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Maximum value of X axis: the maximum value along X axis in graphics

(Unit: 0.0001mm / 0.0001inch)
Minimum value of X axis: the minimum value along X axis in graphics
(Unit: 0.0001mm / 0.0001inch)
Maximum value of Y axis: the maximum value along Y axis in graphics
(unit: 0.0001mm / 0.0001inch)
Minimum value of Y axis: the minimum value along Y axis in graphics
(Unit: 0.0001mm / 0.0001inch)
Maximum value of Z axis: the maximum value along Z axis in graphics
(Unit: 0.0001mm / 0.0001inch)
Minimum value of Z axis: the minimum value along Z axis in graphics
(Unit: 0.0001mm / 0.0001inch)
Tool post selection: modifying the parameter according to the tool post type is for the sake of
the gragh visually reflecting the machine actuality. There are two kinds of
selection mode (0-1), which is shown as the 2nd line.

B. Setting steps for graphic parameters:

a. Move the cursor to the parameter to be set;
b. Key in the value required;

c. Press key to confirm it.

2）Graphic page Press soft key【 GRAPH】to enter this page（Fig. 3-5-2）：

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-5-2
The machining path of the program being executed can be monitored in graphic page.

A Press soft key【START】or key to enter the DRAW START mode, then sign ”*“ is
placed in front of “S: START”;

B Press【STOP】soft key or key to enter the DRAW STOP mode, then sign‘*’is
moved ahead of “T: STOP”;
C Press soft key 【SWITCH】 to switch the graph display among coordinates corresponding
to 0～1;

185
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

D Press soft key【ERASE】or key to erase the graph drawn.

3.6 Diagnosis Display

The state of DI/DO signals between CNC and machine, the signals transferred between CNC
and PLC, PLC internal data and CNC internal state etc. are displayed in the diagnosis page. Refer to
“GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC, Installation and Connection” for the meaning and setting of each
diagnosis number.
The diagnosis of this part is used to detect the running states of the CNC interface signals and
internal signals rather than modifying the states.

Press key to enter the Diagnose page, which consists of 5 subpages: 【 SIGNAL】,
【SYSTEM】, 【BUS】, 【DSP】 and【 WAVE】. All of them can also be viewed by pressing the
soft keys（See Fig. 3-6-1）.
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-6-1

3.6.1 Diagnosis Data Display

3.6.1.1 Signal Parameter Display

Press【SIGNAL】to enter the signal diagnosis page. The page display content is shown below:
（See Fig. 3-6-1-1-1~Fig. 3-6-1-1-4）。
1. F signal page Press soft key 【F SIGNAL】in <DIAGNOSIS> page to enter diagnosis
(NC→PLC) page. See Fig. 3-6-1-1.

186
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-6-1-1-1
This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system. See “GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC,
Installation and Connection User Manual” for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number.

2. G signal page In <DIAGNOSE> page, press soft key 【 G SIGNAL 】 to enter diagnosis
(PMC—>CNC) page, which is shown in Fig. 3-6-1-2:

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-6-1-1-2
This is the signal sent to CNC system by PLC. See “GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC, Installation
and Connection User Manual” for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number.

3. X signal page Press soft key【X SIGNAL】in <DIAGNOSIS> page to enter diagnosis (MT→PLC)
page, which is shown in Fig. 3-6-1-3:

187
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-6-1-1-3

This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system. See “GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC, Installation
and Connection User Manual” for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number.

4. Y signal page Press soft key 【Y SIGNAL】in <DIAGNOSIS> page to enter （PLC→MT）page,
which is shown in Fig. 3-6-1-4:
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-6-1-1-4
This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system. See “GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC, Installation
and Connection User Manual” for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number.

3.6.1.2 System Parameter Display

Press soft key 【SYSTEM】to enter the system signal diagnosis page, which is shown in Fig.
3-6-1-2-1:

188
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-6-1-2-1

3.6.1.3 Bus Parameter Display

Press soft key 【BUS】to enter the bus signal diagnosis page, which is shown in Fig. 3-6-1-3-1:

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-6-1-3-1

3.6.1.4 DSP Parameter Display

Press soft key【DSP】to enter the system signal diagnosis page, which is shown in Fig. 3-6-1-4-1:

189
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-6-1-4-1

3.6.1.5 Wave Parameter Display

Press soft key【WAVE】to enter the wave page, which is shown in Fig. 3-6-1-5-1.
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-6-1-5-1
AXIS: select the axis for WAVE diagnosis.
WAVE: select the waveform type.
HOR SCALE: select the graph ratio.

Data: In any mode, input corresponding data and press key .

Using key <START> to monitor signals, key <STOP> to stop monitoring signals.

190
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

3.6.2 Signal State Viewing

1) Press key to select the DIAGNOSE page.

2) The respective address explanation and meaning are shown at the lower left corner of the
screen when the cursor is moved left or right.
3） Move the cursor to the target parameter address or key in the parameter address, then press

key to search.
4） In【WAVE】page, the feedrate, acceleration and jerk of each axis can be displayed. It is easy
to debug the system and find the optimum suited parameters for the drive and the motor.

3.7 Alarm Display

When an alarm is issued, “ALARM” is displayed at the lower left corner of the LCD. Press key

to display the alarm page. There are 4 subpages: 【ALARM】, 【USER】, 【HISTORY】
and【OPERATE】, all of which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys（See Fig.3-7-1 to

Ⅱ
Fig.3-7-4）. Whether the page is switched to alarm page when an alarm occurs can also be set by bit
parameter No: 24#6.

Operation
1. Alarm page In <ALARM> page, press soft key【ALARM】to enter this page, which is shown
in Fig.3-7-1.

Fig. 3-7-1
In alarm page, the message of current P/S alarm number is displayed. See details about the
alarm in Appendix 2.
2. User page In <ALARM> page, press soft key 【USER】 to enter external alarm page, which is
shown in Fig. 3-7-2.

191
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-7-2
See “GSK980TC3 CNC System PLC, Installation and Connection User Manual” for the details
about the user alarm.
Note: The external alarm number can be set and edited by users according to the site conditions. The edited
contents of the alarm are input into the system via a transmission software. The external alarm is the A
of edit file LadChi**.txt, and the two digits behind it are set by bit parameters 53.0~53.3. (The default is
01, i.e. the file name is LadChi01.txt )
Ⅱ

3. History page In <ALARM> page, press soft key 【HISTORY】 to enter this page. See Fig. 3-7-3:
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-7-3
In this page, the messages are arranged in chronological order for users’ convenience.

4. OPERATE page In <ALARM> page, press soft key【OPERATE】to enter this page, as is shown
in Fig. 3-7-4:
The OPERATE page displays the modification messages applied to the system parameters and
ladders, e.g. content modification and time modification.

192
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-7-4
OPERATE page can display 34 pages, while HISTORY alarm page can display 9 pages. The
alarm time, alarm numbers, alarm messages and page numbers can be viewed using page keys.

The records of the HISTORY and OPERATE can be deleted by pressing key (system
debugging level or above required).

Ⅱ
Operation
3.8 PLC Display

Press the key to display the PLC page. There are 5 subpages, including 【INFO】,
【 PLCGRA 】, 【 PLCPAR】, 【PLCDGN】and【 PLCTRA 】, which can be viewed by the
corresponding soft keys（See Fig.3-8-1～Fig.3-8-5）.

Fig. 3-8-1

193
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-8-2
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-8-3

194
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-8-4

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 3-8-5
Note: Refer to GSK 980TC3 CNC System PLC Connection and Installation User Manual for the PLC
ladder modification and relevant messages.

3.9 Help Display

Press key to display help page. There are 8 subpages, including 【SYS INFO】,
【OPRT】, 【ALARM】, 【G CODE】, 【PARA】,【MACRO】,【 PLC.AD】and【CALCULA】. All
of them can be viewed by corresponding soft keys（See Fig. 3- 9- 1～3- 9- 12）.

1. System information page In <HELP> page, press soft key【SYS INFO】to enter system
information page (See Fig. 3-9-1):

195
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-9-1
2. OPRT page In <HELP> page, press soft key【OPRT】to enter this page, as is shown in Fig. 3-9-2:
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-9-2
The various operation steps on different pages are described in <HELP> (OPRT) page, you can
get help in the HELP page if you are unfamiliar with some operations.

3. ALARM page In <HELP> page, press soft key【ALARM】to enter this page. See Fig. 3-9-3:

196
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-9-3

The meaning and handling for each alarm number is described in this page.
4. G code page In <HELP> page, press soft key【G. CODE】to enter this page. See Fig. 3-9-4:

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 3-9-4
The definitions of G codes used in system are shown in G code page. Move the cursor to the G
code to be viewed, then its definition is shown at the lower left corner of the page (Fig. 3-9-4). If you

need to know the format and usage of a G code, press key on the panel after selecting the

G code. Press key to return. See Fig. 3-9-5:

197
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-9-5
The formats, functions, explanations and restrictions of codes are introduced in this page. You
can find the corresponding information here if you are unfamiliar with these codes.

5. Parameter page In <HELP> page, press soft key【PARA】to enter this page, as is shown in
Fig.3-10-6:
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

Fig. 3-9-6
The parameter setting for each function is described in the page. If you are not familiar with the
setting, you can find corresponding information here.

6. Macro page In <HELP> page, press soft key【MACRO】 to enter this page, as is shown in
Fig.3-10-7:

198
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

Fig. 3-9-7
The formats and a variety of operation codes of the macro codes are described in this page, and
the setting ranges for local variable, common variable and system variable are also given. If you are
unfamiliar with the macro code operations, you can get corresponding information here.

7. PLC.AD page In <HELP> page, press soft key【PLC.AD】to enter this page. There are four
subpages, including 【F. ADDR】, 【G. ADDR】, 【X. ADDR】and 【Y. ADDR】, as is shown in figures

Ⅱ
3-9-8～3-9-11:

Operation

Fig. 3-9-8

199
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 3-9-9
Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 3-9-10
Appendix

Fig. 3-9-11

The PLC addresses, signs, meanings are described in this page, and you may get the

200
 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting

corresponding information here if you are unfamiliar with these addresses.

8. CALCULA page In <HELP> page, press soft key【CALCULA】to enter this page. See fig.
3-9-12:

Fig. 3-9-1

Ⅱ
Operation

201
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

202
 Chapter 4 Manual Operation

Chapter 4 Manual Operation

Press key to enter Manual mode, which includes manual feed, spindle control and
machine panel control, etc.

4.1 Coordinate Axis Movement

In Manual mode, each axis can be moved at MANUAL feedrate or manual rapid traverse speed
separately.

4.1.1 Manual Feed

X axis can be moved in the positive or negative direction by pressing and holding key

or , and the feedrate can be changed by feedrate override. If the key is released, the X axis

Ⅱ
movement is stopped. That of Z axis is the same. The three axes simultaneous moving is not

Operation
available in this system, but the two axes simultaneous zero return is supported by the system.
Note: The manual feedrate of each axis is set by parameter P98.

4.1.2 Manual Rapid Traverse

Press key to enter Rapid Traverse state with its indicator lighting up. Then press
manual feeding keys to move each axis at the rapid traverse speed.

Note 1: The manual rapid speeds are set by the parameter P170~ P173.
Note 2: Whether manual rapid traverse is effective before reference point return is set by the bit parameter
N0:12#0.

4.1.3 Manual Feedrate and Manual Rapid Traverse Speed Selection

The manual feedrate override, which can be selected by the band switch, is divided into 21 gears
(0%--200%) in Manual feed mode .

In manual rapid traverse, press keys to select the override of

the manual rapid traverse speed. The rapid override is divided into four gears, including Fo，25％，
50％and 100％ (The speed of F0 is set by data parameter P93).
Note: The rapid overrides are effective for the following speed.

203
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

(1) G00 rapid traverse (2) Rapid traverse in canned cycle

(3) Rapid traverse in G28 (4) Manual rapid traverse

Example: If the rapid traverse speed is 6m/min and override is 50%, the actual speed is 3m/min.

4.1.4 Manual Intervention

While a program being executed in Auto, MDI or DNC mode is shifted to MANUAL mode after a
dwell operation, the manual intervention is available. Move the axes manually, then shift the mode to

the previous one after the intervention. When key is pressed to run the program, each axis
returns to the original intervention point rapidly by G00, and the program execution continues.
Explanation:
1. If the single block switch is turned on during return operation, the tool performs single
block stop at the manual intervention point.
2. If an alarm or resetting occurs during the manual intervention or return operation, this
function will be cancelled.
3. Use machine lock, mirror image and scaling functions carefully during manual
intervention.
4. Machining and workpiece shape should be taken into consideration prior to the manual
intervention to prevent tool or machine damage.
The manual intervention operations are shown in the following figure:
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

204
 Chapter 4 Manual Operation

1. The N1 block cuts a workpiece

Tool
N2

Workpiece
N1
Block start point
2. The tool machine is stopped by pressing the feed hold key in the middle of the N 1
block

Tool
N2

Workpiece
N1 A

3、After retracting the tool to point B, tool machine movement is

restarted.
Tool

Ⅱ
Operation
B
Manual intervention
N2

Workpiece
N1 A
4. After automatic return to point A by G00 speed, the remaining moving command
of block N1 is executed.

B
Tool
N2

Workpiece
N1 A

Fig.4-1-4-1

205
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

4.2 Spindle Control

4.2.1 Spindle Rotation CCW

: Specifies S speed in MDI mode; in Manual/MPG/Step mode, press this key to rotate the
spindle counterclockwise.

4.2.2 Spindle Rotation CW

: Specifies S speed in MDI mode; in Manual/MPG/Step mode, press this key to rotate the
spindle clockwise.

4.2.3 Spindle Stop

: In Manual/MPG/Step mode, press this key to stop the spindle.

Ⅱ

4.2.4 Spindle Automatic Gear Shift

Operation

Whether the spindle is frequency conversion control or gear control is set by bit parameter
No:1#2. If parameter No:1#2=1, the spindle auto gear shift is controlled by PLC. Three gears (gear 1
to gear 3) are available in this system, and the maximum speed of each gear is set by parameters
（P246, P247, P248）respectively. NO:1#2=1: the spindle speed is changed by I/O controlling
automatic gear shift. Presently, the system uses the 3-gear control (S1, S2, S3) , which can modify
the ladder diagram adding the gear output. The system will automatically select the corresponding
Appendix

gear after executing S speed code speed.

Spindle motor speed

Max. speed（10V)

Spindle motor max.

clamp speed

Spindle motor
min. clamp speed Spindle rotation
instruction
（S instruction）
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed

Fig.4-2-4-1
Note: When the spindle auto gear shift is effective, the spindle gear is detected by gear
206
 Chapter 4 Manual Operation

in-position signal and S code is executed.

4.3 Other Manual Operations

4.3.1 Cooling Control

: A compound key, used to switch between cooling ON and OFF. ON: the indicator lights up;
OFF: the indicator goes out.

4.3.2 Lubricating Control

: A compound key, used to switch between lubricant ON and OFF. ON: the indicator lights up;
OFF: the indicator goes out.

4.3.3 Chuck Control

：In manual mode, hit the pedal switch and the chuck releases. The chuck state displays

Ⅱ
the release in【POSITION】, and the switch is hit again, the chuck clamps, and the state
displays the clamp.

Operation
4.3.4 Tailstock Control

：switch the machine tailstock forward/backward. The indicator ON means its forward,
and the indicaor OFF means its backward.

4.3.5 Manual Tool Change Control

： In Manual/MPG/STEP mode, press the key and the tool post rotates to the next tool.
Press <PLC> soft key, and then press【+Ladder Para】 to enter【DATA】 page to view
the total quantity.（Refer to the machine tool manufacturer’s user manual）

4.4 Toolsetting Operation

Machining a part generally nees several different tools. Because of the tool installation and tool
offset, when each tool rotates to the cutting position, each tool nose’s position does not completely
coincide. Without considering the tools’ offset when programming, the system sets the tool offset’s
automatic creating’s toolsetting method, which is convenient to the toolsetting operation. After
toolsetting operations, the user compiles only programs according to the part drawing and
processing technology when programming without considering the tools’ offset, and calls the

207
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

corresponding tool compensation values in machining programs. The system sets trial cut
toolsetting, machine zero return toolsetting and other toolsetting modes.

4.4.1 Trial Cut Toolsetting

When the workpiece coordinate system does not change, the trial cut toolsetting can be executed,
which steps shown below: (set the workpiece coordinate system based on the workpiece end face).

Surface B
Surface A

α Z

X
Fig. 4-4-1-1

1. Select any one tool（suppose to be No.1 tool），without tool compensation；

Ⅱ

2. Execute A surface cutting along X negative direction in Manual mode;

3. Release the tool along X positive direction when Z does not move, and stop the spindle
Operation

rotation;

4. Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move the
cursor to select No. 1 offset number as the tool’s offset number;
Appendix

5. Orderly input the address key “Z”, digital key “0” and ；
6. Execute B surface cutting along Z negative direction in Manual mode;
7. Release the tool along Z positive direction when X does not move, and stop the spindle
rotation;
8. Measure the diameter "α’"（suppose α’=30）；

9. Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move the
cursor to select No.1 offset number;

10. Orderly input the address key “X”, digital key “3”, “0” and ；
11. Move the tool to the safety tool change position;
12. Change another tool(suppose to be No. 2 tool), without tool compensation;

208
 Chapter 4 Manual Operation

Surface B1
Surface A1

α’ Z

β’

X
Fig. 4-4-1-2
13. Execute A1 surface cutting along X negative direction in Manual mode;
14. Release the tool along X positive direction when Z does not move, and stop the spindle
rotation;

15. Measure the distance“β”（suppose β=1） between A1 surface and workpice coordinate
system).

16. Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move the
cursor to select No. 2 offset number as the tool’s offset number;

Ⅱ
Operation
17. Orderly input the address key “Z”, sign key “-” and ；

18. Execute B1 surface cutting along Z negative direction in Manual mode;

19. Release the tool along Z positive direction when X does not move, and stop the spindle
rotation;
20. Measure the diameter "α’"（suppose α’=28）；

Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move the
cursor to select No.2 offset number;

21. Orderly input the address key “X”, digital key “2”, “8” and ；
22. For other toolsetting method, repeat the above Step 11～22.

4.4.2 Machine Zero Return Toolsetting

Using the toolsetting method does not require a reference tool or not. When the tool wears or any
one tool is regulated, the user executes the tool’s toolsetting again. Before toolsetting, return to the
machine zero one time (see Chapter 9.1 about the machine zero). After power-off, executing the
machine zero return one time can continue the machining, which operation is convenient.

209
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Surface B
Surface A

α Z

X0

Z0 。Machine zero

Fig.4-4-2-1

Operation step:

1） Press to enter the machine zero return operation mode, press X-axis positive key and
Ⅱ

Z-axis positive key to make two return to the machine zero one time;
Surface B
Operation

Surface A

α Z
Appendix

X
Fig. 4-4-2-2

2） Select any one tool（suppose to be No.1 tool）, without tool compensation;

3） Execute A surface cutting along X negative direction in Manual mode;
4） Release the tool along X positive direction when Z does not move, and stop the spindle rotation;

5） Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move the
cursor to select No. 1 offset number as the tool’s offset number;

6） Orderly input the address key “Z”, digital key “0” and ;
7） Execute B surface cutting along Z negative direction in Manual mode;
8） Release the tool along Z positive direction when X does not move, and stop the spindle

210
 Chapter 4 Manual Operation

rotation;
9） Measure the diameter "α’"（suppose α’=30）;

10） Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move the
cursor to select No.1 offset number;

11） Orderly input the address key “X”, digital key “3”, “0” and ;
12） Move the tool to the safety tool change position;
13） Change another tool(suppose to be No. 2 tool), without tool compensation;
Surface B1
Surface A1

α’ Z

β’

Ⅱ
X
Fig.4-4-3-3

Operation
14） Execute A1 surface cutting along X negative direction in Manual mode;
15） Release the tool along X positive direction when Z does not move, and stop the spindle
rotation;
16） Measure the distance“β”（suppose β=1） between A1 surface and workpice coordinate
system);

17） Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move
the cursor to select No. 2 offset number as the tool’s offset number;

18） Orderly input the address key “Z”, sign key “-”digital key “1” and ;
19） Execute B1 surface cutting along Z negative direction in Manual mode;
20） Release the tool along Z positive direction when X does not move, and stop the spindle
rotation;
21） Measure the diameter "α’"（suppose α’=28）;

22） Press to enter the offset page display mode, press , to move
the cursor to select No.2 offset number;

211
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

23） Orderly input the address key “X”, digital key “2”, “8” and ;
24） For other toolsetting method, repeat the above Step 12～23.

4.5 Tuning a Tool Compensation Value

Tuning a tool compensation value uses only U, W input.

Example: X-axis tool compensation value needs to increase 0.010mm. Press to enter

the offset page display mode, press , move the cursor to select 001’s some

offset number, input U0.010, and press to complete the operation, and the system
automatically adds 0.010mm to the previous tool compensation value.
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

212
 Chapter 5 Step Operation

Chapter 5 Step Operation

5.1 Step Feed

Press key to switch the MPG mode and STEP mode. Pressing it every time can switch
the two mode. In step feed mode, the machine moves by the selected step each time.

5.1.1 Selection of Moving Amount

Press any of keys to select a moving increment, then the

increment will be shown on the screen. A step of 0.100 is displayed in <POSITION> page(See Fig.
5-1-1-1):

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 5-1-1-1
By pressing the moving key each time, the corresponding axis on the machine is moved 0.1 mm.

5.1.2 Selection of Moving Axis and Direction

X axis may be moved in the positive or negative direction by pressing axis and direction key

or . Press the key once, the corresponding axis will be moved for a step distance
defined by system. The operation for Z axis is identical with that of X axis. Simultaneous manual
moving for 2 axes is unavailable in this system, but simultaneous zero return for 2 axes is available.

5.1.3 Step Feed Explanation

The step feed max. clamp speed is set by data parameter P155.

213
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

The step feedrate is beyond the control of the feedrate and rapid override.

5.2 Auxiliary Control in Step Mode

It is the same as that of Manual mode. See Sections 4.2 and 4.3 in this manual for details.
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

214
 Chapter 6 MPG Operation

Chapter 6 MPG Operation

Press key to switch the MPG mode and STEP mode. Pressing it every time can switch
the two mode. In step feed mode, the machine moves by the selected step each time.

6.1 MPG Feed

Press to select the movement increment. The movement

increment is displayed in the page. Press the key 25% and the system displays the MPG increment:
0.100 in <POS> page.（See 6-1-1）：

Ⅱ
Operation
Fig. 6-1-1

6.1.1 Selection of Moving Axis and Direction

In MPG mode, select the moving axis to be controlled by the MPG, and press the corresponding key

（ , , , ）, then you can move the axis by the MPG. In MPG mode, if X

axis is to be controlled by the MPG, press key , then you can move the X axis by rotating the
MPG. Generally speaking, the MPG CW rotation is the feed’s positive direction and the MPG CCW
rotation is the feed’s negative direction.
The feed direction is controlled by MPG rotation direction. See the manual provided by the
machine tool builder for details. In general, MPG CW rotation indicates the positive feed, while CCW
rotation indicates the negative feed.

215
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

6.1.2 MPG Feed Explanation

1. The relationship between MPG scale and machine moving amount is as follows:

Table 6-1-2-1
Moving amount per MPG scale
MPG increment （mm） 0.001 0.01 0.1
Machine moving amount (mm) 0.001 0.01 0.1
MPG increment （inch） 0.001 0.01 0.1
Machine moving amount (inch) 0.0001 0.001 0.01

2. The values in the table above vary with the mechanical transmission. See the manual provided by
the machine tool builder for details.
3. No.17#5 is set to 1, the MPG moving amount selects complete run. The rotation speed of the MPG
cannot exceed 5r/s, otherwise, the scale and the moving amount may be inconsistent.

6.2 Control in MPG Interruption

6.2.1 MPG Interruption Operation

In auto, MDI mode, press 【 ALL 】 soft key in 【 POS 】 page to enter the all page, press
{【OPERATION】and then press【INTERRUPT ON】. Selecting the panel MPG axis number can enter
Ⅱ

the MPG interruption state to execute the MPG interruption operation. Press【INTERRUPT SWITCH】
Operation

one time, the system exits the MPG.

When the system enters the MPG interruption state, , , , is

selected to execute the axis selection. When some axis’ MPG interruption axis selection signal is “1”，
rotating the MPG can perform the axis’ MPG interruption, gear amount in the MPG interruption state
is the same the MPG feed equivalent.
The speed in the MPG interruption state is a sum of the speed in automatic run and the traverse
speed in the MPG interruption state. But the added speed is controlled within the range of being
Appendix

than or equal to the upper speed of the axis’ cutting feed. For example, when the MPG’s upper limit
is 2000mm/min, and the current federate is 2000mm/min, the MPG interruption speed range is
4000 ～ 0mm/min (the negative means the MPG interruption direction is opposite to the feed
direction)
（The coordinate system for MPG interruption is shown in Fig.6-2-1-2.）

216
 Chapter 6 MPG Operation

Fig. 6-2-1-2

Steps to clear MPG interruption coordinate system: Press , move the cursor upward and

downward till the MPG interruption coordinate X flickers, and press key , then the coordinate
system is cleared. The operations for Y and Z axes are the same as above; when the zero return

Ⅱ
operation is performed, the coordinate system is cleared automatically too.

Operation
Note: When the MPG interruption function is used to adjust the coordinate system, if an alarm or resetting
occurs, the function is cancelled.

6.2.2 Relationship between MPG Interruption and Other Functions

When the axis moves by MPG interruption, the actual position of movement axis changes, the
machine coordinates update and the absolute coordinates do not update. So after the MPG
interruption, the slide moves and the machine coordinate system does not change, but the workpiece
coordinate system does not offset.
Table 6-2-2-1
Display Relationship
After machine lock is effective, the machine movement
Machine lock
by using MPG interruption is ineffective.
MPG interruption does not change the absolute
Absolute coordinate value
coordinate values.
MPG interruption does not change the relative
Relative coordinate value
coordinate values.
The change amount of the machine coordinate value is
Machine coordinate value
the displacement amount caused by MPG rotation.

Note: The moving amount of MPG interruption is cleared when the manual reference point return is
performed for each axis.

217
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

6.2.3 MPG Interruption Amount Cancel

The MPG interruption makes the machine coordinate system offset’s workpiece coordinate
system return to the workpiece coordinate system which is prior to the offset, which is called the
interruption amount cancel.
When the interruption amount cancel operation is performed, the workpiece coordinate system
offsets only the MPG interruption amount’s amount, and then the MPG interruption amount is
reflected to the absolute coordinate value.
The workpiece coordinate offset created by MPG interruption is shown below:
Ⅱ
Operation

After the MPG interruption is cancelled, the workpiece coordinate system recovers to the state
which is prior to the interruption, but the actual position does not change, which is shown below:
Appendix

The interruption amount can be cancelled in the followings:

z When the manual reference point is returned
z G28 is specified without establishing a reference point
z Pess [INTERRUPT ZERO] to execute the interruption amount clear

218
 Chapter 6 MPG Operation

6.3 Auxiliary Control in MPG Mode

The auxiliary operation in MPG mode is identical with that in JOG mode. See Sections 4.2 and
4.3 for details.

6.4 MPG Trial Cut Function

Manually rotating the MPG controls the part program run, and the user can operate the machine
along the machining program commanding the tool path. The function is mainly used to the
workpiece trail-cut and check machining programs.

Operation method:

In Auto mode, open the MPG trial cut, press to make each axis not to move, at the
moment, rotating the MPG controls the part program run. The faster the MPG rotates, the faster the
program execution speed is, and vice versa. Each pulse’s movement amount can be adjusted by the
rapid override.

When the system is in MPG trial cut mode, is pressed, the system returns to Auto mode.
All operations in MPG trail cut mode are the same as those in Auto mode.
Speed when the system runs the interpolation command in MPG trial cut state:

Ⅱ
G0：current rapid override X MPG override X MPG speed

Operation
G1：cutting override X MPG override X MPG speed
Note 1：After the MPG trial cut function is started, it is valid.
Note 2：Executing the single block pause is valid in single block mode.

219
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

220
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

Chapter 7 Auto Operation

7.1 Selection of the Auto Run Programs

1. Program loading in auto mode

(a) Press key to enter the Auto mode;

(b) Press key to enter the 【DIR】page, move the cursor to find the target program;

(c) Press key for confirmation.

2. Program loading in Edit mode

Ⅱ
Operation
(a) Press key to enter the Edit mode;

(b) Press key to enter the【DIR】page, move the cursor to find the target program;

(c) Press key for confirmation.

(d) Press key to enter the Auto mode;

7.2 Auto Run Start

After selecting the program using the two methods in section 7.1 above, press key to
execute the program automatically. The execution of the program can be viewed by switching to
<POSITION>, <MONI>, <GRAPH> etc. pages.

The program execution is started from the line where the cursor is located, so it is recommended
to check whether the cursor is located at the program to be executed and whether the modal values

are correct before pressing key . If the cursor is not located at the start line from which the

program is started, press key , and then key to run the program automatically

221
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

from the start line.

Note: The workpiece coordinate system and reference offset values cannot be modified during program
execution in Auto mode.

7.3 Auto Run Stop

In Auto run, to stop the program being automatically executed, the system provides five
methods:
1. Program stop (M00)
After the block containing M00 is executed, the auto running pauses and the modal message is

saved. After key is pressed, the program execution continues.

2. Program optional stop (M01)

If key is pressed before the program execution, the automatic running pauses and the
modal message is saved when the block containing M01 is executed in the program. After key

is pressed, the program execution is continued.

Ⅱ

3. Pressing key
Operation

If key is pressed during the auto running, the machine states are as follows:
1) Machine feeding slows down and stops;
2) Dwell continues if Dwell (G04 code) is executed;
3) The other modal message is saved;
Appendix

4）The program execution continues after key is pressed.

4. Pressing key
See Section 2.3.1 in this manual.
5. Pressing Emergency Stop button
See Section 2.3.2 in this manual.

In addition, if the control is switched to other mode from Auto mode, DNC mode or MDI page of
MDI mode in which the program is being executed, the machine can also be stopped.
The steps are as follows:
1）If the control is switched to Edit, MDI, DNC mode, the machine stops after the current block is
executed.
2）If the control is switched to MANUAL, MPG, Step mode, the machine interruption stops
immediately.
3）If the control is switched to Machine zero interface, the machine slows down to stop.

222
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

7.4 Auto Running from any Block

This system allows the auto run to start from any block of the current program. The steps are
shown as follows:

1. Press key to enter Manual mode, start spindle and other miscellaneous functions;
2. Execute the modal values of the program in MDI mode, and ensure the modal values are correct;

3. Press key to enter Edit mode, and press key to enter program page, then find
the program to be machined in【DIR】.
4. Open the program, and move the cursor to the block to be executed;

5. Press key to enter Auto mode;

Ⅱ
6. Press key to execute the program automatically.

Operation
Note 1: Before execution, confirm the current coordinate point is the end position of the last block
(confirmation for the current coordinate point is unnecessary if the block to be executed is absolute
programming and contains G00/G01);
Note 2: If the block to be executed is for tool change operation, etc, ensure no interference and collision
occur between the current position and workpiece in a bid to prevent machine damage and personnel
hurt.

7.5 Dry Run

Before the machining by a program, use “Dry Run” (usually in combination with “M.S.T. Lock” or
“Machine Lock”) to check the program.

Press key to enter Auto mode, and press key (that the indicator on the key lights
up means Dry Run state is entered).
In rapid feed, the program speed equals to Dry Run speed × rapid feed override.
In cutting feed, the program thread’s actual cutting speed=F*S（S is a programmed value）F/S is the
current mode.

Note 1: The Dry Run speed is set by data parameter P86;

Note 2: In cutting feed, whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO:12#6;
Note 3: In rapid positioning, whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO: NO:12#7.

7.6 Single Block Execution

223
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

“Single Block” can be selected for checking the execution of a block.

In Auto, or MDI mode, press key (that the indicator on the key lights up means single
block execution state is entered). In single block execution, the system stops after the execution of a

single block. Press key to execute the next block, and perform the operation like this
repeatedly till the whole program is executed.
Note 1: In G28 mode, the single block stop can be performed at an intermediate point.

Note 2: In single block ON, execute G90, G92, G70—G75.

Table 7-6-1
G code Tool path Explanation
4 4
Operation 1～4
1 3 1 as one cycle.
G90
3 Stop after
2 operation 4 ends
2
4 4 Operation 1～4
1 as one cycle.
G92 3 1
3 Stop after
Ⅱ

2 2 operation 4 ends
Operation

1 1 Operation 1～4
2 as one cycle.
G94 4 2 4 Stop after
3 3 operation 4 ends

Operation 1～7
as one cycle.
Appendix

G70
Stop after
operation 7 ends

4
3
2 1

21 7
8
Operation 1～4，
6 5
5～8，9～12，
12
G71， 21 11
10
9 13～16，17～20
G72 21 16 as one cycle.
15
13
14
Stop after the
21 20
19
18 17 cycle ends.
21

Note: the drawing is for G71, which is the same as G72.

224
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

6 Operation 1～6
5
4 as one cycle.
G73 3 1
2 Stop after the
cycle ends.

9 1
Operation 1～10
G74， 2 as one cycle.
10
G75 Stop after the
cycle ends.

11 9
10
5 Operation 1～4，
7 6 5～8，9～12 as
G76 3 1 one cycle. Stop
2
after the cycle

Ⅱ
ends.

Operation
4(8/12)

7.7 Machine Lock Run

In <AUTO> mode, press key (that the indicator on the key lights up means the current
Machine lock state is entered). In this mode, the axes on the machine do not move, but the position
along each axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving. In addition, M, S and T functions
can be executed. This function is for checking a program.

7.11 MST Lock Run

In <AUTO> mode, press key (that the indicator on the panel lights up means MST
lock state is entered). In this state, M, S and T codes are not executed. This function is used together
with Machine Lock to check a program.
Note: M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99 are executed even in MST lock state.

7.11 Feedrate and Rapid Speed Override in Auto Run

In <AUTO> mode, the ٛ ederate and rapid traverse speed can be overridden by the system.

In auto run, press keys to select the rapid traverse speed with
gears Fo, 25％, 50％ and 100％.

225
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

In auto run, the ٛ ederate override, which is divided into 21 gears, can be selected by pressing

keys .

Note 1: Value specified by F in ٛ ederate override program

The actual federate = Value specified by F X ٛ ederate override
Note 2: The rapid traverse speed overridden by data parameter P88, P89, P90 and rapid override is calculated
as follows:
X actual rapid traverse speed = Value specified by P88 X rapid override
The calculation methods for Z axis are the same as that X .

7.11 Spindle Speed Override in Auto Run

In auto run, the spindle speed can be overridden if it is controlled by analog quantity.

The spindle override, which is classified into 8 gears from 50％～120％, can be adjusted by pressing

spindle override keys , in auto mode.

Ⅱ
Operation

The spindle speed override increases by one gear (10%) till 120％ by pressing key
each time.

The spindle speed decreases by one gear (10%) by pressing key once. When it
decreases to 50%, the spindle stops.
Appendix

7.11 Background Edit in Auto Run

The background edit function during processing is supported in this system.

During the program execution in Auto mode, press key <PROGRAM> to enter the program page,
then press soft key【◆PRG】to enter the background edit page, as is shown in Fig.7-11-1:

226
 Chapter 7 Auto Operation

Fig. 7-11-1
Press soft key【B.EDT】to enter the program background edit page. The program editing

Ⅱ
operation is the same as that in Edit mode (Refer to Chapter 10 Programming Edit Operation). Press
soft key【B.END】to save the edited program and exit this page.

Operation
In Auto mode, press【CHECK】sofy key to check programs.

Note1: It is suggested that the file size in background edit be not more than 3000 lines, otherwise the
processing effect will be affected.
Note2: Foreground program can be opened but can not be edited or deleted in background edit.
Note3: No running foreground program can be edited in background edit.

227
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

228
 Chapter 8 MDI Operation

Chapter 8 MDI Operation

Besides the input and modification for parameters and offsets, the MDI operation function is
also provided in MDI mode. The codes can be input directly using this function. The data input,
parameter and offset modification etc. are described in “CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA
MODIFICATION AND SETTING”. This chapter will describe the MDI operation function in MDI
mode.

8.1 MDI Block Input

Input in MDI mode：

1. The system can continuously input many block;
The input in 【MDI】type is identical with the program input in Edit mode. See “CHAPTER 10
PROGRAM EDIT” in this manual for details.
As shown in Fig. 8-1-1：

Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 8-1-1

8.2 MDI Block Execution and Stop

After the codes are input according to the steps in Section 8.1, press key to execute
them in MDI mode. During the execution, the code execution can be stopped by pressing key

.
Note 1: MDI execution must be performed in MDI mode.
Note 2: MDI program editing up to 60 blocks.

229
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

8.3 MDI Word Value Modification and Deletion

If a mistake occurs during the input, press key to cancel it; if a mistake is detected after

the input, re-input the contents to replace the wrong ones or press key to delete all the
contents and then input them again.

8.4 Operation Modes Conversion

In Auto, MDI mode, when the control is converted to MDI, DNC, Auto or Edit mode during the
program execution, the system stops the execution of the program after the current block is executed.
When the control is switched to Step mode by a dwell during the program execution in Auto, MDI
mode, the step interruption is executed (See section 6.2 Step interruption). If the control is switched
to MANUAL mode by a dwell, the manual intervention is executed (See Section 4.1.4 Manual
Interruption).
When the control is directly switched to Step, MPG, MANUAL or Zero Return mode during the
program execution in Auto, MDI, DNC mode, the system executes deceleration and stop.
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

230
 Chapter 9 Zero Return Operation

Chapter 9 Zero Return Operation

9.1 Concept of Machine Zero (Mechanical Zero)

The machine coordinate system is the inherent coordinate system of the machine. The origin of
the machine coordinate system is called machine zero (mechanical zero), which is also called
reference point in this manual. It is usually fixed at the maximum stroke point of X axis, Y axis and Z
axis. This origin is determined as a fixed point after the design, manufacture and adjustment of the
machine. As the machine zero is unknown at power-on, the auto or manual machine zero return is
usually performed.

9.2 Program Zero Return

To be convenient programming, the programming personnel uses a workpiece coordinate

system(called a part coordinate system) in programming, selects some point as a program zero (the
point is specified by G50, called a program zero) to create a workpiece coordinate system.

9.2.1 Steps for Machine Zero Return

Ⅱ
Operation
1. Press to enter Machine Zero Return mode, then “machine zero return” is displayed
at the lower right corner of the LCD screen.

2. Select axis X, or Z for machine zero return.

3. The worktable moves along the program zero direction. When it returns to the program zero,

the coordinate axis stops move, the zero return indicator is OFF.
Note 1：G50 must be executed after the system is turned on, otherwise, #0097 alarm occurs.

Note 2：The program zero return is executed when the machine lock is valid, the absolute coordinates
return to the position set by G50 but the machine coordinates do not change.

Note 3：After NO：6#5 is set to 0，a program commands G28 zero return because the check stroke block
is equivalent to the manual machine zero return.

9.3 Bus Servo Zero Return Function Setting

There are two zero return methods when the system is allocated with a bus servo: common zero
return, absolute setting zero. The two setting methods are introduced below:

9.3.1 Common Zero Return

No：0#0=1，the system executes a common zero return, select the zero return mode of signal
per rotaton or the zero return without signal per rotation. The zero return mode is used to the system
matched with GE2000 series incremental mode. Each axis’ zero return is valid in zero return mode.

231
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Operation steps of bus servo machine zero return:

1. Press to enter Machine Zero Return mode, then “machine zero return” is displayed
at the lower right corner of the LCD screen;
2. Select axis X, or Z for machine zero return, the direction of which is set by bit parameter
No.:7#0～N0:7#4;
3. When it moves towards the machine zero, the machine traverses rapidly (traverse speed set
by data parameter No.100 ～ No.104) before the deceleration point is reached. After the
deceleration switch is touched, P342~P346 sets each axis’ zero return speed. After it is away
from the block, it moves to the machine zero point (i.e. reference point ) at a speed of FL(set
by data parameter P099). As the machine zero is reached, the coordinate axis movement
stops and the Machine Zero indicator lights up.

9.3.2 Absolute Zero Setting and Zero Return

Set No：0#0=1, No：20#7=1, No：20#6=1: the system is allocated with GE2000 series version.
The user manually moves each axis to its machine zero. Then in MDI mode, No：21#0=1, set the
1st axis’ zero point position; No：21#1=1: set the 2nd axis zero point position; No：21#2=1: set the
3rd axis’ zero point’ position; No：21#3=1: the 4th axis’ zero point’ position; No：21#4=1: the 5th
axis’ zero point’ position. In zero return mode, each axis’ zero return indicator is ON, and the
machine zero setting succeeds.
Note：The method to set zero is complicated. Please set zero in the bus allocation page.
Ⅱ

The zero return mode can be directly set in【 BUS ALLOCATION】. See Section 3.3.5 Bus
Operation

Sero Parameter Display, Modification, Setting.

Example:

For the absolute encoder sets the zero, the user can set the zero point position by the motor
feedback’s absolute position. Set #20.7=1， #20.6=1. See Fig. 9-3-2-1.
Appendix
Positive limit
Negative limit

Set zero between positive and negative hard limit

Fig. 9-3-2-1 absolute encoder zero setting

Note 1：The user must not execute the machine zero return when the machine is not installed with a zero return
decelerationswitch or a machine zero.
Note 2：The corresponding axis’ indicator is ON when the machine zero return ends.
Note 3：The zero return indicator is OFF when the correspond axis is not on the machine zero.
Note 4：Refer to the machine manufacturer’s user manual about the machine zero (reference point) direction.
Note 5：The user must not modify each axis’ zero return direction, feed axis direction and gear ratio after the machine
zero is set.
Note 6：Parameters relevant with the machine zero and all machine zero return modes are referred to Section 4.8. .

232
 Chapter 10 Edit Operation

Chapter 10 Edit Operation

10.1 Program Edit

The edit for part programs should be operated in Edit mode. Press key to enter Edit

mode; Press key to enter program page, and press soft key 【 PROGRAM】to enter the
program editting and modification page (see Fig. 10-1-1):

Ⅱ
Operation
Press 【X】to enter the next page

Press 【X】to enter the next page

Press 【W】to return to the last page

Fig. 10-1-1
The replacement, cut, copy, paste, reset operations, etc. can be done by pressing the
corresponding soft keys.
The program switch must be turned on before program editing. See Section 3.3.1 Parameter and
program switch page in this manual for its operation.

Note 1: A program contains no more than 100,000 lines.

Note 2: As is shown in fig. 10-1-1, if there is more than 1 sign “/” ahead of a block, the system will skip the
block even if the block skip function is not turned on.
Note 3: It is forbidden to switch the control to other mode when the Check function is performed in Auto
mode, or unexpected results will occur.
During Check in Auto mode, if there is a sign “/” ahead of a block, the Check function is performed
for this block regardless of whether the skip function is ON.

233
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

10.1.1 Program Creation

10.1.1.1 Sequence Number Automatic Creation

Set the “AUTO SEQ” to 1 according to the method described in Section 3.3.1. See fig.
10-1-1-1-1.

Fig. 10-1-1-1-1
Ⅱ

In this way, the sequence number will be automatically inserted into the blocks during program editing.
The incremental amount of the sequence number is set by its corresponding parameter.
Operation

10.1.1.2 Program Content Input

1. Press key to enter Edit mode;

Appendix

2. Press key to enter program page. See fig. 10-1-1-2-1:

Fig. 10-1-1-2-1

234
 Chapter 10 Edit Operation

3. Press address key , and key in numerical keys , , ,

and in sequence (an example of setting up a program name of O00002

here), then O00002 is displayed behind the DATA column (See Fig. 10-1-1-2-2):

Fig. 10-1-1-2-2

Ⅱ
Operation
4. Press key to set up the new program name, as is shown in Fig.10-1-1-2-3:

Fig. 10-1-1-2-3
5. Input the written program word by word. After the input, the program will be saved
automatically when the control is switched to other operation modes. However, if the control

needs to be switched to other pages (e.g. page ), first press key to save
the program and then finish the input of the program.

235
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Note 1: Pure numerical value input is unavailable in Edit mode.

Note 2: If a wrong code word is detected during program inputting, press key to cancel the
code.

Note 3: No more than 65 characters can be input in one block each time.

10.1.1.3 Search of Sequence Number, Word and Line Number

The sequence number search operation is used to search for a sequence number from which the
program execution and edit are usually started. Those blocks skipped because of the search have no
effect on the CNC state (This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates, M, S, T
and G codes does not affect the CNC coordinates and modal values).
If the execution is started from a block searched in a program, it is required to check the machine
and CNC states. The execution can only be performed when both the states are consistent with its
corresponding M, S, T codes and coordinate system setting, etc (set in MDI mode).
The word search operation is used to search a specific address word or number, and it is usually
used for editing a program.

Steps for the search of sequence number, word and line number in a program:
Ⅱ

1. Select mode: <Edit > or <Auto>

2. Look up the target program in 【DIR】page;
Operation

3. Press key to enter the target program;

4. Key in the word or sequence number to be searched and press key or

to search for it.
Appendix

5. When needing to search a line number in a program, press key .

Note 1: The search function is automatically cancelled when the search for sequence number and word is
performed to the end of a program.
Note 2: The searching for sequence number, word and line number can be performed in either【AUTO】or
【EDIT】mode, but in【AUTO】mode, it can only be performed in the background edit page.

10.1.1.4 Location of the Cursor

Select Edit mode, then press key to display the program.

a) Press key to move the cursor upward a line, if the column where the cursor is
located exceeds the end column of the last line, the cursor moves to the end of the last
line.

236
 Chapter 10 Edit Operation

b) Press key to move the cursor downward a line. If the column where the cursor is
located exceeds the end column of the next line, the cursor moves to the end of the next
line.

c) Press key to move the cursor one column to the right. If it is located at the end
of the line, the cursor moves to the beginning of the next line.

d) Press key to move the cursor one column to the left. If the cursor is at the
beginning of the line, it moves to the end of the last line.

e) Press key to scroll screen upward to move the cursor to the last
screen.

f) Press key to move the screen downward to move the cursor to the next
screen.

g) Press key to move the cursor to the beginning of the line where it is located.

Ⅱ
Operation
h) Press keys + to return the cursor to the beginning of the program.

i) Press key to move the cursor to the end of the line where it is located.

j) Press keys ＋ to move the cursor to the end of the program.

k) Double click to switch the two letters.

10.1.1.5 Insertion, Deletion and Modification of a Word

Select <EDIT> mode, press key to display the program, then locate the cursor to the
position to be edited.

1. Word insertion

After inputting the data, press key to insert the data to the left of the cursor.

2．Word deletion

237
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Locate the cursor to the word to be deleted, press key to delete the word where the
cursor is located.

3．Word modification

Move the cursor to the place to be modified, input the new contents, then press key to
replace the old contents by the new ones.

10.1.1.6 Single Block Deletion

Select <EDIT> mode, then press key to display the program. Locate the cursor to the

beginning of the block to be deleted. Press keys + to delete the block where the
cursor is located.
Ⅱ

Note: Regardless of whether there is a sequence number in the block, the user can press key to
delete it (The cursor should be located at the beginning of the line).
Operation

10.1.1.7 Deletion of Many Blocks

Blocks deletion from the current displayed word to the block of which the sequence number is
specified.
Appendix

N100 X100.0 M03 S2000; ..... N2233 S02 ; N 2300 M30 ;

Cursor current position
Area to be deleted

Fig.10-1-1-7-1

Select <EDIT> mode, press key to display the program. Locate the cursor to the
beginning of the target position to be deleted (as the position of word N100 in the figure above), then
key in the last word of the many blocks to be deleted, e.g. S02 (See Fig.10-1-1-7-1), finally press key

, “the system prompts: press again to execute deletion”. Press on the

panel to delete the blocks from the current cursor location to the address specified.

Note 1: Up to 100,000 lines of blocks can be deleted.

Note 2: If the last word to be deleted occurs many times in a program, the system will delete the blocks till the
word nearest to the cursor location.
Note 3: When use N+ sequence numbers to delete program blocks, make sure that the initial start places of

238
 Chapter 10 Edit Operation

the N+ sequence numbers locate before the first lines of the blocks.

10.1.1.8 Deletion of Words

Words deletion from the current displayed word to the one specified.

N100 X100.0 M03 S2000 ; G01X50.0Y100.0N2233 S02;

Cursor current positon
Area to be deleted

Fig. 10-1-1-8-1

Select <EDIT> mode, press key to display the program. Locate the cursor to the beginning
of the target position to be deleted (as the position of word N100 in the figure above),then key in
the last word of the words to be deleted, e.g. Y100.0 (See Fig.10-1-1-8-1), finally press key

, “the system prompts: press again to execute deletion”. Press on the

panel to delete the blocks from the current cursor location to the address specified.

Ⅱ
Operation
10.1.2 Deletion of a Single Program

The steps for deleting a program in memory are as follows:

a) Select <EDIT> mode;
b) Enter program display page. There are two ways to delete a program:

1. Key in address key ; key in the program name ( e.g. for program O0002, key in number

Keys , , , ); press key , the corresponding program in

memory will be deleted.

2. Select 【DIR】subpage in program page, and select the program name to be deleted by moving the

cursor, then press key . Here, “Delete the current file?” is prompted on the system state

column, press key again, then “Deletion succeeded” is prompted and the program
selected is deleted.

Note: If there is only one program file, by pressing key Delete, its name will be changed to O00001 first and
then the contents be deleted in Edit (DIR) page regardless of whether it is O00001 or not; if there are
multiple program files, the contents of program O00001 as well as its program name are deleted.

239
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

10.1.3 Deletion of all Programs

The steps for deleting all programs in memory are as follows:

a) Select <EDIT> mode;

b) Enter the program page;

c) Key in address ;

d) Key in address keys , , , , , in

sequence;

e) Press key to delete all the programs saved in memory.

10.1.4 Copy of a Program

Steps for copying the current program and saving it with a new name:

a) Select <EDIT> mode;

b) Enter the program page; select the program to be copied using the cursor in【DIR】subpage,
Ⅱ
Operation

and press key to enter the program display page;

c) Press address key , and input the new program name;

d) Press soft key 【COPY】to finish the file copying and enter the edit page for the new
program;
Appendix

e) Return to【DIR】can view the new copied program name.

The copy of a program can also be done in the program edit page (shown in Fig. 10-1-1 ):

1. Press address key and key in the new program number;

2. Press soft key【COPY】to finish the file copying and enter the edit page for the new program.
3. Return to 【DIR】page to view the new copied program name.

10.1.5 Copy and Paste of Blocks

Steps for copying and pasting blocks:

a）Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied;

b）Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied;

c）Press keys + , the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be
copied.

240
 Chapter 10 Edit Operation

d）Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted, press keys + or soft key
【PASTE】 to complete the paste.
The copy and paste of the blocks can also be done in the program edit page (see fig. 10-1-1):
1. Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied;
2. Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied;
3. Press soft key【COPY】to finish copying the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in.
4. Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted, press soft key 【PASTE】to complete the
paste.

Note 1: If the last character keyed in occurs many times in the program, the system will copy the blocks till the
word nearest to the cursor location.
Note 2: If the blocks are copied with method N+sequence number, the blocks from the cursor to the N +
sequence number are copied. The N+sequence number must be at the beginning of the block, or the
copy will fail.
Note 3: 10,000 lines of blocks can be copied at most.

10.1.6 Cut and Paste of Blocks

Steps for cutting blocks are as follows:

a） Enter the program edit page (as Fig.10-1-1);
b） Locate the cursor to the beginning of the block to be cut;
c） Key in the last character of the block to be cut;
d） Press soft key【CUT】to cut the block into clipboard.

Ⅱ
e) Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted, and press soft key【PASTE】to finish block
pasting.

Operation
Note 1: If the last character keyed in occurs many times in the program, the system will cut the blocks from
the cursor to the word nearest to the cursor.
Note 2: If the blocks are cut with method N+sequence number, the blocks from the cursor to the N sequence
number are cut.
Note 3: in the EDIT, if the program name is in the same block with program content, the system can copy the
words after the program name but can not cut them.

10.1.7 Block Replacement

Steps for replacing a block are as follows:

a）Enter the program edit page(Fig.10-1-1);
b）Locate the cursor to the character to be replaced;
c）Key in the new character;
d）Press soft key【REPLACE】to replace the character where the cursor is located as well as
other identical characters in the block by the new one.
Note: This replacement operation is only for characters, but not for an entire block.

10.1.8 Rename of a Program

Step for renaming the current program to another one:

a) Select <EDIT> mode;
b) Enter the program page（the cursor specifies a program name with the cursor）;

c) Press address key to key in the new name;

241
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

d) Press key to complete the renaming.

10.2 Program management

10.2.1 Program Directory Search

Press key , then press soft key 【DIR 】 to enter the program directory page （ See
Fig.10-2-1-1）:
Ⅱ
Operation

Fig. 10-2-1-1
Appendix

1) Open a program
Open a specified program: O+sequence number+ key ENTER (or key EOB), or sequence
number + key ENTER (or key EOB)
In Edit mode, if the sequence number input does not exist, a new program will be created.

2) Deletion of a program:
1. In Edit mode, press key DEL to delete the program where cursor is located.
2. In Edit mode, press O+ sequence number + DEL, or sequence number + DEL

10.2.2 Number of Stored Programs

Not more than 400 programs can be stored in this system. The number of the stored programs
can be viewed in the program directory page (program information) in Fig. 10.2.1.

10.2.3 Storage Capacity

The storage capacity can be viewed in the program directory page in Fig. 10.2.1.

242
 Chapter 10 Edit Operation

10.2.4 Viewing of Program List

One program directory page can display 6 CNC program names at most. If there are more than 6
names, it is unavailable to display them all in one page. Here, you can press the PAGE key to display
the remaining names on the next page. If the Page key is pressed repeatedly, all the CNC program
names are displayed circularly on LCD.

10.2.5 Program Lock

The program switch is provided in this system to prevent the user programs from being modified
by unauthorized personnel. After the program editing, turn off the program switch to lock the program,
thus disabling the program edit. See Section 3.3.1 for details.

Ⅱ
Operation

243
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Ⅱ
Operation

Appendix

244
 Chapter 11 System Communication

This system supports RS232, USB communication interface, separely communicates with PC or
U disk to realize data transmission.

11.1 GSKComm Introduction

GSKComm is a communication management software specially for users, supporting a serial

port connection mode. Its function includes file load between PC and the CNC, and file edit, with
characteristics of easy operation, high communication efficiency and reliability. The software is for
Windows interface, running in Win98, WinMe, WinXP and Win2000.

Run program GSK980TC3Comm.exe directly. The page is as follows:

Appendix
Fig. 11-1-1

11.1.1 Functions

1. File menu
The file menu involves functions of New, Open, Save, Print and Print setting and the latest file
list etc.
2. Edit menu
The edit menu involves functions such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Find and Replace.
3. View menu
Display the tool bar and status bar.
4. Connect menus
It is mainly used for opening and setting the serial port.
5. Main menu
Include file edit, DNC transmission function, PC—CNC transmission function, CNC—PC
transmission function, software and serial port setting, user management and sum. View

245
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

theses menu contents by pressing the main menu’s black small triangle.
6. Help menu
It is used to view the software version.
Note: DNC transmission function, user management, statistics are not provided.

11.1.2 Edit Operation

Click the main menu to enter the file edit interface. The edit operation makes the user
create a new part program file or open the existed part program file to execute edit.
Appendix

Fig.11-1-2-1

11.1.3 Sending a File（PC—CNC）

Appendix

Click the main menu to enter the sending file interface. The user clicks the right mouse
button on the shortcut menu at the the right side of “ Sending file” interface or the file display column
in the middle of the interface, selects a corresponding operation or directly selects it to send it after an
environmental menu pops up.
The【Additive…】function can add more files. The user can add one or more files one time. When
the additive file name does not meet rules or the file exceeds 4M, the file’s list item is displayed to
the red, and the 2nd column is displayed to “×”. When the file name and file size is up to
specifications, the 2nd column is displayed to “√”（as shown in Fig. 11-1-3-1）.

246
 Fig. 11-1-3-1
The user can add the saved file by【Load filelist】；save the current filelist by【Save list】；select
to delete one or more files one time, and delete the selected list item from PC—CNC listed files；
clear the whole PC—CNC file list by【Clear list】； send the selected file to the CNC by【Send】；
terminate the transmission being executed by【Stop】. The user sorts the sent filelist by clicking the
sending filelist’s list head. After sorting, a black small triangle symbol appears on the list head, the
upper triangular symbol means ascending sequence and the lower triangular symbol means
decending sequence (as shown in Fig. 11-1-3-2）.

Appendix

Fig. 11-1-3-2
Double click the required list item and a dialog box as shown in Fig. 11-1-3-3 pops up to modify a
file path, a file name stored in the CNC, or a storage area.。

247
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 11-1-3-3
When the file name which file is to be sent by the user is the same as that of some in the CNC
system, a dialog box as shown in Fig11-1-3-4 pops up in the course of sending, the user can press
“Yes” to directly shade it or press “No” to rename the file, or press “Cancel” to jump over the file.
Appendix

Appendix

Fig. 11-1-3-4

11.1.4 Receiving Files（CNC—PC）

Receive the file list from the CNC by【Receiving CNC list】；delete the selected list item from the
received file list by【Delete form only the list】；delete the selected file from the file list and
simultaneously delete from the CNC; a dialog box (as shown in Fig. 11-1-4-1) pops up to select a
position to store the received files by pressing【Receive】；stop the file which is being transmitted by
【Stop】.

248
 Fig.11-1-4-1

11.1.5 Software and Serial Port Setting

The user can set some softwares and serial ports and the setting page is shown in Fig.
11-1-5-1.

Appendix

Fig.11-1-5-1
For the program start setting, the user can set whether the system automatically runs the
software when the system is turned on and whether the software automatically minimizes at the lower
right corner of the screen; for the communication setting, the user can select a serial port to set its
baud rate. (after setting, press “Applicatoin”, otherwise, the setting does not take effect.)
Note: when the program runs, automatically starting the server is not provided.

249
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

11.2 Serial communication

11.2.1 Preparations for Serial Port Communication

1. The PC serial port (COM port) is connected with the CNC RS232 interface by a serial port
line.
2． Open the PC’s GSK Comm software.
3、GSK Comm software setting：
（1） Baud rate setting:
Click the software “Setting” to enter the setting page, and then execute the serial port
communication setting;
Port selection: select a port for communication by the drop-down menu “Serial port number”
(the selected PC port is automatically identified by the software)；
Baud rate setting: select a baud rate by the drop-down menu “Baud rate” to make the baud
rate of the PC be the same as that of the CNC communication. The delivery
standard setting: the baud rate selects 115200 when the data transmits.
Appendix

Appendix

Fig. 11-2-1-1
（2） Click “Connection” menu，select“Via serial port”. When the serial port is successfully
opened, the status bar displays “Serial port open”, and the small icon at lower right
corner becomes “Green” and “Grey”. But such means the local serial port has been
opened, and does not means it is connected with the CNC system.

Fig. 11-2-1-2
（3） Click “Connection” menu，select “Disconnect” to disconnect the CNC system.
Note: the communication software is connected with the CNC by a serial port.

250
11.2.2 Serial Port Data Transmission

Steps are shown below:

1) Select <MDI> mode;

2) Press key to enter setting page, set the I/O channel to 1.

3）Baud rate selects 115200 during data transmission.
4）Press soft key【CNC SET】to input corresponding password authority. For detail please see
to Section 3.3.1.1 Setting and Modification for Password Authority.

5）Press key【DATA】to enter SETTING (DATA DEAL) page, then press key or
to move the cursor to <CNC Part Program>.

A. Data output（CNC→PC）

1. Press system soft key 【OUTPUT】, then the system prompts “transfer waiting”

2. Click button on GSK Com communication software to enter the “Receive Files”
page.

Appendix

Fig. 11-2-2-1

3. Click button to obtain the CNC file list, which is shown in Fig. 11-2-2-2:

Fig. 11-2-2-2

4. Select the file (or many files) to be received, then press button to start the
file receiving, which is shown is Fig. 11-2-2-3.

251
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig. 11-2-2-3
5. After the file receiving, the status bar of the dialog displays “Received”, which is shown in
Fig. 11-2-2-4.

Fig. 11-2-2-4

A. Data input（PC→CNC）

1. Press system soft key【INPUT】, then the system prompts “input waiting”.
Appendix

2. Click in GSK Comm software to enter the file sending page.

Appendix

Fig. 11-2-2-5

252
 3. Click button , and add the required file to send to the CNC, which is shown
in Fig. 11-2-2-6.

Fig. 11-2-2-6
4. Double click the sent file list item, modify the file path, the CNC file name stored in the CNC
or storage area.
Select the user partition when sending CNC part programs and custom macro programs;
select the system partition when sending files such ladder (PLC), parameters (PLC), system
parameter values, tool offset values, pitch offset values and system macro variables.
5. After selecting the partition, select the file (or multiple files) to be sent, and click button

to start the file sending, which is shown in Fig. 11-2-2-7.

Appendix
Fig. 11-2-2-7

6. After sending the file/files, “Sent” is displayed in the dialog, which is shown in Fig. 11-2-2-8.

Fig. 11-2-2-8
Note 1: The other function’s use instructions in the sending file page are referred to Section 11.1.4
PC—CNC sending files, and The other function’s use instructions in the receiving file page are
referred to Section 11.1.4 CNC—PC receiving files.
Note 2：Make sure the baudrate is correctly set and the serial line is reliably connected before data
transmission.

253
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Note 3：It is forbidden to switch operation modes or pages during data transmission, or critical errors will
occur.
Note 4：File LADCHI**.TXT is ineffective when transferred to the system unless the power is turned off.

11.3 USB Communication

11.3.1 Overview and Precautions

Precautions:
1. Set I/O channel to 2 in <SETTING> page.
2. The CNC programs should be stored in the root directory of the U disk with file extension .txt, .nc
or .CNC, or they cannot be read by the system.
3. Do not pull out USB when it is communicating with system to avoid product damage and
unexpected results.
4. After the USB communication is finished, pull out the U disk when its indicator does not flicker
(or after a moment is waited for) to ensure the completion of the data transmission.

11.3.2 Operations Steps for USB Part Programs

In <MDI> mode, enter the SETTING (DATA DEAL) page, press direction key or

to move the cursor to “PART PRGR”. Press soft key 【OUTPUT】or【INPUT】to enter the
page shown as follows (Fig. 11-3-2-1):
Appendix

Appendix

Fig. 11-3-2-1

1. To copy CNC program files to U disk from the system disk:

a. Press key to switch the cursor to the file directory.

254
 b. Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be
copied in the system disk.
c. Press soft key 【COPY】, then the systems prompts “COPY TO USB DISC? New Name”, as
is shown in fig. 11-3-2-2.

Fig.11-3-2-2
d. If renaming for CNC program files is not required, press key <INPUT> to copy the CNC
program files directly.
Renaming required, press key <CANCEL> to input the new program number (e.g. O10 or
O100), and then press key <INPUT> to copy the CNC program files.
When the program name already exists in the U disk, the system prompts “Please rename
the file”. Here, input the new program number (e.g. O10 or O100) .
Then press key <INPUT> to copy the CNC program files.

Appendix
1． To copy CNC program files to system disk from U disk:
a. Press soft key【USB】to switch to USB file directory page;

b. Press key to switch the cursor to the file directory.

c. Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be
copied in the U disk.

Press soft key 【COPY】, then the system prompts “COPY TO CNC DISC? New Name”, which is
shown in fig. 11-3-2-3:）

255
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Fig.11-3-2-3
d. If renaming for CNC program files is not required, press key <INPUT> to copy the CNC
program files directly.
Renaming required, press key <CANCEL> to input the new program number (e.g. O10 or
O100), and then press key <INPUT> to copy the program files.
If the same program name already exists in the system disk, the system prompts “Please
rename the file” . Here, input the new program number (e.g. O10 or O100) and then press
key <INPUT> to copy the CNC program files.
Note: File LADCHI**.TXT is ineffective after transmitted to the system unless the power is turned off.

2． To delete files from system disk/U disk。

Appendix

a. Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be
deleted in the system disk/U disk.
Appendix

b. Press soft key【DEL】, then “DELETE CURRENT FILE?” is prompted at the bottom of the
page. Press key <CANCEL> to cancel the file deletion; press key <ENTER> to delete the file.

11.3.3 Exiting U Disk Page

1. Pull out the U disk as its indicator does not blink.

2. Press soft key 【RETURN】to return to【DATA】subpage in <SETTING> (DATA DEAL) page.

256
Appendix

Appendix

257
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Appendix

Appendix

258
Appendix

259
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Parameter Explanation:

The parameters are classified into following patterns according to the data type:

2 data types and data value range

Data type Effective data range Remark

Bit 0 or 1 The default value is given by the CNC, and
user can modify the setting by requirement.
Data Specified according The default value is given by the CNC, and
to the parameter user can modify the setting by requirement.
range
1. For bit and axis parameters, the data are comprised by 8 bits with each bit having different
meaning.
2. The data value range in above table is common effective range. The specific parameter value
range actually differs. See the parameter explanation for details.
Example

（1）Meaning of the bit parameters

Data
BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
number

（（2）Meaning of the data parameters

Appendix

0 2 1
Data number Data
Appendix

Note 1: The blank bits in the parameter explanation and the parameter numbers that are displayed on screen
but not in parameter list are reserved for further expansion. They must be set to 0.
Note 2: If 0 or 1 of the parameter is not specified with a meaning. It is assumed that: 1 for enable; 0 for disable.
Note 3: If INI is set to 0, in metric input, the parameter setting unit for linear axis is mm, mm/min; that for rotary
axis is deg, deg/min.
If INI is set to 1, in inch input, the parameter setting unit for linear axis is inch, inch/min; that for rotary
axis is deg, deg/min.

1. Bit Parameter

System parameter number

0 0 0 SVCD SEQ MSP INI INM PBUS

PBUS =1: Driver transmission mode is bus type.

=0: Driver transmission mode is pulse type.
INM =1: Least increment of linear axis is inch type
=0: Least increment of linear axis is metric type
If INI is set to 0, in metric input, the basic unit for linear axis is mm, mm/min;that for rotary

260
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

axis is deg, deg/min.

If INI is set to 1, in inch input, the basic unit for linear axis is inch,inch/min;that for rotary
axis is deg, deg/min.
INI =1: inch input.
=0: metric input.
If INI is set to 0, in metric input, the basic unit for linear axis is mm, mm/min;that for rotary
axis is deg, deg/min.
If INI is set to 1, in inch input, the basic unit for linear axis is inch,inch/min;that for rotary
axis is deg, deg/min.
MSP =1: Double-spindle control is used.
=0: Double-spindle control is not used.
SEQ =1: Automatic insertion of sequence numbers is performed.
=0: Automatic insertion of sequence numbers is not performed.
SVCD =1: Use the bus servo card.
=0: Do not use the bus servo card.
Standard setting: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

System parameter number

0 0 1 SPPT SPEP SPOM SPT SBUS RASA

RASA =1: use an absolute grating ruler.

=0: do not use an absolute grating ruler.
SBUS =1: the spindle driver is in the bus control mode
=0: the spindle driver is in not the bus control mode
SPT =1: I/O control.
=0: frequency conversion or others.

录
SPOM =1: the spindle speed control signal output selects a pulse train
=0: the spindle speed control signal output selects an analog voltage

Appendix
=1: when the bus spindle is used, the spindle encoder feedback interface
SPEP
selects: XS32 encoder interface
=0: when the bus spindle is used, the spindle encoder feedback interface
selects: the interface is the same as that of output
SPPT =1: the spindle pulse output mode selects: AB-phase output
=0: the spindle pulse output mode selects: pulse+direction
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 0 2 DEC5 DEC4 DEC3 DEC2 DEC1

=1: Decelerate when the 1st axis reference point returns and the deceleration
DEC1
signal is 1.
=0: Decelerate when the 1st axis reference point returns and the deceleration
signal is 0.
=1: Decelerate when the 2nd axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal
DEC2
is 1.
=0: Decelerate when the 1st axis reference point returns and the deceleration
signal is 0.
=1: Decelerate when the 3rd axis reference point returns and the deceleration
DEC3
signal is 1.

261
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

=0: Decelerate when the 3rd axis reference point returns and the deceleration
signal is 0.
=1: Decelerate when the 4th axis reference point returns and the deceleration
DEC4
signal is 1.
=0: Decelerate when the 4th axis reference point returns and the deceleration
signal is 0.
=1: Decelerate when the 5th axis reference point returns and the deceleration
DEC5
signal is 1.
=0: Decelerate when the 5th axis reference point returns and the deceleration
signal is 0.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 0 3 DIR5 DIR4 DIR3 DIR2 DIR1

DIR1 =1: the 1st axis feeding direction reverse.

=0: the 1st axis feeding direction.
DIR2 =1: the 2nd axis feeding direction reverse.
=0: the 2nd axis feeding direction.
DIR3 =1: the 3rd axis feeding direction reverse.
=0: the 3rd axis feeding direction.
DIR4 =1: the 4th axis feeding direction reverse.
=0: the 4th axis feeding direction
DIR5 =1: the 5th axis feeding direction reverse
=0: the 5th axis feeding direction.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 0 4 SK0
Appendix

SK0 =1: it is taken as a signal to input when the skip signal SKIP is 0
=0: it is taken as a signal to input when the skip signal SKIP is 1
Appendix

Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 0 5 DOUS ISC

ISC =1: least code increment 0.0001mm&deg,0.00001inch.

=0: least code increment 0.001mm&deg,0.0001inch.
DOUS =1: the double-drive device uses a grating position.
=0: the double-drive device uses a grating position.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

0 0 6 MAOB ZPLS SIOD SJZ AZR JAX ZMOD ZRN

=1: when a reference point is not established, and other codes except form
ZRN
G28 in Auto run mode, an alarm occurs.
=0: when a reference point is not established, and other codes except form
G28 in Auto run mode, no alarms occurs.

262
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

ZMOD =1: the zero return mode selection: before block.

=0: the zero return mode selection: after block.
=1: execute the manual reference point return and simultaneously control
JAX
axis: single-axis.
=0: execute the manual reference point return and simultaneously control
axis: multiple axes.
AZR =1: when the reference point is not established, G28: alarm.
=0：when the reference point is not established, G28: use the block
SJZ =1: the reference point is memorized
=0：the reference point is not memorized
SIOD =1: the machine zero deceleration signal executes the PLC logic operation.
=0：the machine zero deceleration signal is directly read.
ZPLS =1: Zero return mode selection: one-revolution signal
=0: Zero return mode selection: non-one-revolution signal
MAOB =1: Zero return mode selection for non-one-revolution signal: B
=0: Zero return mode selection for non-one-revolution signal: A
Standard setting：1 1 1 0 0001

System parameter number

0 0 7 ZMI5 ZMI4 ZMI3 ZMI2 ZMI1

ZMI1 =1: Set the 1st axis direction of reference point return: negative
=0: Set the 1st axis direction of reference point return: positive
ZMI2 =1: Set the 2nd axis direction of reference point return: negative
=0: Set the 2nd axis direction of reference point return: positive
Set the 3rd axis direction of reference point return: negative

录
ZMI3 =1:
=0: Set the 3rd axis direction of reference point return: positive
ZMI4 =1: Set the 4th axis direction of reference point return: negative

Appendix
=0: Set the 4th axis direction of reference point return: positive
ZMI5 =1: Set the 5th axis direction of reference point return: negative
=0: Set the 5th axis direction of reference point return: positive
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 0 8 AXS5 AXS4 AXS3 AXS2 AXS1

AXS1 =1: the 1st axis is set to a rotary axis.

=0: the 1st axis is set to a linear axis.
AXS2 =1: the 2nd axis is set to a rotary axis.
=0: the 2nd axis is set to a linear axis.
AXS3 =1: the 3rd axis is set to a rotary axis.
=0: the 3rd axis is set to a linear axis.
AXS4 =1: the 4th axis is set to a rotary axis.。
=0: the 4th axis is set to a linear axis.
AXS5 =1: the 5th axis is set to a rotary axis.
=0：the 5th axis is set to a linear axis.
Standard setting：0 0 0 1 1000

System parameter number

263
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0 0 9 A4TP RAB

RAB =1: each axis as a rotary axis rotates nearby.

=0: each axis as a rotary axis does not rotate nearby.
A4TP =1: 4-axis link system.
=0: non 4-axis link system.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0001

System parameter number

0 1 0 RCUR MSL WCZS RLC ZCL SCBM

SCBM =1: execute the stroke check before movement.

=0: do not execute the stroke check before movement.
ZCL =1: clear the relative coordinate of the reference point return.
=0: do not clear the relative coordinate of the reference point return.
RLC =1: the relative coordinate system is cancelled after reset.
=0: the relative coordinate system is not cancelled after reset.
=1 ： the input value of workpiece coordinate system’s zero subtracts the
WCZS
machine coordinate value.
=0：the input value of workpiece coordinate system’s zero adds the machine
coordinate value.
=1：when multi-block in MDI mode is started circularly, the initial operation is
MSL
done at the line where the cursor is.
=0: when multi-block in MDI mode is started circularly, the initial operation is
done at the first line.
RCUR =1：the reset cursor returns to the program’s intial position in Edit mode.
=0: the reset cursor does not return to the program’s intial position in Edit
mode.
Appendix

Standard setting：0 0 1 0 0010

Appendix

System parameter number

0 1 1 BFA LZR OUT2

OUT2 =1: forbide entering into the 2nd stroke limit’s outerside area.
=0: forbide entering into the 2nd stroke limit’s inside area.
=1: perform the stroke check after the power supply is turned on and before
LZR
the manual refernce point return is performed.
=0: do not perform the stroke check after the power supply is turned on and
before the manual refernce point return is performed.
BFA =1: when an overtravel code is sent, an alarm occurs after overtravel.
=0: when an overtravel code is sent, an alarm occurs before overtravel. (the
system alarm range is 5MM in the front of the set’s forbidden area’s each
board).
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0001

System parameter number

0 1 2 RDR FDR TDR RFO LRP RPD

RPD =1: manual rapid effective before reference point return after power-on

264
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

=0: manual rapid ineffective before reference point return after power-on
LRP =1: the positioning (G00) interpolation type is linear
=0: the positioning (G00) interpolation type is non-linear
RFO =1: rapid feed stop when override is F0
=0: rapid feed does not stop when override is F0
TDR =1: dry run effective during tapping
=0: dry run ineffective during tapping
FDR =1: dry run effective during cutting feeding
=0: dy run ineffective during cutting feeding
RDR =1: dry run effective during rapid positioning
=0: dry run ineffective during rapid positioning
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

0 1 3 HPC NPC

NPC =1: feed per revolution effective with no position encoder

=0: feed per revolution ineffective with no position encoder
HPC =1: position encoder installed
=0: position encoder not installed
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

0 1 4 ROVT DLF

=1: reference point return by manual feed after reference point is setup and
DLF
memorized

录
=0: reference point return by rapid traverse after reference point is setup and
memorized

Appendix
ROVT =1: the rapid override uses 6-gear
=0: the rapid override uses 4-gear
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 1 5 PIIS PPCK ASL PLAC STL

STL =1: To select prereading working type

=0: To select non-prereading working type
PLAC =1: Acceleration/deceleration type after forecasting interpolation: exponential
=0: Acceleration/deceleration type after forecasting interpolation: linear
ASL =1: Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting: speed difference control
=0: Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting: angular control
PPCK =1: To perform in-position check by forecasting
=0: Not perform in-position check by forecasting
=1: Overlapping interpolation effective in acceleration/deceleration blocks
PIIS
before forecasting
=0: Overlapping interpolation ineffective in acceleration/deceleration blocks
before forecasting
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0001

265
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

System parameter number

0 1 6 ALS FLLS FBLS FBOL

FBOL =1: Rapid traverse type: post acceleration/deceleration

=0: Rapid traverse type: pre- acceleration/deceleration
FBLS =1: Pre-acceleration/deceleration type of rapid traverse: S
=0: Pre-acceleration/deceleration type of rapid traverse: linear
FLLS =1: Post-acceleration/deceleration type of rapid traverse: exponential
=0: Post-acceleration/deceleration type of rapid traverse: linear
ALS =1: Auto corner feed effective
=0: Auto corner feed ineffective
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0 010

System parameter number

0 1 7 CPCT CALT WLOE HLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL

CBOL =1: Cutting feed type: post-acceleration/deceleration

=0: Cutting feed type: pre-acceleration/deceleration
CBLS =1: Pre-acceleration/deceleration type of cutting feed: S
=0: Pre-acceleration/deceleration type of cutting feed: lineat
CLLE =1: Post-acceleration/deceleration type of cutting feed: exponential
=0: Post-acceleration/deceleration type of cutting feed: linear
HLOE =1: JOG running type: exponential
=0: JOG running type: linear
WLOE =1: MPG running type: exponential
=0: MPG running type: linear
CALT =1: Cutting feed acceleration clamping
=0: Cutting feed acceleration not clamping
CPCT =1: To control the in-position precision in cutting feed
Appendix

=0: Not control the in-position precision in cutting feed

Standard setting：1 0 1 0 0001
Appendix

System parameter number

0 1 8 RVCS RBK RVIT

=1: To execute next block after compensation as backlash is over value

RVIT
allowable
=0: To execute next block during compensation as backlash is over value
allowable
=1 Backlash compensation when cutting/rapid move is performing
RBK
=0 No backlash compensation when cutting/rapid move is performing
RVCS =1: Backlash compensation type: ascending or decending
=0: Backlash compensation type: fixed frequency
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 1 9 ALS2 ALS1 ALM5 ALM4 ALM3 ALM2 ALM1

ALM1 =1: an alarm occurs when the 1st axis driver’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 1st axis driver’s alarm signal is 0.

266
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

ALM2 =1: an alarm occurs when the 2nd axis river’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 2nd axis river’s alarm signal is 0.
ALM3 =1: an alarm occurs when the 3rd axis driver’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 3rd axis driver’s alarm signal is 0.
ALM4 =1: an alarm occurs when the 4th axis driver’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 4th axis driver’s alarm signal is 0.
ALM5 =1: an alarm occurs when the 5th axis driver’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 5th axis driver’s alarm signal is 0.
ALS1 =1: an alarm occurs when the 1st spindle driver’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 1st spindle driver’s alarm signal is 0.
ALS2 =1: an alarm occurs when the 2nd spindle driver’s alarm signal is 1.
=0: an alarm occurs when the 2nd spindle driver’s alarm signal is 0.
Standard setting：0 0 1 0 0000

System parameter number

0 2 0 APC USNO ITL

ITL =1: All axes interlock signal effective

=0: All axes interlock signal ineffective
HVR =1: use the HVR function.
=0: do not use the HVR function.
USNO =1：the bus servo’s older version.
=0：the bus servo’s new version.
APC =1：use an absolute encoder.
=0：do not use an absolute encoder.

录
Standard setting：0 1 0 0 0000

System parameter number

Appendix
0 2 1 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1

APC1 =1: the 1st axis servo encoder type selection: absolute.
=0: the 1st axis servo encoder type selection: incremental.
APC2 =1: the 2nd axis servo encoder type selection: absolute.
=0: the 2nd axis servo encoder type selection: incremental.
APC3 =1：the 3rd axis servo encoder type selection: absolute.
=0：the 3rd axis servo encoder type selection: incremental.
APC4 =1：the 4th axis servo encoder type selection: absolute.
=0：the 4th axis servo encoder type selection: incremental.
APC5 =1：the 5th axis servo encoder type selection: absolute.
=0：the 4th axis servo encoder type selection: incremental.
Standard setting：0 1 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 2 2 PRC DAL

DAL =1: the absolute position display considers the tool length compensation.
=0: the absolute position display does not consider the tool length
compensation.

267
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

=1: in tool offset compensation amount, PRC signal is used in the workpiece
PRC
coordinate system’s offset input.
=0: in tool offset compensation amount, PRC signal is not used in the
workpiece coordinate system’s offset input.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 2 3 POSM

POSM =1: Mode is displayed on program monitoring page

=0: Mode is not displayed on program monitoring page
Standard setting：0 1 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 2 4 NPA

NPA =1: To switch to alarm page when alarm occurs

=0: Not switch to alarm page when alarm occurs
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 000

System parameter number

0 2 5 ALM DGN GRA SET SYS PRG POS

POS =1: To switch over page by pressing POSITION key in position page
=0: Not switch over page by pressing POSITION key in position page
PRG =1: To switch over page by repressing POSITION key in program page
=0: Not switch over page by repressing POSITION key in program page
SYS =1: To switch over page by repressing PARAMETER key in program page
=0: Not switch over page by repressing PARAMETER key in program page
SET =1: To switch over page by repressing SET key in set page
Appendix

=0: Not switch over page by repressing SET key in set page
GRA =1: To switch over page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page
=0: Not switch over page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page
Appendix

DGN =1: To switch over page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page
=0: Not switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page
ALM =1: To switch over page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page
=0: Not switch over page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page
Standard setting：1 1 1 1 0111

System parameter number

0 2 6 HELP PLC STOF SMDI PETP

PETP =1: To switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key

=0: Not to switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key
SMDI =1: Press <Program> to automatically skip to the MDI page in MDI mode.
=0: Press <Program> not to automatically skip to the MDI page in MDI mode.
=1：directly switch to the offset page when the system switches to the setting
STOF
page.
=0：do not directly switch to the offset page when the system switches to the
setting page.

268
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

PLC =1: To switch over page by repressing PLC key in PLC page
=0: Not switch over page by repressing PLC key in PLC page
HELP =1: To switch over page by repressing HELP key in help page
=0: Not switch over page by repressing HELP key in help page
Standard setting：1 1 0 1 0101

System parameter number

0 2 7 NE9 NE8

NE8 =1: Editting of subprogram with 80000 – 89999 unallowed

=0: Editting of subprogram with 80000 – 89999 allowed
NE9 =1: Editting of subprogram with 90000 - 99999 unallowed
=0: Editting of subprogram with 90000 - 99999 allowed
Standard setting：0 0 0 1 0001

System parameter number

0 2 8 MCL MKP

=1: To clear the program edited when M02，M30 or % is executed in MDI

MKP
mode
=0: Not clear the program edited when M02，M30 or % is executed in MDI
mode
MCL =1: To delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode
=0: Not delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode
Standard setting：0 0 0 1 0000

System parameter number

录
0 2 9 IWZ WZO MCV GOF WOF

WOF =1: Tool wear offset input by MDI disabled

Appendix
=0: Tool wear offset input by MDI enabled
GOF =1: Geometric tool offset input by MDI disabled
=0: Geometric tool offset input by MDI enabled
MCV =1: Macro variables input by MDI disabled
=0: Macro variables input by MDI enabled
WZO =1: Workpiece origin offset input by MDI disabled
=0: Workpiece origin offset input by MDI enabled
IWZ =1: Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell disabled
=0: Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell enabled
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 3 0 SFA

SFA =1: output SF signal even if no gear shift.

=0: output SF signal with gear shift.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 3 1 G19 G18 G01

269
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

G01 =1: G01 mode at power-on or clearing

=0: G00 mode at power-on or clearing
G18 =1: G18 plane at power-on or clearing
=0: is not G18 plane at power-on or clearing
G19 =1: it is G19 mode. When G19=1, please set G18 to 0.
=0: it is determined by No：31#1.

G19 G18 G17, G18, G19 mode

0 0 G17 mode（X-Y plane）
0 1 G18 mode（Z-X plane）
1 0 G19 mode（Y-Z plane）

Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

0 3 2 AD2

AD2 =1: an alarm occurs if two or more same addresses are specified in a block
=0: no alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block
Standard setting：0 1 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 3 3 M3B M30 M02

M02 =1: To return to block beginning when M02 is to be executed

=0: Not to return to block beginning when M02 is to be executed
M30 =1: To return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed
=0: Not to return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed
M3B =1: At most three M codes allowable in a section of program
Appendix

=0: Only one M code allowable in a section of program

Appendix

Standard setting：0 0 0 1 0000

System parameter number

0 3 4 CFH DWL

DWL =1: G04 for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode
=0: G04 not for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode
CFH =1: To clear F, H, D codes at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve F, H, D codes at reset or emergency stop
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 3 5 C07 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01

C01 =1: To clear G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop

=0: To reserve G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop
C02 =1: To clear G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop
C03 =1: To clear G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop

270
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

=0: To reserve G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop

C04 =1: To clear G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop
C05 =1: To clear G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop
C06 =1: To clear G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop
C07 =1: To clear G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop
Standard setting：1 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 3 6 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08

C08 =1: To clear G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop

=0: To reserve G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop
C09 =1: To clear G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop
C10 =1: To clear G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop
C11 =1: To clear G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop
C12 =1: To clear G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop
C13 =1: To clear G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop

录
C14 =1: To clear G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop

Appendix
C15 =1: To clear G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop
=0: To reserve G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0001

System parameter number

0 3 7 SCS CSS CSZR SOC RSC BDP SCRW

SCRW =1: To perform pitch compensation

=0: Not perform pitch compensation
BDP =1: use the two-way pitch error compensation.
=0: do not use the two-way pitch error compensation.
=1: To calculate G96 spindle speed according to current coordinate during
RSC
G0 rapid positioning
=0: To calculate G96 spindle speed according to end point coordinate during
G0 rapid positioning
SOC =1: G96 spindle speed clamped behind spindle override
=0: G96 spindle speed clamped before spindle override
CSZR =1：CS contour controlling reference point return function is valid.
=0：CS contour controlling reference point return function is invalid.
CSS =1：execute Cs contour control in each spindle.
=0： do not execute Cs contour control in each spindle.

271
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

SCS =1： use the Cs contour control function.

=0： do not use the Cs contour control function.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 3 8 SGB GTT FLRE FLR EOV MPP SAR

SAR =1: detect the spindle speed in-position signal

=0: do not detect the spindle speed in-position signal
=1: the program codes P to execute the spindle selection in multi-spindle
MPP
control.
=0: the program codes P to execute the spindle selection in multi-spindle
control.
EOV =1: use each spindle override signal.
=0: not use each spindle override signal.
=1: unit of permissive rate (q) and change rate® in the spindle speed wave
FLR
check is 0.1%。
=0: unit of permissive rate (q) and change rate® in the spindle speed wave
check is 1%.
FLRE =1: the spindle speed wave check is enabled.
=0: the spindle speed wave check is disabled.
GTT =1： the spindle gear selects T type mode.
=0： the spindle gear selects M type mode.
SGB =0： M type the gear switch mode selects each gear’s max. speed( mode A).
=1： M type the gear switch mode selects each gear’s switch point’s speed
（mode B）
Standard setting：0 0 1 0 0000
Appendix

System parameter number

0 3 9 THSY THAT THST DIA TLC
Appendix

TLC =1: tool length compensation type: B

=0: tool length compensation type: A
DIA =1： use the diameter programming.
=0： use the radius programming.
THST =1： the spindle pulse samples the even value in thread cutting.
=0： the spindle pulse samples the original in thread cutting.
THAT =1： the acceleration/deceleration in thread cutting is exponential type.
=0： the acceleration/deceleration in thread cutting is linear type.
THSY =1： the synchronous mode B in thread cutting.
=0： the synchronous mode A in thread cutting.
Standard setting：1 0 0 0 0100

System parameter number

0 4 0 ODI THST TPRT CCN SUP

SUP =1: Start-up type in tool radius compensation: B

=0: Start-up type in tool radius compensation: A

272
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

=1: To move to the intermediate point by G28 and cancel compensation in

CCN
tool radius compensation
=0: To move to the intermediate point by G28 and reserve compensation in
tool radius compensation
=0: the thread cutting’s linear acceleration/deceleration uses the time
TPRT
constant.
=1: the thread cutting’s linear acceleration/deceleration uses the acceleration
constant.
THST =0: the thread head signal’s read mode uses each read.
=1: the thread head signal’s read mode is read only once.
ODI =1: Tool radius compensation value set by diameter
=0: Tool radius compensation value set by radius
Standard setting：0 0 0 1 0100

System parameter number

0 4 1 CNI G39 PUIT

PUIT =1: Data parameter input and display are decided by 0#2 INI.
=0: Data parameter input and display are metric units
G39 =1: Corner rounding effective in radius compensation
=0: Corner rounding ineffective in radius compensation
CNI =1: Interference check enabled in radius compensation
=0: Interference check disabled in radius compensation
Standard setting：0 1 1 0 0000

System parameter number

0 4 2 RD2 RD1

录
RD1 =1: To set the retraction direction of G76，G87: negative

Appendix
=0: To set the retraction direction of G76，G87: positive
RD2 =1: To set the retraction axis of G76，G87: the 2nd axis
=0: To set the retraction axis of G76，G87: the 1st axis
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 4 3 PLS PDI

=1: the plane’s 2nd aixs specified by diameter is used in polar coordinate
PDI
interpolation mode.
=0: the plane’s 2nd aixs specified by radius is used in polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
RD2 =1: use the polar coordinate interpolation offset function.
=0: do not use the polar coordinate interpolation offset function.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

0 4 4 PCP DOV

DOV =1: Override effective during rigid tapping retraction

=0: Override ineffective during rigid tapping retraction

273
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

PCP =1: High-speed peck drilling cycle for flexible tapping

=0: Standard peck drilling cycle for flexible tapping
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 4 5 OVS OVU TDR NIZ

NIZ =1: To perform rigid tapping smoothing

=0: Not perform rigid tapping smoothing
TDR =1: To use the same constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction
=0: Not use the same constant during the rigid tapping advance and
retraction
OVU =1: 10% retraction override for rigid tapping
=0: 1% retraction override for rigid tapping
OVS =1: In rigid tapping, selection and cancel signal for federate override enable
=0: In rigid tapping, selection and cancel signal for federate override disable
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 4 6 ORI SSOG

SSOG =1: For servo spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping
=0: For following spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping
ORI =1: To perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts
=0: Not perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

0 4 9 RPST
Appendix

RPST =1: movement in G01 mode in the course of the program restart.
=0: movement at dry run speed in G00 mode in the course of the program
Appendix

restart.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 0 SIM REL

REL =1: Relative position display setting of indexing table: within 360°
=0: Relative position display setting of indexing table: beyond 360°
SIM =1: alarm if indexing code and other axes codes are in the same block
=0: Do not make alarm if indexing code and other axes codes are in the
same block
Standard setting：0 1 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 1 MDLY SBM

SBM =1: Single block allowed in macro statement

=0: Single block unallowed in macro statement
MDLY =1: Delay is allowed in macro statement

274
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

=0: Delay is unallowed in macro statement

Standard setting：0 0 1 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 2 CLV CCV

CCV =1: Macro common variables #100 - #199 clearing after reset
=0: Macro common variables #100 - #199 not clearing after reset
CLV =1: Macro local variables #1 - #50 clearing after reset
=0: Macro local variables #1 - #50 not clearing after reset
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 3 PLCV LAD3 LDA2 LAD1 LAD0

LAD0~LAD3 They are binary combination parameters. If they are 0, it uses No. 0
ladder, if they are 1~15, it uses 0~15 ladder diagram.
PLCV =1: Read and display PLC software version number.
=0: Do not read but display PLC software version number
Standard setting：1 0 0 0 0011

System parameter number

0 5 4 OPRG PRGS

PRGS =1： initial state of program switch is ON.

=0： initial state of program switch is OFF.
=1: Debugging and above authorithies, one key input/output is effective for
OPRG

录
workpiece program
=0: Debugging and above authorities, one key input/output is ineffective for

Appendix
workpiece program
Standard setting：0 1 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 5 CANT

CANT =1: Automatic clearing for single piece

=0: Not automatic clearing for single piece
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 6 HNGD HPF

HPF =1: To select full running for MPG moving

=0: Not select full running for MPG moving
HNGD =1: Axes moving direction are identical with MPG rotation direction
=0: Axes moving direction are not identical with MPG rotation direction
Standard setting：1 0 0 0 0001

System parameter number

0 5 7 PLW5 PLW4 PLW3 PLW2 PLW1

275
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

PLW1 =1：the 1st axis pulse width changes along with speed.
=0：the 1st axis pulse width is fixed to 1usec.
PLW2 =1：the 2nd axis pulse width changes along with speed.
=0：the 2nd axis pulse width is fixed to 1usec.
PLW3 =1：the 3rd axis pulse width changes along with speed.
=0：the 3rd axis pulse width is fixed to 1usec.
PLW4 =1：the 4th axis pulse width changes along with speed.
=0：the 4th axis pulse width is fixed to 1usec.
PLW5 =1：the 5th axis pulse width changes along with speed.
=0：the 5th axis pulse width is fixed to 1usec.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 5 8 NEG 5 NEG 4 NEG 3 NEG 2 NEG1

PLW1 =1：the 1st axis is ignored

=0：the 1st axis is not ignored
PLW2 =1：the 2nd axis is ignored
=0：the 2nd axis is not ignored
PLW3 =1：the 3rd axis is ignored
=0：the 3rd axis is not ignored
PLW4 =1：the 4th axis is ignored
=0：the 4th axis is not ignored
PLW5 =1：the 5th axis is ignored
=0：the 5th axis is not ignored
Appendix

Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0010

System parameter number

Appendix

0 5 9 LEDT LOPT

LOPT =1: Use external operator panel lock

=0: Not use external operator panel lock
LEDT =1: Use external editing lock
=0: Not use external editing lock
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 6 0 PMCA PMCP PMCS EPW

EPW =1: maximum number of position switch is 16PCS.

=0: maximum number of position switch is 10PCS.
PMCS =1： PMC axis’ axis selection is specified by G signal.
=0： PMC axis’ axis selection is not specified by G signal.
PMCP =1： PMC axis’ zero return mode with one-rotation signal.
=0： PMC axis’ zero return mode without one-rotation signal.
PMCA =1： alarm when PMC axis does not execute the reference point return, codes

276
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

the machine coordinate selection mode.

=0： no alarm when PMC axis does not execute the reference point return,
codes the machine coordinate selection mode.
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

System parameter number

0 6 1 FALM LALM EALM SALM AALM SSC

SSC =1: To use constant surface speed control

=0: Not use constant surface speed control
AALM =1: External user alarm ignored
=0: External user alarm not ignored
SALM =1: Spindle driver alarm ignored
=0: Spindle driver alarm not ignored
EALM =1: Emergency stop alarm ignored
=0: Emergency stop alarm not ignored
LALM =1: Limit alarm ignored
=0: Limit alarm not ignored
FALM =1: Feed axis driver alarm ignored
=0: Feed axis driver alarm not ignored
Standard setting：0 0 0 0 0000

2. Data Parameters
No. definition Default
0000 I/O channel, input and output device selection 2
( 1:RS232 2:USB)

录
Setting range：1～2
It is set to 0 or 1 for communication between CNC and PC via RS232 interface, and set to 2 when

Appendix
CNC is connected with U disk.

0005 Axes controlled by the CNC 3

Setting range：3～5

0006 CNC language selection（0：Chinese 1：English） 0

Setting range：0～2 .

0008 Ethernet bus’s slave station MDT data package bytes 16

Setting range：0～20

0009 Max. retransmission times of Ethernet bus 10

Setting range：0～30

0010 The 1st axis offset amount of external workpiece 0

origin
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm)

0011 The 2nd axis offset amount of external workpiece 0.0000

origin
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

277
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0012 The 3rd axis offset amount of external workpiece 0.0000

origin
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0013 The 4th axis offset amount of external workpiece 0.0000

origin
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0014 The 5th axis offset amount of external workpiece 0.0000

origin
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0015 Offset amount of the 1st axis’ workpiece origin in G54 0.0000
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0016 Offset amount of the 2nd axis’ workpiece origin in G54 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0017 Offset amount of the 3rd axis’ workpiece origin in G54 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0018 Offset amount of the 4th axis’ workpiece origin in G54 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0019 Offset amount of the 5th axis’ workpiece origin in G54 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0020 Offset amount of the 1st axis’ workpiece origin in G55 0.0000
Appendix

Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0021 Offset amount of the 2nd axis’ workpiece origin in G55 0.0000
Appendix

Setting range：-19999.9999～19999.9999（mm）

0022 Offset amount of the 3rd axis’ workpiece origin in G55 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0023 Offset amount of the 4th axis’ workpiece origin in G55 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0024 Offset amount of the 5th axis’ workpiece origin in G55 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0025 Offset amount of the 1st axis’ workpiece origin in G56 0.0000
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0026 Offset amount of the 2nd axis’ workpiece origin in G56 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

278
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0027 Offset amount of the 3rd axis’ workpiece origin in G56 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0028 Offset amount of the 4th axis’ workpiece origin in G56 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0029 Offset amount of the 5th axis’ workpiece origin in G56 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0030 Offset amount of the 1st axis’ workpiece origin in G57 0.0000
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0031 Offset amount of the 2nd axis’ workpiece origin in G57 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0032 Offset amount of the 3rd axis’ workpiece origin in G57 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0033 Offset amount of the 4th axis’ workpiece origin in G57 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0034 Offset amount of the 5th axis’ workpiece origin in G57 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

录
0035 Offset amount of the 1st axis’ workpiece origin in G58 0.0000

Appendix
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0036 Offset amount of the 2nd axis’ workpiece origin in G58 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0037 Offset amount of the 3rd axis’ workpiece origin in G58 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0038 Offset amount of the 4th axis’ workpiece origin in G58 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0039 Offset amount of the 5th axis’ workpiece origin in G58 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0040 Offset amount of the 1st axis’ workpiece origin in G59 0.0000
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0041 Offset amount of the 2nd axis’ workpiece origin in G59 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

279
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0042 Offset amount of the 3rd axis’ workpiece origin in G59 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0043 Offset amount of the 4th axis’ workpiece origin in G59 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0044 Offset amount of the 5th axis’ workpiece origin in G59 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0045 The 1st reference point’s 1st axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0046 The 1st reference point’s 2nd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0047 The 1st reference point’s 3rd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0048 The 1st reference point’s 4th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0049 The 1st reference point’s 5th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）
Appendix

0050 The 2nd reference point’s 1st axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）
Appendix

0051 The 2nd reference point’s 2nd axis coordinate value 0.0000
on the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0052 The 2nd reference point’s 3rd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0053 The 2nd reference point’s 4th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0054 The 2nd reference point’s 5th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0055 The 3rd reference point’s 1st axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

280
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0056 The 3rd reference point’s 2nd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0057 The 3rd reference point’s 3rd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0058 The 3rd reference point’s 4th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0059 The 3rd reference point’s 5th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm）

0060 The 4th reference point’s 1st axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm）

0061 The 4th reference point’s 2nd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0062 The 4th reference point’s 3rd axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

录
0063 The 4th reference point’s 4th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system

Appendix
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0064 The 4th reference point’s 5th axis coordinate value on 0.0000
the machine coordinate system
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0066 Stored stroke check 1’s 1st axis negative border’s -19998
coordinate value
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm)

0067 Stored stroke check 1’s 1st axis positive border’s 19998
coordinate value
Setting range：-19999.9998～19999.9998（mm)

0068 Stored stroke check 1’s 2nd axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0069 Stored stroke check 1’s 2nd axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

281
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0070 Stored stroke check 1’s 3rd axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0071 Stored stroke check 1’s 3rd axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0072 Stored stroke check 1’s 4th axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0073 Stored stroke check 1’s 4th axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0074 Stored stroke check 1’s 5th axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0075 Stored stroke check 1’s 5th axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0076 Stored stroke check 2’s 1st axis negative border’s -19998
coordinate value
Setting range：-19999.9989～19999.9998（mm)

0077 Stored stroke check 2’s 1st axis positive border’s 19998
coordinate value
Setting range：-1999.9998～19999.9998（mm)
Appendix

0078 Stored stroke check 2’s 2nd axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Appendix

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0079 Stored stroke check 2’s 2nd axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0080 Stored stroke check 2’s 3rd axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0081 Stored stroke check 2’s 3rd axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0082 Stored stroke check 2’s 4th axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0083 Stored stroke check 2’s 4th axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value

282
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0084 Stored stroke check 2’s 5th axis negative border’s -9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0085 Stored stroke check 2’s 5th axis positive border’s 9999
coordinate value
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999（mm)

0086 Dry run speed 1000

Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

0087 Cutting federate at power-on 100

Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

0088 G0 rapid traverse speed of X axis 4000

Setting range：
Metric：1～30000 (mm/min)
Inch ：1～30000/ 25.4（inch/min）
Rotary axis: 1～30000（deg/min）

0089 G0 rapid traverse speed of the 2nd axis 8000

Setting range：
Metric ：0～30000 (mm/min)
Inch ：0～30000/ 25.4（inch/min）

录
Rotary axis：0～30000（deg/min）
0090 G0 rapid traverse speed of the 3rd axis 8000

Appendix
Setting range：
Metric ：0～30000 (mm/min)
Inch ：0～30000/ 25.4（inch/min）
Rotary axis ：0～30000（deg/min）

0091 G0 rapid traverse speed of the 4th axis 8000

Setting range：
Metric ：0～30000 (mm/min)
Inch ：0～30000/ 25.4（inch/min）
Rotary axis：0～30000（deg/min）

0092 G0 rapid traverse speed of the 5th axis 8000

Setting range：
Metric ：0～30000 (mm/min)
Inch ：0～30000/ 25.4（inch/min）
Rotary axis：0～30000（deg/min）

0093 F0 rapid override of each axis (for all axes) 30

Setting range：1～1000 (mm/min)

283
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0094 Maximum control speed in rapid positioning (for all 8000

axes)
Setting range：300～30000(mm/min)

0095 Minimum control speed in rapid positioning (for all 0

axes)
Setting range：0～300 (mm/min)

0096 Maximum control speed in cutting feed (for all axes) 8000
Setting range：300～30000(mm/min)

0097 Minimum control speed in cutting feed (for all axes) 0

Setting range：0～300 (mm/min)

0098 Feedrate of manual continuous feed for axes (JOG) 1000

Setting range：0～30000 (mm/min)

0099 （FL）speed when receiving Z axis pulse signal (for 100

all axes)
Setting range：1～200 (mm/min)

0100 The 1st axis’ reference point return speed 2000

Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

0101 The 2nd axis’ reference point return speed 4000

Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

0102 The 3rd axis’ reference point return speed 4000

Appendix

Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

The 4th axis’ reference point return speed

Appendix

0103 4000
Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

0104 The 5th axis’ reference point return speed 4000

Setting range：0～9999 (mm/min)

0105 L type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 1st axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0106 L type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 2nd axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0107 L type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 3rd axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0108 L type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 4th axis

284
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0109 L type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 5th axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0110 S type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 1st axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0111 S type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 2nd axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0112 S type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 3rd axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0113 S type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 4th axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0114 S type time constant of pre-acceleration/deceleration 100

of rapid 5th axis
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0115 L type time constant of post-acceleration/ 80

deceleration of rapid 1st axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

录
0116 L type time constant of post-acceleration/ 80
deceleration of rapid 2nd axis

Appendix
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0117 L type time constant of post-acceleration/ 80

deceleration of rapid 3rd axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0118 L type time constant of post-acceleration/ 80

deceleration of rapid 4th axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0119 L type time constant of post-acceleration/ 80

deceleration of rapid 5th axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0120 S type time constant of post-acceleration/ 60

deceleration of rapid 1st axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0121 S type time constant of post-acceleration/ 60

deceleration of rapid 2nd axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

285
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0122 S type time constant of post-acceleration/ 60

deceleration of rapid 3rd axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0123 S type time constant of post-acceleration/ 60

deceleration of rapid 4th axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0124 S type time constant of post-acceleration/ 60

deceleration of rapid 5th axis
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0125 L type time constant of cutting feed’s 100

front-acceleration/deceleration
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0126 S type time constant of cutting feed’s 100

front-acceleration/deceleration
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0127 L type time constant of cutting feed’s 80

post-acceleration/deceleration
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0128 E type time constant of cutting feed’s 60

post-acceleration/deceleration
Setting range：3～400 （ms）

0129 Exponential type acceleration/deceleration FL speed 10

Setting range：0～9999 （mm/min）
Appendix

0130 Maximum blocks merged in pre-interpolation 0

Setting range：0～10
Appendix

0131 In-position precision of cutting feed 0.03

Setting range：0.001～0.5 （mm）

0132 Control precision of circular interpolation 0.03

Setting range：0～0.5 （mm）
0133 Contour control precision of pre-interpolation 0.01
Setting range：0.0010～0.5000 （mm）

0134 Acceleration of the fore linear 250

acceleration/deceleration interpolated in forecasting
control
Setting range：0～2000 （mm/s²）

0135 Forecasting control, S type pre-acceleration 100

/deceleration time constant
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

286
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0136 Linear time constant of the post acceleration 80

/deceleration in forecasting control
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0137 Exponential time constant of the post 60

acceleration/deceleration in forecasting control
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0138 Exponential acceleration/deceleration FL speed of 10

cutting feed in forecasting control
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0139 Contour control precision in forecasting control 0.01

Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

0140 Blocks merged in forecasting control 0

Setting range：0～10

0141 In-position precision in forecasting control 0.05

Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

0142 Length condition of spline formation in forecasting 5

Setting range：0～30

0143 Angular condition of spline formation in forecasting 10

Setting range：0～30

录
0144 Critical angle of two blocks during automatic corner 5
deceleration in forecasting control

Appendix
Setting range：2～178 (degree)

0145 Minimum federate of automatic corner deceleration 120

in forecasting control
Setting range：10～1000 (mm/min)

0146 Axis error allowable for speed difference 80

deceleration in forecasting control
Setting range：60～1000

0147 Cutting precision grade in forecasting control 2

Setting range：0～8

0148 External acceleration limit of circular interpolation 1000

Setting range：100～5000 （mm/s²）

0149 Lower limit of external acceleration clamp for circular 200

interpolation
Setting range：0～2000 (mm/min)

0150 Acceleration clamp time constant of cutting feed 50

287
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Setting range：0～1000（ms）

0151 Maximum clamp speed of MPG incomplete running 2000

Setting range：0～3000 (mm/min)

0152 Linear acceleration /deceleration time constant of 120

MPG
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0153 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant 80

of MPG
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0154 Acceleration clamp time constant of MPG 100

Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0155 Maximum clamp speed of step feed 1000

Setting range：0～3000（mm/min）

0156 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of 30

axes JOG feed
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0157 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant 30

of axes JOG feed
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0158 Acceleration clamp time constant of MPG 50

incomplete running
Appendix

Setting range：0～1000 （ms）

0159 The 5th gear’s override value in MPG feed(least code 1000
Appendix

increment X’s setting value)

Setting range：1～10000

0160 Multiplication coefficient (CMR) of the 1st axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0161 Multiplication coefficient (CMR) of the 2nd axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0162 Multiplication coefficient (CMR) of the 3rd axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0163 Multiplication coefficient (CMR) of the 4th axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0164 Multiplication coefficient (CMR) of the 5th axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

288
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0165 Frequency division coefficient (CMR) of the 1st axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0166 Frequency division coefficient (CMR) of the 2nd axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0167 Frequency division coefficient (CMR) of the 3rd axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0168 Frequency division coefficient (CMR) of the 4th axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0169 Frequency division coefficient (CMR) of the 5th axis 1

Setting range：1～65536

0170 The 1st axis manual rapid positioning speed 4000

Setting range：0～30000

0171 The 2nd axis manual rapid positioning speed 8000

Setting range：0～30000

0172 The 3rd axis manual rapid positioning speed 8000

Setting range：0～30000

录
0173 The 4th axis manual rapid positioning speed 8000

Appendix
Setting range：0～30000

0174 The 5th axis manual rapid positioning speed 8000

Setting range：0～30000

0175 The 1st axis’ program name(0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 5:C ) 0
Setting range：0～5

0176 The 2nd axis’ program name (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 1
5:C )
Setting range：0～5

0177 The 3rd axis’ program name (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 5:C ) 2
Setting range：0～5

0178 The 4th axis’ program name (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 5:C ) 4
Setting range：0～5

0179 The 5th axis’ program name (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 5:C ) 5
Setting range：0～5

289
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0180 The 1st axis grid/reference point offset amount 0

Setting range：-50～50

0181 The 2nd axis grid/reference point offset amount 0

Setting range：-50～50

0182 The 3rd axis grid/reference point offset amount 0

Setting range：-50～50

0183 The 4th axis grid/reference point offset amount 0

Setting range：-50～50

0184 The 5th axis grid/reference point offset amount 1

Setting range：-50～50

0185 Mode when machine’s Z axis friction compensation 0

（0：disabled，1: Up，2：Down，3：Up and down）
Setting range：0～3

0186 Machine’s Z axis friction compensation amount（mm） 0.05

Setting range：0～0.5

0187 Z axis backlash compensation condition（default：1） 1

Setting range：0～50

0188 Z axis backlash compensation’s accumulated 0.02

Appendix

distance（default：0.02）
Setting range：0～0.5
Appendix

0189 Reverse precision by backlash compensation 0.0100

(X0.0001)
Setting range：0.0001～1.0000 (mm)
Set α = p (189) × 0.0001 , in reverse feeding, if the feeding of single servo period is more than α ,
the backlash compensation begins.
Therefore, in machining outer circle contour with a large radius, in order to make the offset position
not to exceed the quadrant, it needs to set a smaller precision. While in machining a curve surface, in
order to not to perform backlash compensation in a fixed point of the tool path to form a swollen ridge,
it needs to set a larger precision to make the clearance compensation to be distributed in a certain
width.
0190 The 1st axis’ backlash compensation amount 0.0000
Setting range：
Metric：-0.5～0.5 (mm)
Inch：-0.5～0.5/25.4 (inch)
Rotary axis：-0.5～0.5000 (deg)

0191 The 2nd axis’ backlash compensation amount 0.0000

Setting range：

290
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Metric ：-0.5～0.5 (mm)

Inch ：-0.5～0.5/25.4 (inch)
Rotary axis ：-0.5～0.5 (deg)

0192 The 3rd axis’ backlash compensation amount 0.0000

Setting range：
Metric：-0.5～0.5 (mm)
Inch：-0.5～0.5/25.4 (inch)
Rotary axis：-0.5～0.5 (deg)

0193 The 4th axis’ backlash compensation amount 0.0000

Setting range：
Metric：-0.5～0.5 (mm)
Inch：-0.5～0.5/25.4(inch)
Rotary axis：-0.5～0.5(deg)

0194 The 5th axis’ backlash compensation amount 0.0000

Setting range：
Metric ：-0.5～0.5(mm)
Inch ：-0.5～0.5/25.4(inch)
Rotary axis：-0.5～0.5 (deg)

0195 Compensation step width of the 1st axis clearance by 0.0030

fixed frequency
Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

Compensation step width of the 2nd axis clearance

录
0196 0.0030
by fixed frequency
Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

Appendix
0197 Compensation step width of the 3rd axis clearance by 0.0030
fixed frequency
Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

0198 Compensation step width of the 4th axis clearance by 0.0030

fixed frequency
Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

0199 Compensation step width of the 5th axis clearance by 0.0030

fixed frequency
Setting range：0～0.5 (mm)

0200 Time constant of backlash compensation by 20

ascending and descending
Setting range：0～400 （ms）

0201 Backlash compensation mode 0：mode A，1：mode B， 0

2：mode C
Setting range：0～2

0203 Output time of reset signal 200

291
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

Setting range：50～400 (ms)

0204 Digits allowable for M codes 2

Setting range：1～2

0205 Digits allowable for s codes 5

Setting range：1～6

0206 Digits allowable for T codes 4

Setting range：1～4

0207 Delay time of strobe pulse signal MF/SF/TF（n*8） 64

Setting range：16～65535

0208 Acceptable width of M/S/T function completion signal 64

（FIN）（n*8）
Setting range：16～65535

0209 Compensation conditions when the machine Z axis 0

friction compensates（default：1.0）
Setting range：0～0

0210 Incremental amount for automatic sequence number 10

insertion
Setting range：0～1000

0211 Tool offset heading number input by MDI disabled 1

Setting range：0～99
Appendix

0212 Tool offset numbers input by MDI disabled 99

Setting range：0～99
Appendix

0214 Error limit of arc radius (mm) 0.05

Setting range：0.0001～0.1000 （mm）

0216 Pitch error compensation number of the 1st axis 0

reference point
Setting range：0～9999

0217 Pitch error compensation number of the 2nd axis 0

reference point
Setting range：0～9999

0218 Pitch error compensation number of the 3rd axis 0

reference point
Setting range：0～9999

0219 Pitch error compensation number of the 4th axis 0

reference point
Setting range：0～9999

292
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0220 Pitch error compensation number of the 5th axis 0

reference point
Setting range：0～9999

0221 The 1st axis’ pitch error compensation amount from 0

the zero return’s reverse direction to zero
Setting range：-0.9999～0.9999

0222 The 2nd axis’ pitch error compensation amount from 0

the zero return’s reverse direction to zero
Setting range：-0.9999～0.9999

0223 The 3rd axis’ pitch error compensation amount from 0

the zero return’s reverse direction to zero
Setting range：-0.9999～0.9999

0224 The 4th axis’ pitch error compensation amount from 0

the zero return’s reverse direction to zero
Setting range：-0.9999～0.9999

0225 The 5th axis’ pitch error compensation amount from 0

the zero return’s reverse direction to zero
Setting range：-0.9999～0.9999

0226 Pitch error compensation interval of the 1st axis 10

Setting range：0～19999.9998

0227 Pitch error compensation interval of the 2nd axis 0

录
Setting range：0～9999.9999

Appendix
0228 Pitch error compensation interval of the 3rd axis 5
Setting range：0～9999.9999

0229 Pitch error compensation interval of the 4th axis 5

Setting range：0～9999.9999

0230 Pitch error compensation interval of the 5th axis 5

Setting range：0～9999.9999

0231 Blackflash compensation of the 1st axis at rapid 0

move
Setting range：-0.5～0.5

0232 Blackflash compensation of the 2nd axis at rapid 0

move
Setting range：-0.5～0.5

0233 Blackflash compensation of the 3rd axis at rapid 0

move
Setting range：-0.5～0.5

293
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0234 Blackflash compensation of the 4th axis at rapid 0

move
Setting range：-0.5～0.5

0235 Blackflash compensation of the 5th axis at rapid 0

move
Setting range：-0.5～0.5

0240 Gain adjustment data for spindle analog output 1

Setting range：0.98～1.02

0241 Compensation value of offset voltage for spindle 0

analog output
Setting range：-0.2～0.2

0242 Spindle speed at spindle orientation, or motor speed 50

at spindle gear shift
Setting range：0～9999 (r/min)

0246 Spindle maximum speed to gear 1 6000

Setting range：0～99999 (r/min)

0247 Spindle maximum speed to gear 2 6000

Setting range：0～99999 (r/min)

0248 Spindle maximum speed to gear 3 6000

Setting range：0～99999 (r/min)

0250 Spindle motor speed of gear shifting 50

Appendix

Setting range：0～1000 (r/min)

Appendix

0251 Maximum spindle motor speed of shifting 6000

Setting range：0～99999 (r/min)

0254 Axis as counting for surface speed control 0

Setting range：0～4

0255 Spindle minimum speed for constant surface speed 100

control (G96)
Setting range：0～9999 (r/min)

0257 Spindle upper limit speed in tapping cycle 6000

Setting range：0～9999 (r/min)

0258 Spindle upper limit speed 6000

Setting range：0～99999 (r/min)

0261 Spindle encoder lines 1024

294
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Setting range：0～9999

0262 Spindle motor speed at switch point between gear 1 6000

and gear 2
Setting range：0～9999 (r/min)

0263 Spindle motor speed at switch point between gear 2 6000

and gear 3
Setting range：0～9999 (r/min)

0264 Spindle motor speed at switch point between gear 3 6000

and gear 4
Setting range：0～9999 (r/min)

0266 Limit with vector ignored when moving along outside 0

corner in tool radius compensation C
Setting range：0～9999.9999

0267 Wear value’s positive/negative limit value input every 1

time in tool offset（mm）
Setting range：0～999.9999 (mm)

0268 Maximum error value of tool radius compensation C 0.0010

Setting range：0.0001~0.0100

0269 Helical infeed radius coefficient in groove cycle 1.5

Setting range：0.01~3

录
0270 Retraction amount of high-speed peck drilling cycle 2.0000
G73

Appendix
Setting range：0～999.9999 (mm)

0271 Reserved space amount of canned cycle G83 2.0000

Setting range：0～999.9999 (mm)

0272 Dwell time for returning to hole top 2

Setting range：0～100 (ms)

0281 Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom 50

Setting range：0～1000 (ms)

0282 Maximum dwell time at the hole bottom 9999

Setting range：1000～9999 (ms)

0283 Override for retraction in rigid tapping 100

Setting range：0～100
Note: N0：44#4=1, the override value is valid.
N0:45#3=1，the set data unit: 10%，max. override value is set to 1000%.

295
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0284 Retraction or spacing amount in peck tapping cycle 2

Setting range：0～100 (mm)

0286 Tooth number of spindle side gear (the 1st gear) 1

Setting range：1～999

0287 Tooth number of spindle side gear (the 2nd gear) 1

Setting range：1～999

0288 Tooth number of spindle side gear (the 3rd gear) 1

Setting range：1～999

0289 Gear’s teeth number at side of the spindle(the 3rd 1

gear)
Setting range：1～999

0290 Gear’s teeth number at side of the position encoder 1

(the 1st gear)
Setting range：1～999
0291 Gear’s teeth number at side of the position encoder 1
(the 2nd gear)
Setting range：1～999

0292 Gear’s teeth number at side of the position encoder 1

(the 3rd gear)
Setting range：1～999

0293 Gear’s teeth number at side of the position encoder 1

(the 4th gear)
Appendix

Setting range：1～999

0294 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 1st gear) 6000
Appendix

Setting range：0～9999

0295 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 2nd 6000

gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0296 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 3rd 6000

gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0297 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 4th gear) 6000
Setting range：0～9999

0298 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constants of 200

spindle and tapping axis (the 1st gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0299 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constants of 200

spindle and tapping axis (the 2nd gear)

296
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Setting range：0～9999

0300 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constants of 200

spindle and tapping axis (the 3rd gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0301 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constants of 200

spindle and tapping axis (the 4th gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0302 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200

retraction (the 1st gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0303 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200

retraction (the 2nd gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0304 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200

retraction (the 3rd gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0305 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200

retraction (the 4th gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0310 The spindle arrival code speed’s speed permissive rate（q） 5

Setting range： 0～1000

录
0311 Do not send the spindle speed change check alarm’s 5

Appendix
spindle change rate (r)
Setting range： 0～1000

0312 Do not send the spindle speed change check alarm’s 10

spindle speed variation amount (i)
Setting range： 0～9999

0313 Time from codeing the spindle change to starting the 1000
spindle speed change check (p)ms
Setting range： 0～99999

0320 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping (the 1st gear) 0

Setting range：0～99.9999

0321 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping (the 2nd gear) 0

Setting range：0～99.9999

0322 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping (the 3rd gear) 0

Setting range：0～99.9999

0323 Spindle command multiplication coefficient (CMR) (the 1st 512

297
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0324 Spindle command multiplication coefficient (CMR) (the 2nd 512

gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0325 Spindle command multiplication coefficient (CMR) (the 3rd 512

gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0326 Spindle command frequency dividing coefficient (CMD) (the 125

1st gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0327 Spindle command frequency dividing coefficient (CMD) (the 125

2nd gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0328 Spindle command frequency dividing coefficient (CMD) (the 125

3rd gear)
Setting range：0～9999

0340 Coding pretreatment block quantity 0

Setting range：0～0

0341 ARM interpolation point buffer size 36

Setting range：0～99999

0342 The 1st axis zero return at low speed 200

Appendix

Setting range：0～1000

The 2nd axis is zero return at low speed

Appendix

0343 200
Setting range：0～1000

0344 The 3rd axis zero return at low speed 200

Setting range：0～1000

0345 The 4th axis zero return at low speed 200

Setting range：0～1000

0346 The 5th axis zero return at low speed 200

Setting range：0～1000

0352 Acceleration/deceleration time constant of zero 100

return at high-speed
Setting range：3～400

0353 Acceleration/deceleration time constant of zero 30

return at low-speed
Setting range：3～100

298
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0361 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 in thread 20

cutting
Setting range：1～200（ms）

0362 Max. acceleration of linear acceleration/deceleration 5000

run in thread cutting (mm/s*s)
Setting range：1～10000(ms)

0365 Short-axis acceleration/deceleration time constant in 10

thread run-out
Setting range：1～200(ms)

0366 The spindle pulse sampling period in thread turning 16

（ms）
Setting range：0～32

0367 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in 40

rigid thread turning
Setting range：1～400

0368 Thread turning’s initial speed 0

Setting range：1～8000

0370 Thread block end’s chip time（ms） 0

Setting range：0～9

录
0371 The 1st axis’ reverse positioning allowance 0.0150
Setting range：0～99.9999 (mm)

Appendix
0372 The 2nd axis’ reverse positioning allowance 0.0150
Setting range：0～99.9999 (mm)

0373 The 3rd axis’ reverse positioning allowance 0.0150

Setting range：0～99.9999 (mm)

0374 The 4th axis’ reverse positioning allowance 0.0150

Setting range：0～99.9999 (mm)

0375 The 5th axis’ reverse positioning allowance 0.0150

Setting range：0～99.9999 (mm)
When the set backlash compensation value (P0190---P0193) of an axis is bigger than the reverse
positioning allowable error (P0371---P0374) of this axis, the speed at the end point of a single block
reduces to minimum speed before this backlash compensation begins. This will make the other axes
move a small distance in the backlash compensation period, and that will ensure the resultant path
deviates the real path least.

0376 Axes moving sequence to program beginning 12345

Setting range：0～99999

299
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0380 Set the axis which is synchronous with the 4th axis 0
0:is not synchronous 1:X 2:Y 3:Z
Setting range：0～3

0381 Max. permissive error among synchronous axes 200

Setting range：0～10000

0382 Set the double-drive reference position’s difference 0.0000

vlaue
Setting range：0.0000～2000.0000

0392 Move distance when the servo optimizes 50

Setting range： 0～100

0393 Motion rate when when the servo optimizes 2000

Setting range： 0～5000

0394 The coordinate system’s 1st axis backup 0

Setting range： -9999.9999～9999.9999

0395 The coordinate system’s 2nd axis backup 0

Setting range： -9999.9999～9999.9999

0396 The coordinate system’s 3rd axis backup 0

Setting range： -9999.9999～9999.9999

0397 The coordinate system’s 4th axis backup 0

Appendix

Setting range： -9999.9999～9999.9999

0398 The coordinate system’s 5th axis backup 0

Appendix

Setting range： -9999.9999～9999.9999

400 Gain regulation data of the spindle speed analog 0

output
Setting range： -0.2～0.2

401 Compensation value of the spindle speed alaong 50

outputting voltage
Setting range： 0～9999

402 The spindle speed of the 2nd spindle orientation or 50

gear shifting
Setting range： 0～9999

403 Corresponding to the gear 1’s spindle max. speed 6000

Setting range： 0～9999

404 Corresponding to the gear 2’s spindle max. speed 6000

Setting range： 0～9999

300
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

405 Corresponding to the gear 3’s spindle max. speed 6000

Setting range： 0～9999

406 Corresponding to the gear 4’s spindle max. speed 6000

Setting range： 0～9999

407 Motor speed when the 2nd spindle gear shifting 50

Setting range： 0～1000

408 Max. motor speed when the 2nd spindle gear shifting 6000
Setting range： 0～99999

409 The 2nd spindle’s upper limit speed 6000

Setting range： 0～99999

410 The 2nd spindle encoder lines 1024

Setting range： 1～999

411 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle（the 1st 1

gear）
Setting range： 1～999

412 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle（the 2nd 1

gear）
Setting range： 1～999

录
413 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle（the 3rd 1

Appendix
gear）
Setting range： 1～999

414 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle（the 4th 1

gear）
Setting range： 1～999

415 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle 1

encoder（the 1st gear）
Setting range： 1～999

416 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle 1

encoder（the 2nd gear）
Setting range： 1～999

417 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle 1

encoder（the 3rd gear）
Setting range： 1～999

418 Gear’s teeth number at side of the 2nd spindle 1

encoder（the 4th gear）
Setting range： 1～999

301
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

419 Spindle motor speed at the 2nd spindle’s switch point 6000
between gear 1 and gear 2
Setting range： 0～99999（r/min）

420 Spindle motor speed at the 2nd spindle’s switch point 6000
between gear 2 and gear 3
Setting range： 0～99999（r/min）

421 Spindle motor speed at the 2nd spindle’s switch point 6000
between gear 3 and gear 4
Setting range： 0～99999（r/min）

4440 M code for Cs contour controllable axis function start 14

Setting range： 0～9999

4441 M code for Cs contour controllable axis function close 15

Setting range： 0～9999

0445 Axis 1 allocating the grating precision 0.001

Setting range：0.0000～10.0000

0446 Axis 2 allocating the grating precision 0.001

Setting range：0.0000～10.0000

0447 Axis 3 allocating the grating precision 0.001

Setting range：0.0000～10.0000

0448 Axis 4 allocating the grating precision 0.001

Setting range：0.0000～10.0000
Appendix

0449 Axis 5 allocating the grating precision 0.001

Appendix

Setting range：0.0000～10.0000

0450 Position offset limit value when the 1st axis moving 10
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～99.9999

0451 Position offset limit value when the 2nd axis moving 10
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～99.9999

0452 Position offset limit value when the 3rd axis moving 10
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～99.9999

0453 Position offset limit value when the 4th axis moving 10
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～99.9999

0454 Position offset limit value when the 5th axis moving 10
（mm）

302
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

Setting range：0.0000～99.9999

0455 Position offset limit value when the 1st axis stopping 0.5
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～9.9999

0456 Position offset limit value when the 2nd axis stopping 0.5
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～9.9999

0457 Position offset limit value when the 3rd axis stopping 0.5
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～9.9999

0458 Position offset limit value when the 4th axis stopping 0.5
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～9.9999

0459 Position offset limit value when the 5th axis stopping 0.5
（mm）
Setting range：0.0000～9.9999

0460 Non-montone permissive value of the compound 0.1

turning cycle（Z）
Setting range：0.0000～9999.9999

0461 Non-montone permissive value of the compound 0.1

turning cycle（X）
Setting range：0.0000～9999.9999

录
0462 Feed amount of compound turning fixed cycle G71, 0

Appendix
G72
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999

0463 Feed amount of compound turning fixed cycle G71, 0

G72
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999

0465 Tool retraction distance of compound turning fixed 0

cycle G73（X）
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999

0466 Tool retraction distance of compound turning fixed 0

cycle G73（Z）
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999

0467 Division times of compound turning fixed cycle G73 0

Setting range：-9999～9999

0468 Return amount of compound turning fixed cycle 0

G74，G75
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999

303
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0469 Least tool infeed amount of compound turning fixed 0

cycle G76
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999
0470 Finishing allowance of compound turning fixed cycle G76 0
Setting range：-9999.0000～9999.9999

0471 Finishing allowance’s repetitive times of G76 0

Setting range：-9999～9999

0472 Too nose angle of compound turning fixed cycle G76 0

Setting range：9999～9999

0473 Chamfering (setting value*0.1 lead) of turning thread cycle 0

（G92,G76）
Setting range：0～127

0474 Cutting angle of turning thread cycle G76 0

Setting range：0～89

0475 Whether to execute the last roughing path when the 0

compound turning fixed cycle G71，G72 is type II
Setting range：0～1

0476 Idle stroke amount of compound turning fixed cycle G71’s 1

cutting feed start position
Setting range：0～5

0477 Whether the slot bottom’s tool retraction of compound 0

turning fixedcycle G71 to execute 45 degree tool retraction
Setting range：0～1
Appendix

0480 Execute the controlled axis of No.1 position switch function 0

Appendix

Setting range：0～5

0481 Execute the controlled axis of No.2 position switch function 0

Setting range：0～5

0482 Execute the controlled axis of No.3 position switch function 0

Setting range：0～5

0483 Execute the controlled axis of No.4 position switch function 0

Setting range：0～5

0484 Execute the controlled axis of No.5 position switch function 0

Setting range：0～5

0485 Execute the controlled axis of No.6 position switch function 0.

Setting range：0～5

304
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0486 Execute the controlled axis of No.7 position switch function 0

Setting range：0.～5

0487 Execute the controlled axis of No.8 position switch function 0

Setting range：0～5
0488 Execute the controlled axis of No.9 position switch 0
function
Setting range：0～5

0489 Execute the controlled axis of No.10 position switch 0

function
Setting range：0～5

0490 Max. value of No. 01 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0491 Max. value of No. 02 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0492 Max. value of No. 03 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0493 Max. value of No. 04 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0494 Max. value of No. 05 position switch operation range 0.0000

录
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

Appendix
0495 Max. value of No. 06 position switch operation range 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0496 Max. value of No. 07 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0497 Max. value of No. 08 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0498 Max. value of No. 09 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0499 Max. value of No.10 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0500 Least value of No. 01 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0501 Least value of No. 02 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

305
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0502 Least value of No. 03 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0503 Least value of No. 04 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999
0504 Least value of No. 05 position switch operation range 0.0000
Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0505 Least value of No. 06 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0506 Least value of No. 07 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0507 Least value of No. 08 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0508 Least value of No. 09 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0509 Least value of No.10 position switch operation range 0.0000

Setting range：-9999.9999～9999.9999

0530 Linear axis’ axis number in polar coordinate interpolation 0.0000

（0：none 1~5：the 1st axis~the 5th axis）
Setting range：0～5
Appendix

0531 Rotary axis’ axis number in polar coordinate interpolation 0.0000

（0：none 1~5：the 1st axis~the 5th axis）
Setting range：0～5
Appendix

0532 Automatic rate’s permissive rate % in polar coordinate 90

interpolation（0~100）
Setting range：0～100

0533 Imaginary axis direction error’s compensation amount in 0.0000

polar coordinate interpolation
Setting range：-999.0000～999.0000

0540 System axis number controlled by PMC axis（0：none 0

1~5：the 1st axis~the 5th axis）
Setting range：0～5

0541 Least unit of data controlled by PMC axis（0.0001~360.0） 0.0010

Setting range：0.0001～360.0000

0542 System axis number controlled by the 2nd PMC axis（0： 0

none 1~5：the 1st axis~the 5th axis）
Setting range：0～5

306
 Appendix 1 GSK980TC3 Serial Parameter List

0543 Least unit of data controlled by the 2 PMC axi 0.001

（0.0001~360.0）
Setting range：0.0001～360.0000

录
Appendix

307
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual
Appendix

Appendix

308
 Appendix 2 Alarm List

Appendix II Alarm List

Alarm No. Content Remark

0000 Parameter for cutting off power once is modified
0001 File open fail
0002 Data input overflow
0003 Program number already in use
There is no address but figure or character "-" at the beginning of the block.
0004
Modify the program
There is no appropriate data but another address or EOB code behind the
0005
address. Modify the program
Sign "-" input is wrong (One or more "-" signs are input behind the address
0006
where negative sign can not be used). Modify the program
Decimal point "." input is wrong (One or more "." signs are input in the address
0007
where the sign can not be used). Modify the program
0008 The program file is too large. Please use CNC to transmit it
0009 Illegal address input. Modify the program.
Have used the unusable G doe or have commanded the G code which has no
0010
the function. Modify the program
0011 Feedrate is not specified or it is wrong in cutting feed. Modify the program
0012 Disk space is not enough. Setup or add file is not allowed
0013 The program files are up to the upper limit. New programs can not be setup
0015 Exceed the number of simultaneously controlled axes
0016 Current pitch compensation beyond range
0017 No authority to modify

Appendix
Dummy variable and local variable are not allowed to modify. G10 only to
0018
modify parameter of user grade
In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), the distance between the start point and
0020 the circle center is not equal to the distance between the end point and the
circle center. The value beyond the one specified by parameter 214
In circular interpolation, axes which are not in the selected planes (G17, G18,
0021
G19) are specified. Modify the program.
In circular interpolation, R (radius), I, J and k (distance from the start point to
0022
the center) are not be specified
0023 In circular interpolation, I, J, K and R are specified together
0026 Unsupported file format. It is too large or with above 1024 bytes
In plane selection codes, two or more axes are specified at the same direction.
0028
Modify the program
When G10 sets an offset amount, a workpiece coordinate system and an
0031
external workpiece coordinate system, P value is too big or is not specified
When G10 sets the offset amount or the system variable writes an offset
0032
amount, the offset amount is too big or is not specified. Modify the program
The intersecting point of offset C or chamfer is not confirmed. Modify the
0033
program
Set-up or offset cancel are not allowed in circular command. Modify the
0034
program
In tool compensation mode, have commanded the skip cutting （ G31 ）。
0036
Modify the program

309
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

The plane selected by G17, G18 or G19 is changed in tool compensation C.

0037
Modify the program
In tool compensation C, overcut appears because the arc start point or end
0038
pont is consistent with the arc center. Modify the program
0039 Tool nose positioning error in tool compensation C
Cannot convert the workpiece coordinate system in tool compensation C.
0040
Cancel the tool compensation before changing the workpiece coordinate
Interference occurs in tool compensation C leads overcutting. Modify the
0041
program
Ten blocks with stop tool code are specified in tool compensation mode.
0042
Modify the program
0043 No authority. Change it in password page
In canned cycle, one of codes in G27，G28，G29，G30 is specified. Modify the
0044
program
In canned cycle G73/G83, cutting depth (Q) is not specified or it is 0. Modify
0045
the program
In 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference return codes, codes besides P2, P3 and P4 is
0046
specified
0050 Move it when changing canned cycle mode
Have specified a mistaken movement operation or movement distance in a
0051
block following the cornering or chamfering. Modify the program
0053 Wrong command format for rounding or chamfering. Modify the program
0055 Chamfering movement failed
0056 M99 shall not in the same block with macro code G65. Modify the program
0057 File input failed. Cut off the power and reset it
In block of rounding or chamfering, specified axis is not in the selected plane.
0058
Modify the program
Program number is not found in external program retrieving or it is edited in
0059 background. Check program number or external signal, or stop background
Appendix

editting
Specified sequence number is not found in retrieving. Check sequence
0060
number
Appendix

0061 The 1st axis is not on the reference point

0062 The 2nd axis is not on the reference point
0063 The 3rd axis is not on the reference point
0064 The 4th axis is not on the reference point
0065 The 5th axis is not on the reference point
0066 Cancel canned cycle mode before inputting parameter (G10)
0067 G10 does not support the set format
0068 Parameter switch is not switched on
0069 U-disk operation page should be closed when machining
0070 Insufficient memory. Delete unneeded programs and try it again
Have not found the required searched address or have not foundthe specified
0071
program number’s program in the program search. Check the data
0072 Stored programs exceed 400. Delete unnecessary programs
Program number already in use. Change the program number or delete
0073
unneeded program
0074 Program number beyond the range 1-99999). Change the program number

310
 Appendix 2 Alarm List

0075 To register a protected program number

0076 Address P (program name) is not specified in block M98. Modify the program
0077 Program nesting exceed 5 layers
In blocks M98, G65, program name specified by address P is not found or
0078
macro program called by M06 does not exist
0079 CNC expires the using date. Please contact the supplier
Input data is wrong, Max. speed is smaller than Min. speed or Min. speed is
0080
bigger than Max. speed
0081 Subprogram can not be called. Modify the program
0084 Overtime or short circuit occurs in key
Overflow occurs when data is transmitted to memory by series port. Baud rate
0085
setting or I/O equipment is wrong
0086 Planes can not be shifted in canned cycle mode
Alarm NO.0087~0091 are for reference point return unfinished (starting point
0087
of reference return is too close to the reference point or the speed is too slow).
0092 G27(check for reference return) code can not return to the reference point
0093 Motor model error
After power-on or emergency stop, when the program with G28, program
0098
restarts without executing reference return
On parameter (setting) screen, PWE (parameter input is active) is set to 1.
0100
Restart CNC after setting it to 0.
0101 Memory data disordered after power off, please ensure correct location
0102 Driver motor does not match CNC
0103 Bus communication error. Please check reliability of the cable
0104 Machine zero point setting error
0105 Time-out error while data is being fetched

Appendix
0106 Drive unit is not consistent with gear ratio of servo parameter
0107 Drive unit parameter is not consistent with servo unit parameter
0108 Please insert U-disk
0110 Position data exceeds the allowed range. Please reset
Calculated result exceeds the allowed range (-1047 to -10-29，0 and 10-29 to
0111
1047 )
0112 Zero (including tan900) is specified as a divisor
Unusable functional code is specified in user macro program. Modify the
0113
program
0114 G39 format error. Modify the program
Variable value can not be specified. O, N can not be specified as variables in
0115
user macro program
A variable is on the left of the assignment statement, while value assignment
0116
to it is not allowed. Modify the program
G10 online modification is not supported by this parameter. Please modify the
0117
program
0118 Nest exceeds the upper limit (5). Modify the program
Codes M00,M01,M02,M30,M98,M99,M06 can not in a same block with other
0119
M codes
0120 Part of setting is restored

311
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0121 Machine coordinates and encoder feedback values exceed setting value of
error
0122 Called nests of macro program exceed 5 layers. Modify the program
0124 Program end illegally, without M30, M02, M99 or end sign. Modify the program
0125 Macro program format error. Modify the program
0126 Program cycle failure. Modify the program
0127 NC coexists with user macro code statement. Modify the program
Sequence number in branch code is not at the range 0-99999, or the number
0128
is not found. Modify the program
0129 The address of argument assignment. Modify the program
PLC axis control code is input to the axis controlled by CNC, or opposite.
0130
Modify the program
0131 5 or more external alarm signals occur. Check the ladder diagram
0132 The alarm of the external alarm signal does not exist. Check PLC
0133 The system does not support axis code. Modify the program
The index angle of index table is not an ange unit’s multiple. Modify the
0135
program
In index table’s indexing, it with B axis commands another axis. Modify the
0136
program
Sequence number to be transferred by skip code is in loop body. Modify the
0137
program
0138 Cycle statement is wrong or skip code enters loop body. Modify the program
0139 PLC axis change disabled. Modify the program
0140 Sequence number does not exist
The proportion scaling override exceeding 1-999999 is commanded. Correct
0142
the proportion scaling setting
0145 G28 is commanded when a reference point is not established
Appendix

The automatic corner deceleration speed exceeds the the judgement angle
0148
range’s setting value. Modify the parameter
0150 Mistaken modal command
Appendix

Blocks specified by P and Q have commanded the unusable commands in the

0151
compound fixed cycle
0160 Arc programming only by R in polar system
Reference point, plane selection or direction-related codes can not be
0161
executed in polar coordinate mode
0165 Please specify revolution, scaling or G10 codes in a single block
0166 No axis specified in reference return
0167 Intermediate point coordinate too large
The min. dwell time at the hole bottom should be shorter than the max. dwell
0168
time
Tool radius compensation is not cancelled while entering or exiting
0170
subprogram
0172 P is not an integer or less than 0 in a block calling subprogram
0173 Subprogram call should be less than 9999
0175 Canned cycle can only be executed in G17 plane
0176 Spindle speed is not specified before rigid tapping

312
 Appendix 2 Alarm List

Spindle orientation is not supported by IO control in G76 code. Modify the

0177
program or parameter
0178 Spindle speed is not specified before the canned cycle starts
0181 Illegal M code
0182 The spindle speed is too big or small
0183 IlIegal T code
0184 The selected too exceed its range
0189 U is too small, U should bigger than or equal to tool radius
0190 V is too small or it is undefined. V should be bigger than 0
0191 W is too small or it is undefined. W should be bigger than 0
0192 Q is too small or it is undefined. Q should be bigger than 0
0193 I is undefined or it is 0
0194 J is undefined or it is 0
0195 D is undefined or it is 0
In constant surface cutting speed control, specified axis error (see parameter
0198
No.254)
0199 Macro code modification program is not defined
0200 In rigid tapping, illegal S code
0204 M29 should be specified in G80 mode. Modify the program
0206 Plane shifting is specified in rigid tapping. Modify the program
0208 This code can not be executed in G10 mode. Please cancel G10 mode first
The program restart file name is not consistent. Please select a correct file
0210
name
Chamfer or R is specified, or other axis is specified in plane. Modify the
0212
program

Appendix
0213 Tool changing macro program does not support G31 skip. Modify the program
0214 Tool changing macro program does not support skip operation
Tool changing macro program does not support modifying coordinate system
0215
and tool compensation dynamically
M06 Tool magazine is not used (parameter is not opened). Tool changing code
0219
can not be used
Metric/inch switching is not supported by scaling, revolution and polar
0220
coordinate mode
0221 Metric/inch switching is not supported by tool changing macro program
0224 Reference return is not performed before auto run started
There are following errors in the parameter input’s specified format error:
1) N or R is not input
2) Parameter number is not defined
0231 3) Address P is not defined in bit parameter input L50
4) N，P，R exceed the range

0232 3 or more axes are specified as helical interpolation axis

0233 Device connected to RS-232-C is being used
0235 Specified record end sign (%)
0236 Parameter setting of program restart is wrong

313
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

0237 The command’s decimal point which must be specified is not specified
The same address in one block exists many times or two or more G codes in
0238
the same group are in one block
An illegal G code is specified in pre-reading control mode. In pre-reading
control mode, dividing spindle is specified, max. cutting feeding parameter is
0239
set to 0 and interpolation pro-acceleration/deceleration parameter is set to 0.
Set the parameter correctly
0241 MPG pulse is abnormal
0242 Bus connection error
0250 Axis name repeated, please modify parameter NO.175~179
0251 Emergency stop alarm, perform zero return again after canceling the alarm
Program ends illegally (CNC transmission speed is low, please reduce
0252
feedrate)
Pulse code of DSP interpolation axis is too big. Perform zero return again after
0261
reset
0262 DSP is not started. Please power on again
0263 DSP parameter setting error
0264 DSP alarm. Data is too big
0265 DSP alarm. The bus can not be connected or bus initialization failure
Speed of DSP interpolation axis exceeds 200M/MIN. Perform zero return
0266
again after reset
0267 DSP initial sign (5555) is abnormal. Perform zero return again after reset
DSP pulse output volume per revolution is too big. Perform zero return again
0268
after reset
0269 DSP internal alarm. Perform zero return again after reset
0270 Length of DSP equally distributed interpolation point is too small
DSP received interpolation data is too small. Perform zero return again after
0271
Appendix

reset
0272 DSP received undistinguishable G code
0273 DSP hardware data interchange is abnormal (codes)
Appendix

0274 DSP hardware data interchange is abnormal (data)

0275 In high-speed mode, interpolation multiple is 0

0280 Perform axes zero return before using tool setting function
0281 Switch to [SET] [Halving] interface before using tool setting function
0282 Please check whether toolsetting gauge is installed or parameter 1.6 is set
Z axis exceeds safety position， please check toolsetting gauge or tool length
0283
setting
0286 Automatic tool length measurement is wrong. Please measure it again
0401 The drive alarm 01：the servo motor speed exceeds its setting value
0402 The drive alarm 02：the main circuit’s power supply voltage is too high
0403 The drive alarm 03：the main circuit’s power supply voltage is too low
The drive alarm 04：the numerical value of position deviation counter exceeds
0404
its setting value
0405 The drive alarm 05：the motor’s temperature is too high
0406 The drive alarm 06：the speed regulator satyrates for long time

314
 Appendix 2 Alarm List

0407 The drive alarm 07：CCW, CW drive inhibiting input are OFF
The drive alarm 08：the numerical value’s absolute value of position deviation
0408
counter exceeds 230
0409 The drive alarm 09：the encoder signal is mistaken
0410 The drive alarm 10：control power supply ±15V is low
0411 The drive alarm 11：IPM faults
0412 The drive alarm 12：the motor’s current is too big
The drive alarm 13：the servo driver and motor are overload(instantaneous
0413
overheat)
0414 The drive alarm 14：the braking circuit fault
0415 The drive alarm 15：encoder counter fault
0420 The drive alarm 20：EEPROM error
0430 The drive alarm 30：encoder Z pulse error
0431 The drive alarm 31：encoder UVW signal error or it does not match encoder
0432 The drive alarm 32：UVW with all high level or with all low level
0433 The drive alarm 33：communication interrupted
0434 The drive alarm 34：encoder speed is abnormal
0435 The drive alarm 35：encoder state is abnormal
0436 The drive alarm 36：encoder counter is abnormal
0437 The drive alarm 37：single circle number of encoder overflow
0438 The drive alarm 38：encoder counter overflow
0439 The drive alarm 39：encoder battery alarm
0440 The drive alarm 40：encoder battery’s power shortage

Appendix
0441 The drive alarm 41：motor model dismatched
0442 The drive alarm 42：absolute position data abnormal alarm
0443 The drive alarm 43：encoder EPPROM check alarm
0449 Ethernet initialization failure. Please check hardware
Drive unit is disconnected. Please check whether connection of hardware is
0450
correct
0451 The 1st axis driver alarm
0452 The 2nd axis driver alarm
0453 The 3rd axis driver alarm
0454 The 4th axis driver alarm
0455 The 5th axis driver alarm
0456 Spindle driver alarm
Exceed the machining cycle processed by G71, G72, G73, G76, G90, G92,
0460
G94
0466 The path is non-monotonous：X direction
0467 The path is non-monotonous：Z direction
The 1st axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0500
movement release).
0501 The 1st axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction

315
 GSK980TC3 Series Bus Turning CNC system Programming and Operation User Manual

movement release).
The 2nd axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0502
movement release).
The 2nd axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0503
movement release).
The 3rd axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0504
movement release).
The 3rd axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0505
movement release).
The 4th axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0506
movement release).
The 4th axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0507
movement release).
The 5th axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0508
movement release).
The 5th axis soft limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0509
movement release).
The 1st axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0510
movement release).
The 1st axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0511
movement release).
The 2nd axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0512
movement release).
The 2nd axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0513
movement release).
The 3rd axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0514
movement release).
The 3rd axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0515
movement release).
The 4th axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0516
movement release).
The 4th axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG -direction
0517
Appendix

movement release).
The 5th axis hard limit - direction overtravel:(manual or MPG +direction
0518
movement release).
The 5th axis hard limit-direction overtravel: (manual or MPG -direction
Appendix

0519
movement release).
0600 The operation keyboard is not connected. Please check its connection cable
1001 Address of relay or coil is not set
1002 Function code of input code does not exist
Function code COM is not used correctly. Corresponding relationship between
1003
COM and COME is wrong, or function code is used between COM and COME
User ladder beyond the maximum permissible linage or step number. Reduce
1004
NET number
Function commands END1，END2 do not exist；errors in END1，END2；or
1005
END1，END2’s sequence is not correct
1006 Illegal output in the network. Please check the output format
PLC communication failure due to hardware failure or system interruption.
1007
Please contact with the system device manufacture
1008 Functional code is not linked correctly
1009 Network horizontal line is not linked
1010 Editing NET losses due to power-off in ladder editting

316
 Appendix 2 Alarm List

1011 Address or data format is not the one specified by this function. Input it again
1012 Address or data is wrongly input. Input it again
1013 Illegal character or data defined
1014 CTR address repeated. Reselect other unused TMR addresses
Functional code is wrongly used. Correspondence between JMP and LBL is
1015
wrong. JMP is used again between JMP and LBL
1016 Incomplete network structure. Change the ladder diagram
1017 Unsupported network exists. Change the ladder diagram
1019 TMR address repeated. Reselect other unused TMR addresses
1020 No parameter in functional code. Input the legal parameters
PLC stops automatically by CNC when the PLC executes overtime. Please
1021 check the ladder logic and resolve the endless loop or the overmuch repetitive
calls
1022 Names of functional code missing. Please input the name of functional codes
1023 Address or constant of functional code parameter is out of range
1024 Unnecessary relay or coil exists. Delete the unnecessary connection
1025 Functional code output wrongly
1026 NET link linage beyond the supported range. Change the ladder diagram
The same output address is used in another place. Reselect the unused
1027
output address
1028 File format wrong
1029 File losses from ladder diagram being used
1030 False vertical line in network. Delete the vertical line
1031 Message data area is full. Please reduce COD code data list capacity
The first level of ladder diagram is too large to complete execution on time.

Appendix
1032
Reduce the first level of ladder diagram
1033 SFT codes beyond the max. allowed number. Please reduce the usageamount
1034 Functional code DIFU/DIFD address is repeated. Please reselect the address
1039 Code or network beyond executable area. Please clear them
Functional code CALL or SP is wrongly used. Correspondence between CALL
1040 and SP or between SP and SPE is wrong. SP functional code is used again
between SP and SPE or SP is set before using END2
1041 Level conducting line in parallel with node network
1042 PLC system parameter file is not loaded

317